Home

- AskTOP.net

1.
2. Figure 4 8 Sample of emergency GPS diagram a The plan view The plan view will include the following 1 The highest obstacle altitude MSL in bold 2 The approach course degrees magnetic IAF IF FAF MAP MAHF holding pattern obstacles and MSA It also includes the terms a FOR VFR TRAINING and EMERG USE ONLY twice b PRECISE POSITIONING SERVICE PPS REQUIRED b Minimums section The minimums section will include the following The MDA visibility and height above landing HAL Use table 4 7 to compute the landing visibility minimum based on HAL c Landing area sketch The landing area sketch includes a drawing diagram of the landing area and the elevation of the highest obstacle within the landing area if applicable d Prior to publication the diagram will include as a minimum all items included in the example diagram Table 4 7 Landing visibility minimums based on height above landing 250 475 ft 476 712 ft 713 950 ft Landing Visibility Minimum SM 9 Flight check Complete a flight check under VMC in an aircraft to finalize the procedure and validate the diagram Once a successful flyability suitability check has been completed the diagram will be validated by the developer in the lower marginal data area Once validated by the developer the procedure must be approved by the appropriate authority in the lower marginal data area prior to publication The
3. ccccceceeeeeeccecceeeeeeeeeeseneceeeeeeesenstneeeeess 4 45 Task 1028 Perform hover power CheCK c cec eceeceeeeeeeeeececeaeceeeeeeeseccueaeeeeeeeseseeeseaeees 4 47 Task 1032 Perform radio communication S procedures cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeaas 4 49 Task 1033 Perform digital communication procedures cccceeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeeateeeetneeeeeeaas 4 51 Task 1034 Perform ground taxi ccceeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeeeneeeeesceeeseeneeeeesneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 52 Task 1038 Perform hovering flight 0 ccceeeeeeeeeee settee eter ee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeensaeeeeeeaas 4 55 Task 1039 Perform hovering flight utilizing symbology cc eee eee eeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeenae 4 58 Task 1040 Perform visual meteorological conditions takeoff eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 4 60 Task 1042 Perform cruise Check ProCeCUres ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseceueaeeeeeeesessnsinaeeees 4 63 ii TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Contents Task 1044 Navigate by pilotage and dead reckoning cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 66 Task 1046 Perform electronically aided navigation ccccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 67 Task 1052 Perform visual meteorological conditions flight maneuvers 4 68 Task 1058 Perform visual meteorological conditions approach ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 70 Task 1062 Perform slope operations cccccccsccceceeeeeeeeeeene
4. Communicate Effectively amp Information ay Manage amp Coordinate Actions Events amp Advisories Workloads Situational Aircraft amp Mission Cross Monitor Performan Figure 6 1 Crew coordination principles Communicate effectively and timely Good team relationships begin with effective communication among crewmembers Communication is effective when the sender directs announces requests or offers information the receiver acknowledges the information and the sender confirms the receipt of information based on the receiver s acknowledgment or action This enables the efficient flow and exchange of important mission information that keeps a crew on top of any situation that arises 1 Announce and acknowledge decisions and actions To ensure effective and well coordinated actions in the aircraft all crewmembers must be kept informed and made aware of decisions expected movements of crew and aircraft and the unexpected individual actions of others Each crewmember will announce any actions that may affect the actions of other crewmembers In turn communications in the aircraft must include supportive feedback that clearly indicates that crewmembers acknowledge and correctly understand announcements decisions or directives of other crewmembers 2 Ensure that statements and directives are clear timely relevant complete and verified These are qualities that must describe the kind of communication that is e
5. a Physically check functionality of all cockpit switches and controls and set as required for the MTF Include all CBs alternating current gang bars spring loaded switches guarded switches knobs and rheostats Direct the NCM to assist with cabin area CBs as required b AN ARC 186 Communication check Select MAN manual with the MAN NORM GUARD switch on the EMERG AUX control panel to energize the AN ARC 186 control set in the center console Manually tune desired frequency place CAP TX select function switch to POS position 3 and verify transmit receive capability Program check control set pre sets as required Place MAN NORM GUARD switch back to NORM after operation of control set if verified c Aircraft lighting Ensure all interior and exterior lighting functions IAW the appropriate operator s manual and MTF manual Direct assistance from the RCM as required to verify cockpit lighting functionality and the NCM to verify cabin and exterior lighting responses as required d Interphone check Check pilot and co pilot cyclic trigger switches at both detents floor switch and HOTMIC Direct NCM to check additional ICS stations push to talk HOTMIC and floor switch if installed and hoist operators panel ICS Verify VOX CALL HOTMIC and private functionality at all stations in CH 47F e Cyclic trim Check switches control their respective actuators and function as prescribed in the MTF
6. b Table 6 2 is an example of crew coordination callout Table 6 2 Example of aircrew coordination callout P Wires 12 o clock Wires in sight climbing right to cross at the pole Clear right and above Clear right and above P Clear left and above Clear of the wires Descending left P Clear left and below c Table 6 3 is an example of acceptable navigation statements Table 6 3 Example of acceptable navigation statements Orientation to terrain feature relative to the aircrafts Directly ahead Out your right door or On your current heading right side Terrain locator information The hill at your 2 o clock position or Straight ahead to the pond 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 Chapter 6 Initial turning command Turn left or Turn right When the aircraft is above nap of the earth altitudes a heading may be given for example Turn right to 320 degrees Command given when the P has verified that the Stop turn desired heading has been achieved Clock position associated with a specific terrain Along the tree line at 2 o clock feature to prevent the P from misinterpreting the exact heading described d Table 6 4 is an example of properly sequenced and timed actions Table 6 4 Example of properly sequenced and timed actions While at a hover announces his intent to turn right
7. d Arrive at each objective at the planned time 1 minute if an objective arrival time was given in the mission briefing NCM Announce significant terrain features to aid in navigation DESCRIPTION 1 4 124 Crew actions a The P will remain focused outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions and cues given by the P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for heading and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P will announce significant terrain features to assist the P in navigation b The P will furnish the P with the information required to remain on course The P will announce all plotted wires hazards before approaching their location The P will use rally terms and terrain features to convey instructions to the P Examples of these terms are TURN LEFT to your 10 O CLOCK STOP TURN and TURN DOWN the VALLEY to the LEFT If using the HSI 1 during low level flight 80 feet AHO the P may include headings The P should use electronically aided navigation to help arrive at a specific checkpoint turning point or objective c The P P and NCM should use standardized terms to prevent misinterpretation of information and unnecessary cockpit conversation The crew must look far enough ahead of the aircraft at all times to assist in avoiding traffic and obstacles Procedures a During NOE and contour flight identify prominent terrain features located
8. 1 PC air mission commander AMC will conduct a detailed crew level AAR using the example shown below or a unit approved crew level AAR CL after each flight 2 All crewmembers will actively participate in the review DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a crew level AAR The PC will use a unit approved CL similar to the one shown in table 4 4 The PC will actively seek input from all crewmembers The PC will ensure that the results of the review are passed to operations and flight standards b All crewmembers will actively participate in the review The intent is to constructively review the mission and apply lessons learned into subsequent missions Procedures a Using an AAR CL participate in a crew level AAR of the mission Table 4 5 provides a suggested crew level AAR CL for the minimum mandatory items required b The review should be an open and frank discussion of all aspects of the mission It should include all mission factors and incorporate all crewmembers The results of the review should be passed to operations and flight standards Table 4 5 Suggested format for a crew level after action review checklist 1 Restate mission objectives with mission enemy terrain and weather troop and support available time available and civil considerations METT TC 2 Conduct review for each mission segment a Restate planned actions interactions for the segment b What actually h
9. 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47F or in the TFPS 2 Manually turn off EGI 1 or EGI 2 through the power page on the CDU Ensure airspeed is at or below 100 KCAS prior to failing EGI 3 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or manually turn off desired EGI J EGI 1 and EGI 2 failure 1 Conditions This may be only performed in the TFPS 2 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or manually turn off the EGIs F MFD failure s 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47F or in the TFPS 2 Manually dim MFD s using BACK LIGHT BRIGHT BK LT BRT switch to desired level 3 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or using BK LT BRT switch to desired level J CDU failure s 1 Conditions This may only be performed TFPS 2 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or verbally describe the indications F Data concentrator system DCS 1 or DCS 2 failure 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the TFPS 2 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or verbally describe the indications J DCS 1 and 2 failure 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the TFPS 2 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or verbally describe the indications TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 AC ADF AFCS AFRM AGL AHO AIM AKO ALSE AMC AMCOM ANCD ANVIS APART APU AR ARNG ASE ASET ATC ATGM ATM ATP ATTP AVA AWR BIT CAAS CBRNE CCDA CDI CDU CE CG CGI CH CL 5 April 2013 Glossary after act
10. 1 The PC will analyze the mission using METT TC and determine the amount of water required to conduct the mission and the initial profile to be used during the water emplacement 2 The NCMs will ensure that the water bucket is installed and all installation checks are completed IAW the unit s SOP 3 The crew will conduct the ground checks IAW the manufacturer s procedures to confirm the proper operation of the water bucket before takeoff b Hook up and HVR 1 Once the water bucket is placed on the ground beside the aircraft and all associated wiring is installed place the cargo hook master switch in the ARM position 2 Follow verbal signals from the NCM to HVR over the water bucket Apply control movements as necessary to remain vertically clear and centered over the water bucket 3 Once in this position smoothly apply thrust control input until all slack is removed from the suspension cable Maintain heading with pedals 4 Apply additional thrust to raise the bucket to 10 feet AGL Monitor aircraft instruments to ensure that aircraft limitations are not exceeded c Water pickup Evaluation of the water pickup should include depth obstacles water current and availability of HVR references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 149 Chapter 4 4 150 1 Bambi bucket water pick up a Arrive over water source with no forward ground speed and a bucket height of 10 feet above water level b Slowly reduce the thrust cont
11. 2 The HSDH symbology will be selected to view the velocity vector and acceleration cue and select the appropriate HVR Mode to assist in maintaining SA 3 Ifdisorientation occurs apply sufficient PWR and execute an ITO Task 1170 4 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Use of the white light may impair night vision for several MINs Therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation 4 58 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks WARNING At night use of landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS If visual references do deteriorate to an unacceptable level the procedure below will assist in maintaining SA and aircraft control 1 Hovering flight Prior to hovering flight the HSDH symbology will be selected to view the velocity vector and acceleration cue 2 The P or P as directed will select HVR hold and the appropriate altitude hold RAD ALT or inertial ALT hold 3 Select either AUTO transition 30 knots reference scale or precision 10 knots reference scale as the HVR mode so small movements in position will be detected 4 Stabilize at the appropriate HVR height until the HVR hold position and altitude are captured 5 Adjust position with the DAFCS trim switch and altitude
12. 4 Direct the NCM to assist with maintaining obstacle avoidance and advise the cockpit concerning the movement of other aircraft operating in the immediate area d Perform the PAT IAW the applicable reference e Once the check has been completed for both ENGs return to the CL HVR procedures a The P briefs and coordinates with the P and NCM as necessary 1 Direct the P to maintain HVR position and heading while maintaining orientation outside the cockpit Position hold PHOLD and translational rate command TRC may be used in order to maintain position 2 Direct the NCM to assist with maintaining obstacle avoidance and advise the cockpit concerning other aircraft hazards in the area b Perform the PAT IAW the applicable references Manipulation of the ECLs may not be required if the TQs are in the appropriate ranges for the PAT c Once the check has been completed for both ENGs continue with the CL Inflight procedures a The inflight PAT procedure will be conducted only if environmental conditions prevent the check on the ground or HVR 1 The P briefs and coordinates with the P and NCM as necessary 2 Direct the P to maintain assigned altitude heading and airspeed while maintaining orientation outside the cockpit 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 45 Chapter 4 3 Direct the NCM to assist with maintaining obstacle avoidance and advise the cockpit concerning other aircraft hazards in the area b Establish
13. CAUTION A static electricity discharge wand will be utilized IAW FM 4 20 197 CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with operational cargo hook s external sling load s completed DA Form 7382 Sling Load Inspection Record and training load s AW FM 4 20 197 Note A qualified sling load inspector before external sling load s operations will inspect all external sling load s Certification must be recorded on a DA Form 7382 and copies distributed IAW FM 4 20 197 STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Before hook up Verify DA Form 7382 is complete and on file and that the aircraft will remain within GWT and CG limitations Do not exceed prescribed airspeed restrictions if applicable for external sling load s b Hook up and HVR d 1 Ensure that the aircraft remains clear of the load s and obstacles 2 Perform a vertical descent ascent with the load s to a load s height of 10 feet 3 feet or appropriate for the conditions 3 Determine PWR sufficient to continue the maneuver Takeoff 1 Maintain aircraft in trim above 100 feet AGL 2 The P will reference the RAD ALT and back up the NCM calling the load s Approach and load s release 1 Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure the load s safely clears obstacles and terminates over the intended point of landing 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 77 Chapter 4 nN 2
14. CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the before hover check completed and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 2 3 4 Adjust the flight controls as required to perform a smooth controlled ascent to HVR Perform a smooth controlled descent with minimal drift at touchdown Maintain ground track 5 feet during HVR taxi Maintain a constant rate of turn not to exceed 90 degrees within 4 seconds DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will announce his or her intent to perform a specific hovering flight maneuver and will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to monitor altitude and avoid obstacles The P will ensure and announce that the aircraft is cleared prior to turning or repositioning the aircraft The P will announce when terminating the maneuver b The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles and unannounced drift or altitude changes The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when their attention is re established outside Procedures a TakeofftoaHVR 1 Position the cyclic as necessary not to exceed 2 inches aft while all four landing gear are on the ground and maintain heading with the pedals 2 Smoothly raise the thrust control and adjust the cyclic to ascend vertically to a 10 foot aft gear height unless mission requirements dictate a
15. DESCRIPTION 1 4 94 Crew actions a The P will remain focused inside the aircraft and will monitor radios and ATC information b The P will announce any deviation not directed by ATC or the P and will acknowledge all directives given by ATC or the P c The P will select and announce radio frequencies The P also will monitor radios and ATC information not monitored by the P d During VMC or simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles e The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside Procedures a Prior to flight when the use of the ADF is expected ensure that the ADF will receive on the desired band that the ADF bearing pointer is selected and points in the direction of the selected station and that FD Ij is providing the proper indications IAW the original equipment manufacturer OEM b Before flight when the use of the VOR ILS receiver is expected ensure that the VOR is operational and the NAVAID bearing pointer is selected and HSI CDI and FD F are providing the proper indications IAW the OEM c Before flight when the use of the tactical air navigation TACAN receiver is expected ensure that the TACAN is operational and the NAVAID bearing pointer is selected and HSI CDI and FD are providing the proper indications IAW the OEM d Before using a
16. TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 8 10 6 and TM 55 4240 284 12 amp P 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 165 Chapter 4 TASK 2064 Perform Paradrop Operations WARNING Ensure that any personnel in the cabin area not wearing a parachute are wearing a safety harness secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or are sitting in a seat with a seat belt fastened If parachutes use automatic ripcord releases ensure that the automatic release is disconnected before descent is initiated For an inflight emergency if altitude cannot be maintained notify the jumpmaster immediately so automatic ripcord releases can be disconnected Ensure that static lines remain secured to the anchor point until they are recovered or the aircraft has landed If recovery of static lines is impossible execute a roll on landing to avoid entangling deployment bags in the rotor system CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter rigged for paradrop operations and a jumpmaster onboard STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 2 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger safety briefing b Maintain airspeed of a minimum 80 KIAS KCAS and a MAX 110 KIAS KCAS with 90 KIAS KCAS being the optimum speed c Maintain appropriate ground track over the drop
17. and OVSPD checks The RCM will be at the flight controls during ENG start checks and may assist the MP with the OVSPD switch during the OVSPD check as directed or required by the MP The MP will ensure the RCM and NCM are fully briefed on their rolls during ENG starting and over speed checks b Ifthe MP elects to have the RCM assist in the OVSPD check the MP will have to man the thrust control while the RCM is operating the OVSPD switch The NCM will monitor the maintenance panel DECUs ECUs and ENGs as directed by the MP Procedures Perform IAW the applicable MTF manual and as follows a Abort start Prior to initiating ENG start a visual check for fuel leaks on both ENGs is recommended after the fuel boost pumps are turned ON and the XFEED crossfeed switch OPENED During ENG motoring starting it is not uncommon to experience a delay in or lack of ENG oil PRESS indications during the abort start procedure on a newly installed ENG or on an ENG that has not been operated for a prolonged period of time If no oil PRESS is indicated during the abort start procedure complete the abort start check and re check for oil PRESS indications during the primary start procedure b REV Start Indications of a hot start resulting from a rich hung start may be experienced during an ENG start in REV mode This is especially true if the ENG has been started and shutdown previously with residual PTIT indications The ENG may be motored IAW th
18. b Ensure that all landing gear is cleared onto or off the deck c Ensure that aircraft is chained or moored before exiting DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver The P will announce when he or she begins the approach and whether the approach will terminate to a HVR or to the surface The P also will announce the intended point of landing and any deviation to the approach to include go around The P will announce his or her intentions to takeoff b The P will call out crossing the wake and will complete the before landing check The P will ensure that the parking brakes are set The P or NCM will verbally relay the signalman s signals if the P loses visual contact with the LSE c The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles unannounced drift and changes in altitude The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside and will acknowledge all P directions The P NCM will assist the P in ensuring that the main wheels are within the landing deck circle before touchdown Procedures The deck landing area may have a perimeter safety net perimeter markings and red lights outlining the landing area Two white lineup lines form an X through the landing area These lines contain white lights which are only visible when the aircraft is aligned on the a
19. 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 98 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1174 Perform Holding Procedures CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under VMC IMC or simulated IMC with reference to instruments only and given holding instructions and appropriate DOD FLIP STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Tune and identify the appropriate NAVAIDs 2 Enter the holding pattern IAW FM 3 04 240 AIM and FAR Part 91 3 Time and track holding pattern legs AW FM 3 04 240 or host nation requirements 4 Send the appropriate report to ATC IAW DOD FLIPs DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Before arrival at the holding fix the P will analyze the holding instructions and brief the other crewmembers on the proposed entry outbound heading and inbound course Upon arrival at the holding fix the P will perform the correct entry into holding The P will select radio frequencies monitor radio s and announce ATC information not monitored by the P Also the P will compute outbound times if required and headings to adjust for winds and direct the P to adjust the pattern as necessary b The P will fly headings and altitudes and will adjust inbound and outbound times as directed by ATC or the P The P will announce deviations as well as ATC
20. 4 100 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 101 Chapter 4 TASK 1178 Perform Precision Approach CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under VMC IMC or simulated IMC with reference to instruments only and given approach information and appropriate DOD FLIP approach clearance and the before landing checks complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Execute the approach IAW AR 95 1 FM 3 04 240 AIM and the DOD FLIP 2 For an ILS approach maintain the LOC centerline 2 5 degrees two dot CDI deflection and the glide slope indicator within full scale deflection 3 Fora precision approach radar PAR approach make immediate heading and altitude changes issued by ATC and maintain heading 5 degrees for final approach maintain glide slope as directed by ATC 4 Comply with the decision altitude DA prescribed for the approach F If using FD select the correct sensor prior to coupling the system 6 Perform the correct MAP IAW DOD FLIP or ATC instruction upon reaching the DH if landing cannot be accomplished IAW AR 95 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Each RCM will review and confirm the specific approach to be flown before
21. Assist in traffic and obstacle avoidance b Cruise check s responsibilities c Emergency actions e Mission considerations e Emergency action with external sling load s e Actions performed by FE and CE d Perform other duties assigned by the PC e Hot closed circuit refueling 6 Tactical flight a Terrain flight duties b Landing area reconnaissance c Slope operations d External sling load s procedures 7 Shut down procedures 8 Post flight procedures 9 NCM questions comments and acknowledgment of NCM mission briefing TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 04 300 and DA Form 5484 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 9 Chapter 4 TASK 1001 Administer Flight Evaluation CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an evaluator SP IP IE ME SI FI and an evaluation scenario given by the evaluator STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Conduct an evaluation IAW chapter 3 2 Evaluate tasks to ATM standards 3 Conduct debrief and determine status of the aviator as required 4 Ensure appropriate entries are made on DA Form 7122 R Crew Member Training Record as required DESCRIPTION 1 The evaluator administering the evaluation will receive a scenario in which a flight evaluation
22. Item 12 CONT TQ AVAIL DUAL ENG The CONT TQ AVAIL is used to determine the MAX TQ output of both ENGs while still operating at the MAX normal operating range of the PTIT or the MAX CONT PTIT based on the forecasted conditions A value less than 100 percent TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks will indicate that a PTIT limit will be reached prior to exceeding the DUAL ENG TQ limit The ENGs may produce PWR in excess of the combining XMSN limits A value greater than 100cpercent will indicate that a PTIT limit should not be reached prior to reaching the MAX DUAL ENG TQ limit If the calculated value is greater than 100 percent TQ a value of 100 percent will be entered into the block IAW the DUAL ENG TQ limit stated in the appropriate operator s manual It is possible that with a calculated value of 100 percent the ENG could reach both limits PTIT and DUAL ENG TQ Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart record CONT TQ AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Item 13 CONT TQ AVAIL SE CONT TQ AVAIL is used to determine the MAX TQ output of both ENGs while still operating at the MAX normal operating range of the PTIT or the MAX CONT PTIT based on the forecasted conditions A value less than 123 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit will be reached prior to exceeding the SE TQ limit The ENG may produce PWR in excess of the ENG XMSN limits A value greater than 123 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit should not be reached prior to reaching the M
23. Note If the UTIL HYD PRESS caution light does not extinguish within 30 seconds after APU caution or advisory light comes ON place the APU switch to OFF Note If a HYD FLT control caution light does not go out in 30 seconds set the affected PTU system to the OFF position c Shutdown procedures 1 Before shutdown of the APU all electrical equipment that was switched ON should be turned OFF Note A shutdown will be initiated using the CDU power page regardless if equipment was turned on 2 Neutralize the flight controls then place PTU switches to the OFF position Set the APU GEN switch to the OFF position Set APU switch to the OFF position Place the BATT switch to the OFF position and disconnect the BATT and BATT charger cables d Emergency procedures 1 In the event of an APU fire the APU fuel manual shut off valve should be set to the OFF position APU switch to OFF BATT switch to the OFF position and the crew should make every effort to fight the fire 2 Ifthe APU should ever be shut down prematurely set APU switch to the OFF position and check electronic sequence unit for BIT equipment indications NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS During night operations ensure that adequate lighting anti collision position lights is on and the fire guard has a flashlight with un filtered lens This task is prohibited while wearing
24. The P will acknowledge the transfer of controls the unusual attitude and recover the aircraft as P F The P may elect to use the GO AROUND button on the thrust control and couple the system as required b During recovery the P will remain focused inside the aircraft c The P will assist in monitoring the aircraft instruments and call out attitude TQ and trim as necessary d During IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles The NCM will take a position on the P side of the aircraft Procedures a To recover from an unusual attitude correct the pitch and bank attitude trim the aircraft as required and adjust PWR to return to level flight and the appropriate altitude All components are changed simultaneously with little lead of one over the other b The displacement of controls used in recoveries may be greater than those for normal flight Care must be taken in making adjustments as straight and level flight is approached The instruments must be observed closely to avoid over controlling Note NCM tasks may include checking for fire preparing passengers for an EMERG landing and or executing any portion of an EP pertaining to the NCM NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS IMC is not a prerequisite for an unusual attitude Low level ambient light may induce visual illusions and spatial disorientation During NVG operations video noise may
25. 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card Jx 1012 Verity Aircraft Weight and Bance Jx Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks Perform Flight Mission Management ar eta ica x Ls xX Lt ad a Perform Hovering Flight EX X im fea x F fgPerform Digital Communication Procedures X F a a x X X X X X X 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach 1062 Perform Siope Operations CS Perform Radio Communication s Procedures 1014 1016 1022 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1032 1033 1034 1038 1039 1040 1042 1044 1046 1052 1058 1062 x tea Le fd x x mi X X HEA PERRERA E EEE E AAE 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 3 Chapter 2 2 4 Table 2 3 Rated crewmember base task list qualification refresher training Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight Tasks that must be performed during instrument flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight NVG Tasks that must be evaluated at night in the aircraft while the RCM is wearing the NVG Thesetasks apply to CH 47F only Task Task Title 1063 Perform External Sling Load s Operations x Perform Procedures for Two Way Radio Fate 2 Perform Flight with Advanced Flight Control System fj Digital x Advance Flight Control System Off nme X gt f P fi X Perform Instrument Maneuvers Oo
26. 4 The NCM will take a position on the P side of the aircraft for obstruction clearance and airspace surveillance The NCM will alert the crew immediately if VMC is encountered NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS The P should be in a position to assume control of the aircraft at any time when a landing environment can be determined visually aided unaided During night unaided flight consider using the searchlight to identify the landing area TRAINING CONSIDERATIONS This task will ONLY be performed under VMC in a training environment Note The IAF IF FAF MAP and MAHF must be programmed in the navigation system as an additional route for the mission Note It is not necessary to hold after a missed approach The PC may elect to return to the IAF at the MSA and attempt to complete the approach after coordinating with ATC or other aircraft using the approach procedure 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 103 Chapter 4 Note GPS IFR navigation must be certified by the FAA or host country regulations prior to GPS IFR use With an IFR certified GPS ensure the DAFIF data is current and loaded prior to IFR use If a certified GPS or current DAFIF data is not available then crews will not use the GPS for IFR navigation However they should consider and plan for its use as an EMERG backup system only Note Thoroughly brief inadvertent IMC multi aircraft operations in the mission brief As a minimum cover the following topics multi
27. 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 55 Chapter 4 2 Coordinate thrust control reduction with aft cyclic as necessary to maintain pitch attitude and to stop forward movement 3 Smoothly lower the thrust control to allow the forward gear to contact the ground Continue to lower the thrust control to ground detent neutralize the controls and apply brakes to stop forward movement 4 If sloping conditions are suspected or anticipated refer to Task 1062 Note The P and NCM should assist the P in maintaining the position of the aircraft over the pivot point Note When landing from a HVR to an unimproved area the crew must check for obstacles under the aircraft NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 Movement over areas of limited contrast such as tall grass water or desert tends to cause spatial disorientation Seek HVR areas that provide adequate contrast and use proper scanning techniques F Cross monitor horizontal situation display hover HSDH symbology If disorientation occurs apply sufficient PWR and execute an instrument takeoff ITO Task 1170 If a takeoff is not feasible try to maneuver the aircraft forward and down to the ground to limit the possibility of touchdown with sideward or rearward movement 2 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Use of the white light will impair night vision for several minutes Ther
28. All measurements are in hours c Documentation Upon completion of training an entry will be made in the remarks section of DA Form 7122 R of the NCM s IATF At the NCM s next closeout training will be documented on the crewmember s DA Form 759 Individual Flight and Flight Certificate Army part V remarks section A separate entry in the closeout is required for completion of aircraft qualification training 1 NVG qualification will be accomplished IAW paragraph 2 1b 2 Refresher training will be accomplished IAW paragraph 2 2 3 Mission training will be accomplished IAW paragraph 2 3 4 Continuation training will be accomplished IAW paragraph 2 4 5 CBRNE training will be accomplished IAW paragraph 2 7 A 2 STANDARDIZATION INSTRUCTOR FLIGHT ENGINEER INSTRUCTOR NONRATED CREWMEMBER UNIT TRAINER TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION a SIFI training qualification 1 Prerequisites for FI qualification 15U NCM in the rank of sergeant through staff sergeant SSG with a minimum of 1 year experience as a CH 47D F FE possess a current flight physical and on crewmember orders 2 Initial FI training This training is conducted at USAACE Fort Rucker AL An SP IP or SI will conduct initial validation of a crewmember s qualification following this course of instruction and in the aircraft at each new duty station Additional academic and flight hour requirements are at the discretion of the unit commander 3 SI quali
29. At the NCM s next closeout training will be documented on the crewmember s DA Form 759 Part V Remarks Section NON CREWMEMBER DOOR GUNNER TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION Non crewmember DG training and qualification will be IAW table 2 7 in this ATM and FM 3 04 140 appendix A TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Appendix B Heads Up Display Qualification B 1 GENERAL HUD qualification will be conducted IAW this ATM or applicable POI HUD qualified UTs IPs or SPs will conduct academic training and flight training A HUD qualified IP or SP will conduct the flight evaluations if an aviator is not previously HUD qualified qualification must be completed prior to progressing to NVGRL 1 B 2 QUALIFICATION TRAINING Qualification training will provide the aviators with the knowledge skills and techniques required to integrate HUD operations into flight Training in the aircraft will be with the aviator at a station with access to the flight controls wearing the HUD A HUD qualified IP SP or UT will be at the other station with access to the flight controls HUD qualification training may be conducted concurrently during NVG qualification refresher and mission training Note Academic training and training flights may be conducted by an UT designated by the commander to conduct HUD training When flight training is conducted by a UT the trainee must be designated at least NVG RL 2 or D N RL 2 for day HUD training A HUD qualified IP SP mu
30. Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear and High Yield Explosive Trainin isiscccececceccesescccessascecdedecucetcedusceseesadseccedectineenacuetdnsnseereasensziie 2 13 2 8 Night Unaided Training Requirments cccessseeeesesneeeeseereeenseeneeenees 2 14 Chapter 3 EVALUATIONS a a a e e a A eea aae aa EEEE aa ea AEri 3 1 3 1 Evaluation Principles ceccceeeeeeeeseeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseesseeeeeeeeeeneees 3 1 3 2 Grading Considerations cccseecccceseeceeeseeeseseeneeeeseeneeseseseeeseeesnenseeeesnanes 3 2 3 3 Crewmember Evaluation cccccccecseeseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeesnenseeeeeeeneees 3 2 3 4 Evaluation SCQuence cccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeseeeceeceeeseseesseaeeeseeeeneees 3 3 3 5 Additional Evaluations ccccceceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeseeeseseeeseaeeeeeeeeneees 3 8 Chapter 4 CREWMEMBER TASKS 000 cececeseeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeee ee seeeeeaneeeeeeeeeseseesseeeeeseeeeneees 4 1 4 A Task Contents r a r a a a Taa a aaa deine dite ees 4 1 a EPA E A G EIS E A cose neve eenvs ctacucer shes eeevesecueweete 4 6 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE TEST PILOT TASKS cceceseesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenees 5 1 5 1 Task Contents ccvci cedecdeeceteacsvcsatictineetesiseduausccecereainsnsstanceecuinaceesssecccecetieninsys 5 1 522 TASK Lit icccsceteete crecctseieeeects ctveuestenanectetestregssctecctetartes T 5 3 Chapter 6 CREW COORDINATION cii
31. Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references electronic manual EM 0250 TM 5 4220 202 14 TM 55 1680 317 23 amp P and TM 1 1680 377 13 amp P 4 34 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1016 Perform Internal Load Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter loaded with passengers cargo or academically STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Perform or ensure that a thorough passenger briefing has been conducted and that a passenger manifest is on file if applicable IAW AR 95 1 Conduct a passenger briefing Task 1002 IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL and the unit s SOP b F Accurately enter the cargo WT into CAAS c Verify that the aircraft will remain within GWT and CG limitations d Ensure that the passengers cargo is properly restrained e Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded f Ensure that cargo meets restraint criteria 2 NCM a Perform a thorough passenger briefing and ensure that a passenger manifest is on file if applicable b Conduct the briefing IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL and the unit SOP c Verify that the aircraft will remain within GWT and CG limitations d Load the aircraft IAW the load plan if applicable e Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded f Secure passengers cargo IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual g Ensure that cargo me
32. IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 and TM 1 1520 271 10 3 Ensures that the static line anchor cable does not sag more than 6 inches and will check the turnbuckle for safety 4 Pad and tape all clamps on the cable with cellulose wadding and masking tape 5 Rig the troop seats for the mission adjust the seat backs if required and ensure that airsick bags are available 6 Lower the ramp to a 3 degrees below level position before the crew begins the drop d The crew will conduct the paradrop IAW the procedures covered in the briefing and the references listed below e The PC will check that the jumpmaster or FE retrieves the static lines as soon as the last parachutist has cleared the aircraft Note If the jumpmaster cannot communicate directly with the P P the jumpmaster will communicate with the NCM via hand and arm signal IAW FM 21 60 The NCM will relay necessary information to the P P via the INTERCOMM system TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FAR Part 105 FM 3 21 220 and FM 3 05 211 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 167 Chapter 4 TASK 2066 Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations WARNING Failure to remove water and contaminants from the ERFS Il tank sump could result in contaminants being transferred to the helicopter fuel tank s or other aircraft or equipment during
33. IP ME SI or FI as appropriate b Note Trainers who are evaluating training NCMs must be at a station without access to the flight controls Aircraft qualification 1 RCM Initial qualification training in the CH 47D F will be conducted at USAACE Eastern Army Aviation Training Sites EAATS or at DA approved training sites IAW the new equipment training team flight training guide or with an USAACE approved program of instruction POI 2 NCM MOS qualification is conducted at DA approved training sites Aircraft qualification training for NCMs 15U CH 47 helicopter repairer is conducted at the unit IAW this ATM applicable regulations and the commander s ATP The NCMs must complete academic and flight training and pass the required written examinations within 90 consecutive days from the start of training Reserve Components year ARNG refer to appropriate regulations NVG Qualification Initial NVG qualification and aircraft NVD qualification will be IAW TC 3 04 11 the USAACE NVG training support package TSP and this ATM The NVG TSP may be obtained by writing to Commander USAACE ATTN Chief NVD Branch 110th Aviation Brigade Fort Rucker AL 36362 5000 or via e mail to usarmy rucker avncoe mbx ATZQ ATB NS mail mil The NVG TSP may be obtained through AKO from the NVD Branch Knowledge Center at https www us army mil suite page 504538 For all other concerns and support information visit the following website www
34. If RRPM N is increasing rapidly the maneuver may need to be terminated to prevent a rotor OVSPD If RRPM Ng readings are stable the maneuver may be continued by placing the thrust control below the ground detent and holding it to the floor while simultaneously placing the FADEC RPM switch to the 97 percent position This will place the aircraft in an autorotational decent Once the RRPM Nx has stabilized in the auto rotational glide note RRPM Nr and PA e After readings have been taken note the RRPM Na If it is above 100 percent direct the RCM to relax pressure on the thrust control and allow it to come up to the ground detent and then place the FADEC RPM switch back to the 100 percent position detent There is no need to wait for RRPM Nr to decrease prior to placing the FADEC RPM switch back to 100 percent position detent If TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks RRPM Ng is less than 100 percent place the FADEC RPM switch to 100 percent position detent then direct the RCM to relax pressure on the thrust control allowing it to come up to the ground detent With the thrust control at the ground detent and the FADEC RPM switch set to 100 percent perform a power recovery by directing the RCM to slowly increase thrust as required to arrest the rate of decent f After completion of the autorotation direct the RCM to climb to the PA where the RRPM Npr reading was taken and record the OAT
35. If possible select an area with good contrast and several reference points at the same or greater height as the SPIES HVR altitude Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation 4 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during nighttime overwater operations If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the PI may opt to approach the survivor s so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable HVR TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 161 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references and SPIES AWR 4 162 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 2059 Perform Rescue Hoist Winch Operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers in the cabin area are wearing a safety harness secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or static line anytime the upper cabin door and rescue hatch door are open The crewmember riding the hoist will be secured either to the aircraft or to the jungle penetrator Ensure that cable touches the ground or the water before ground personnel touch the cable Cable will be charged with in excess of 300 000 volts of static electricity CAUTION Care must be taken not to snag terrain features or foliage wit
36. NVG Tasks that must be evaluated at night in the aircraft while the NCM is wearing the NVG Task Task Title D N NVG 1000 1002 Conducta PessengerBiet T T 1012 Very Aircraft Weight and Baans x 0 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment x 1016 Perform internal Load Operations SSCS SP l 1019 Perform Preventive Maintenance Daly Checks NCM Ony x 1022 PerformPrefightinspection SC XP 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter mes Checks i026 1027 Perform Power Assurance Check fx l 1028 PerformHoverPower Check SSS XP 1032 Perform Radio Communications Procedures x 1034 Perform GroundTai OOOO M 1038 1040 1042 Perform Cruise Check Prosedures x T 1056 1062 Perform Slope Operations Mx OX 1063 Perform External Sing Load s Operations x x 1064 1070 Respond to Emergencies xl x 1188 Operate Aircraft Survvabity Equipment x 1190 Perforndentify Hand and Arm Signals x 1194 Perform Refueling Operations x T 1200 Perform Nonrated Crewmember Duties During Maintenance Test eat ky Flight 1202 Perform Auxiiary Power Unit Operations NOM Ony x I 1406 Perform Terrain Fight Navigation x x 1408 Perton Teran Eio SSS PX 1411 Perform Terrain Fight Deceleraion x x 1419 Perform Actions on Coma fx x 2081 Operate Night Vision Goggs x 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 5 Chapter 2 2 3 MISSION TRAINING Crewmembers are designated RL 2
37. ORs aircraft maintenance personnel technical OR gunner or other personnel performing duties requiring flight as appropriate be able to develop and implement an individual training plan and have a thorough understanding of the requirements and administration of the ATP 10 SI The SI must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 10 In addition the SI must be able to train and evaluate SIs FIs UTs FEs CEs and ORs as appropriate be able to develop and implement a unit training plan and administer the commander s ATP for NCMs Note Evaluators trainers will be evaluated on their ability to apply the fundamentals of instruction as outlined in paragraph 3 4b 12 Note During academic evaluations evaluators should ask questions that address specific topics in each area and avoid those requiring laundry list type answers Questions should be developed as described in the IP handbook Note In order for a SI to evaluate an FE the SI must be a current and qualified FE Academic evaluation criteria 1 PFE The SP IP SI FI will evaluate appropriate subject areas in paragraph 3 4b 2 APART standardization annual NVG evaluations The SP IP SI FI will evaluate a minimum of two topics from each applicable subject area in paragraph 3 4b 3 APART instrument evaluation The IE will evaluate a minimum of two topics from the subject areas in paragraphs 3 4b 1 through 3 4b 5 relative to IFR and flight planning If the evaluated crewme
38. Perform Instrument Maneuvers using Standby Flight Display X x lt ETL eee TT Perform Instrument Takeoff Perform Holding Procedures Perform Non Precision Approach ma 1180 Perform an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure Perform Precision Approach ma Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery Respond to Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological Conditions Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment Perform Identify Hand and Arm Signals Ea ea zai X fal z teal ei x iz Perform Refueling Operations TX ial ad 260 1 1 X Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review Lx x x X Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning x operate Common Avionics Architecture System Control Display Unit Multi Function Display Perform Electronic Countermeasures Electronic Counter Countermeasures Procedures X X X X operate Digtar Map SSS i X ra E d Perform TenainFight SSS a Perform Evasive Maneuves TTT x Ly Perform Actions on Contact X Operate Night Vision Goggles X 1064 1068 1070 1077 1094 1166 1167 1170 1174 1176 1178 118 118 88 90 1194 253 260 1262 1402 1404 1406 1408 1411 1412 1413 2081 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Training Table 2 4 Nonrated crewmember 15U base task list qualification refresher training Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight
39. Perform a vertical descent from 10 feet with the load s to the desired touchdown point feet 3 The P will reference the RAD ALT and back up the NCM calling the load s 2 NCM a The NCM will ensure that the aircraft is prepared for external sling load s operations b The NCM will also ensure that all sling s equipment is inspected IAW FM 4 20 197 and all sling s equipment is secured in the aircraft before takeoff 1 Provide aircraft guidance for hook up and release using no more than two directions at a time 2 Clear the aircraft and external sling load s during the operation 3 Confirm load s is hooked and secured 4 Ensure that load s and sling s are free of entanglements 5 Continue to monitor load s for oscillation The NCM will call the load s height from ground to 10 feet in 1 foot increments and from 10 feet the ground also in 1 foot increments The NCM will call the load s height AHO on takeoff approach at 100 feet 75 feet 50 feet 25 feet 20 feet 15 feet and 10 feet d Monitor and call the load s height during terrain flight at altitudes of 200 feet AHO and below DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with external sling load s operations EMERG and communication procedures The PC will ensure that DD Form 7382 has been completed The PC will determine the direction of takeoff by analyzing the tactical situat
40. The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with SPIES operations EMERG and communication procedures The PC will ensure that the aircraft is rigged b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to ensure aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over the target incorporating corrections from the SPIES master as required c The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles The P and NCM will assist the P during the pickup phase of the operation The NCM will advise the P when the slack is out of the ropes and when the SPIES members are off the ground and AHO During forward flight the NCM must constantly monitor the SPIES members and keep the P informed of their stability and clearance Procedures a Establish communications with personnel at extraction site The approach should be terminated into the wind at a 90 foot HVR Normal length of SPIES ropes is 120 feet Once stabilized over the extraction site the NCM when authorized by the PC will throw out the deployment bags The NCM will inform the P when all ropers are ready and hook up is complete The NCM verifies that extraction harnesses are secure and safe as the ropers are lifted off the ground TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks b Ascend at a rate that will ensure
41. This will include scan sectors 2 Announce any unplanned drift or altitude changes clear the aircraft and immediately inform other crewmembers of all air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft 3 Announce when attention will be focused inside the aircraft using a time limit that is appropriate for the conditions and announce when attention is focused outside 4 5 Maintain airspace surveillance in assigned scan sectors When landing the crew will confirm the suitability of the area and that the aircraft is clear of obstacles DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to the flight The briefing will include areas of responsibility and scan sectors b The P will announce his or her intention to perform a specific maneuver and will remain focused outside the aircraft The P is responsible for clearing the aircraft and avoiding obstacles c The P and NCM as duties permit will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles unusual drift or altitude changes The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside d When landing the crew will confirm the suitability of the area and that the aircraft is clear of barriers obstacles The NCMs will move about the aircraft as necessary to ensure total coverage Procedures a Maintain close surveillance of th
42. c May or can is used to indicate an acceptable method of accomplishment c Night vision devices NVDs 1 Night vision system NVS refers to components that are attached to the aircraft and are an integral 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 1 1 Chapter 1 component of the aircraft 2 Night vision goggles NVG refers to any image intensifier system for example the AN AVS 6 3 NVD refers to NVS and or NVG d Personnel terminology descriptions and responsibilities 1 The RCM is an aviator DAC therefore the terms rated crewmember aviator and pilot are used synonymously 2 Pilot in command PC The PC has overall responsibility for the operation of the aircraft from pre mission planning to mission completion and assigns duties to the crew as necessary Additionally the PC is the primary trainer of pilots in the development of experience and judgment 3 PI The PI will complete all tasks assigned by the PC 4 UT The UT is a specialized trainer RCM or NCM appointed by the commander to assist with unit training The UT trains RL 2 and RL 1 crewmembers in mission additional tasks in accordance with IAW this ATM and unit METL To be qualified as an UT the crewmember must demonstrate a higher level of knowledge proficiency and the ability to train other crewmembers IAW this ATM and the IP handbook 5 IP The IP trains and evaluates RCM and NCM as appointed by the commander to assist with unit trainin
43. page 4 142 a The initial approach segment begins at the IAF and ends at the IF b Determine the IAF Up to three IAFs are allowed The minimum distance is 3 NM from the IF and the MAX distance is 10 NM The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either side 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 141 Chapter 4 Initial Approach Fix IAF Initial Approach Segment NOTE IAF will not exceed 90 from final approach course 45 is recommended Determine highest obstacle from 1 nm before IAF to the IF A Figure 4 6 Initial approach segment 7 Determine the MSA for the landing area figure 4 7 Use the off route obstruction clearance altitude CONUS or the off route terrain clearance altitude outside the continental U S elevation from the en route low altitude ELA chart for the area of operations if available a Select the highest altitude within 30 NM of the MAP 1 Ifan ELA is not available the minimum sector altitude will be determined by adding 1 000 feet to the MAX elevation figures MEF 2 When a MEF is not available apply the 1 000 feet rule to the highest elevation within 30 NM of the MAP b Minimum sector altitudes can be established with sectors not less than 90 degrees and with sector obstacle clearance having a 4 NM overlap Use the figure below for determining MSA MSA calculation Solution A Rounded up nearest 100 feet B 1 000 C MSA U Highest obstacle within 30 NM centered on the MAP Figure 4 7 MS
44. record CONT TQ AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Refer to item 12 Item 89 CONT TQ AVAIL SE Refer to item 13 for definition Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast conditions at time of arrival record CONT TQ AVAIL for SE operation Refer to item 13 4 28 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Note The procedure for calculating items 90 thru 105 apply to both NO LOAD and WITH LOAD Item 90 91 MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN IGE OGE DUAL ENG Refer to item 14 and 15 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 14 and 15 Item 92 93 MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN OGE DUAL ENG Refer to item 16 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR OGE Refer to item 16 Item 94 95 MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE SE Refer to item 18 and 19 for definition Using the HVR chart contingency SE TQ AVAIL obtained in item 86 and the forecast arrival conditions record the MAX allowable GWT to HVR for SE operation at the desired wheel height IGE OGE Refer to item 18 and 19 Note When calculating a MAX GWT to HVR IGE or OGE SE item 94 and 96 that requires using the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT DUAL ENG scale double the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT and subtract this value from the TQ required prior to entering the bottom left portion of the HVR chart Item 96 97 MAX GWT
45. statute mile Special Operations Command signal operating instructions standing operating procedure standardization instructor pilot staff sergeant tactical air navigation tactical operations The Army Maintenance Management System Aviation true airspeed training circular time distance heading turbine engine analysis check terminal instrument procedures transportable flight proficiency simulator technical manual time of flight torque TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Glossary TRADOC TRC TSP TTP U S USAR USAACE USASOC USSOCOM UT VFR VGI VHF VMC VNE VOR VSI WEZ 5 April 2013 Training and Doctrine Command translational rate command training support package tactics techniques and procedures United States United States Army United States Army Aviation Center of Excellence United States Army Special Operations Command United States Special Operations Command unit trainer visual flight rules vertical gyro indicator very high frequency visual meteorological conditions velocity not to exceed very high frequency omni directional range vertical speed indicator weapon engagement zone TC 3 04 34 Glossary 7 This page intentionally left blank References These publications are sources for additional information on the topics in this TC Most JPs are found at http Awww dtic mil doctrine doctrine htm Most Army publications are found online at http www apd army mil SOURCES U
46. the P will avoid unnecessary nose low attitudes and over controlling to reduce load s oscillation 5 The NCM will announce the load s condition such as load s clear of all barriers load s is stable and so forth When aircraft load s height above 100 feet AGL or when clear of obstacles the P will increase airspeed slowly to determine the flight characteristics of the load s Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent load s oscillation 6 After passing through 200 foot AHO load s height and best SE airspeed the cargo hook master switch may be placed in the OFF position The crew will verbally acknowledge placement of the cargo hook master switch to OFF Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL Note Ensure that the cargo switch is in the ARM position when operating at altitudes below 200 feet AHO best SE airspeed Note If a load s oscillation develops the primary method for arresting the oscillation is to decrease airspeed Additional measures may include shallow turns or banks small climbs or descents or a combination of any or all methods c Enroute 1 During cruise flight the P will place the cargo hook master switch in the OFF position as directed in paragraph 2b 6 and announce that the cargo hook master switch is OFF The NCM will verbally confirm the cargo hook master switch is
47. with a LOAD Using the applicable cruise chart calculate the TQ required to maintain the cruise airspeed listed in item 63 Then add the additional TQ required to cruise based on drag as calculated in item 48 If the selected cruise airspeed requires the aircraft to be flown in a time limited ENG operation a lower cruise airspeed must be selected in item 54 and the drag and cruise TQ recalculated Item 68 CRUISE TQ SE no LOAD Using the applicable cruise chart record the TQ required to attain the SE cruise airspeed listed in item 64 If the chart does not show SE TQ double the TQ value shown for DUAL ENGs If the SE TQ value exceeds the Chapter 5 limitation enter UA Item 69 CRUISE TQ SE with a LOAD Using the applicable cruise chart record the TQ required to attain the SE cruise airspeed listed in item 65 If the chart does not show SE TQ double the TQ value shown for DUAL ENGs If the SE TQ value exceeds the chapter 5 limitation in the appropriate operator s manual enter UA Note For items 67 and 69 adjust the cruise TQ to compensate for drag caused by changes in the external configuration Refer to item 48 for drag factor Item 70 CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENG no LOAD Using the appropriate cruise chart and the TQ value listed in item 66 record the predicted fuel flow Item 71 CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENG with a LOAD Using the appropriate cruise chart and the TQ value listed in item 67 record the predicted fuel flow Item
48. 04 34 5 April 2013 References DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms DA Form 2408 12 Army Aviator s Flight Record DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Status Information Record DA Form 2408 13 1 Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record DA Form 4186 Medical Recommendation for Flying Duty DA Form 5701 47 R CH 47 Performance Planning Card DA Form 5484 Mission Schedule Brief DA Form 7120 R Commander s Task List DA Form 7120 1 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements DA Form 7120 2 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Continuation Sheet DA Form 7120 3 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Remarks and Certification DA Form 7122 R Crew Member Training Record DA Form 7382 Sling Load Inspection Record DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE FORMS PUBLICATIONS DD Form 365 4 Weight and Balance Clearance Form F Transport Tactical DLAM 8210 1 Contractor s Flight and Ground Operations 30 April 2008 OTHER The following publication can be obtained by contacting Aviation Facilities Team Lead Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division Code 4 8 2 5 Highway 547 Lakehurst NJ 08733 5052 or at the following website https airworthiness navair navy mil NGR AR 95 210 Army National Guard General Provisions and Regulations for Aviation Training 1 July 1991 Requests for contractor flight releases airworthiness releases or interim co
49. 157 Perform special patrol infiltration exfiltration operations cceeeees 4 160 Perform rescue hoist winch operations cecceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 4 163 Perform paradrop Operations cecccceccececeeeeeeecneeceeeeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeeseeeesaees 4 166 Perform extended range fuel system procedures ceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneees 4 168 Perform shipboard operations 2 ccccccceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseesencaeaeeeeeeeseeeenaees 4 170 Perform forward arming and refueling point operations cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 173 Perform caving ladder Operations ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeseeaaees 4 176 Perform helocast soft duck operations 0 cccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeteeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeees 4 178 Perform amphibious operations ccccceeeeeeseceeceeeeeeeeseseenaeeeeeeeeeseesnaees 4 181 Operate Night Vision GOgQleS ccccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 184 Operate heads up display SyStem ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesecsneaeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 185 Operate armament subsystem 0 000 cece centre ceenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 4 186 Perform pinnacle ridgeline Operations ececeesecceceeeeeeeeeeneecaeeeeeeeseeeenaees 4 188 Perform combat maneuvering flight 0 eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaees 4 190 Perform prior to maintenance test flight CNECKS 0
50. 3 04 34 A 1 Appendix A Table A 1 Training and qualification subjects Academic subjects Aeromedical factors Department of the Army regulations and publications Aviation life support equipment Passenger briefings Unit standing operating procedures and local regulations Aircrew training program introduction Hand and arm signals Aircrew training manual introduction Logbook and forms Inflight duties Crew mission briefing Confined area and slope operations Engine start through before takeoff checks Aircraft refueling procedures External sling load s operations Internal load s operations Crew coordination training qualification Armament system operations Environmental operations Aircraft survivability equipment Night mission operations and deployment Operating limits and restrictions Emergency procedures Flight training subjects Operating limitations and restrictions Preflight PMD procedures Internal external sling load s operations Inflight duties Start and run up procedures Radio communication procedures Health indicator test check procedures Before takeoff checks Power assurance test check procedures Refueling procedures Confine area and slope operations Aircraft survivability equipment Clearing aircraft during flight Environmental operations Required examinations Flight
51. 4 2 a The final approach segment begins at the FAF and ends at the MAP b Determine the MAP normally associated with the landing area or threshold c Determine the FAF The minimum distance is 3 NM from the MAP The MAX length is 10 NM The optimum length is 5 NM The width is 2 4 NM 1 2 NM on either side of centerline Minimum Descent Altitude MDA Final Approach Segment B Add 250 ft FAF 3 nm past FAF A Highest obstacle within this area Determine highest obstacle from 3 nm before FAF to 3 nm past MAP A Figure 4 2 Final approach segment 3 Determine the MAHF figure 4 3 a Determine the MAHF for the landing area b The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 7 5 NM from the MAP The optimum distance is 5 NM The holding pattern leg will not exceed 3 NM The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either side MAHF altitude calculation Solution A Rounded up nearest 100 feet B 1 000 C MAHF Altitude U Highest obstacle within 10 NM centered on the MAHF Figure 4 3 MAHF altitude calculation formula 4 Missed approach segment figure 4 4 page 4 141 a The missed approach segment will start at the MAP and ends at a holding point designated by a MAHF b Optimum routing is straight ahead within 15 degrees of the final approach course to a direct entry A turning missed approach may be designated if needed for an operational advantage but is not discussed in this task due
52. 7 and 8 TM 1 1520 271 10 chapters 4 5 6 7 and 8 IETM EM 0199 TM 1 1560 312 10 and TM 55 1560 307 13 amp P Topics in this subject area are Wind limitations Rotor limitations Power limitations Engine limitations Aircraft system limitations Airspeed limitations Temperature limitations Loading limitations Weapon system limitations Maneuvering limits Flight envelope limitations such as extended range fuel system ERFS cargo rescue hoist winch and external sling internal load s operations Weather requirements Environmental limitations restrictions 4 Aircraft EP and malfunction analysis TM 1 1520 271 10 chapter 9 and TM 1 1520 240 10 Topics in this subject area are 3 4 Emergency terms and their definitions TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Evaluations Engine malfunctions Fires Hydraulic system malfunctions Landing and ditching procedures Mission equipment malfunctions Rotor transmission and drive train system malfunctions Emergency exits and equipment Chip detectors DET Fuel system malfunctions Electrical system malfunctions Flight control malfunctions AFCS DAFCS malfunctions 5 Aeromedical factors AR 40 8 field manual FM 3 04 301 and FM 3 04 203 Topics in this subject area are Flight restrictions due to exogenous factors Stress and fatigue Spatial disorientation Altitude psychology Hypoxia Middle ear discomfort Principles and problems
53. April 2013 Crewmember Tasks e The crewmember in the cabin area will lower the ladder when directed to by the PC The crewmember will advise when the ladder has been deployed and that it is in the water or on the ground f The ladder must touch the water or the ground before any personnel in the water or on the ground touch it to avoid electrical static discharge shock g Due to lack of visual references it will be difficult to detect drift over the water Crewmembers must assist the P with maintaining a constant position over the personnel on the ground or in the water h Personnel to be extracted will grasp the ladder after it has entered the water or touched the ground and comes within reach Personnel will then climb the ladder into the aircraft i Crewmembers will assist with entry in the aircraft as much as possible j In the event personnel are injured and cannot climb into the aircraft they will attach themselves to the ladder with a snap link attached to the front of the survival vest These personnel will be flown to the nearest landing area lowered to the ground and then moved into the aircraft NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS For night operations attach one chemlight to the bottom of the ladder This will help the crewmembers to identify when the ladder enters the water Attach one more chemlight about 10 feet up from the bottom of the ladder so the person can still see the ladder when the bottom is in th
54. CL The P will request appropriate EMERG assistance c The NCM will prepare the passengers for an EMERG landing ensuring passengers seatbelts are fastened and cargo is secured 1 During the descent the NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft 2 After landing the NCM will assist in evacuating the passengers to the designated assembly area If normal exits cannot be used the NCM will use the nearest EMERG exit to expedite the evacuation 3 After accounting for all crewmembers and passengers the NCM will assist the other crewmembers in any follow on action fire fighting first aid EMERG signaling or survival equipment Procedures Analyze the EMERG situation for example aircraft response and caution advisory light indications as required Determine the malfunction and select the appropriate EMERG procedures AW 4 88 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL Perform the EMERG procedure IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL Note Only qualified and current IPs SPs may simulate EPs when at one set of flight controls Paragraph 4 1c 2 h lists the EPs that are prohibited from practice in the aircraft Appendix D contains information on executing EPs a The following EPs must be conducted during this training in the aircraft while occupying a station with access to the flight controls b The following EPs can be performed concurrently SE failure at altitud
55. CONSIDERATIONS 1 If sufficient illumination exists to view obstacles accomplish the takeoff in the same way as a VMC takeoff during the day Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles 2 If sufficient illumination does not exist perform an altitude over airspeed takeoff by applying takeoff PWR first followed by a slow acceleration to ensure obstacle clearance The P may perform the takeoff from a HVR or from the ground a Maintain the takeoff PWR setting until reaching climb airspeed Adjust PWR as required to establish the desired R C and cyclic to maintain the desired airspeed The P should alternate attention between cross check instruments while assisting in obstacle avoidance The P and NCM should maintain orientation outside the aircraft and concentrate on obstacle avoidance The P should make all internal checks b Maintain desired ground track Reduced visual references during the takeoff and throughout the ascent at night may make it difficult to maintain the desired ground track Knowledge of the surface wind direction and velocity will assist in maintaining the desired ground track c Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation d When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Use of the white light may impair night vision for several MINs Therefore exercise added caution if res
56. Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D or in the FS 2 CH 47D Verbally describe the indications 3 FS Initiate at IOS of the FS or verbally describe the indications J ENG 1 or ENG 2 XMSN warning 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47F or in the TFPS 2 CH 47F Verbally describe the indications 3 TFPS Initiate at IOS of the TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN debris screen latches 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN OIL PRESS caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN OIL PRESS and XSMN AUX OIL PRESS caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN AUX OIL caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN CHIP DET caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Ver
57. EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft only REFERENCES Appropriate common references and TM 11 5855 263 10 4 184 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 2086 Operate Heads Up Display System CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with a functioning HUD system STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the following additions modifications 1 Describe and demonstrate correct terminology and usage of the ANVIS HUD IAW the appropriate operator s manual 2 Program the ANVIS HUD as desired for mission requirements DESCRIPTION Perform operational procedures for the ANVIS HUD These include assembly preparation for use operating procedures and equipment shutdown Note The HUD display is considered supplemental equipment Therefore one RCM may fly with the HUD and the other without TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and TM 11 5855 300 10 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 185 Chapter 4 TASK 2112 Operate Armament Subsystem Note This task only applies to NCMs WARNING This task may only be performed by personnel qualified to operate the weapon system IAW FM 3 04 140 and is not to be used a method of qualification Observe all safety precautions for uploading
58. Electromagnetic environmental effects 2 Na Common training evaluation conditions are a When a UT SP IE IP or ME is required for the training of the task that individual will be at one set of flight controls during training References to IP in the task conditions include SP References to FI in the task conditions include SI Evaluators trainers who are evaluating training NCMs must be at a station without access to the flight controls except when evaluating crew coordination or conducting a local orientation flight 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 1 Chapter 4 4 2 b The following tasks require an SP IE or IP for training evaluation in the aircraft with access to the flight controls If the IE is not also an IP or SP the IE may only perform the ENG failure EP and Task 1182 and must be trained and evaluated by an SP or IP on those tasks e Task 1070 Respond to Emergencies e Task 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery c Unless otherwise specified in the conditions all inflight training evaluations will be conducted under VMC IMC denotes flight solely by reference to flight instruments Wearing a vision limiting device will be utilized when RCMs are logging hood time on DA Form 2408 12 d Unless specified in the task considerations a task may be performed in any mode of flight without modifying the standards or descriptions When personal equipment NVG CBRNE MOPP 4 HUD and so forth or mission equipment water bu
59. F Place the fire DET test switch to TEST in the CH 47D press the LAMP TEST switch in the CH 47F or verbally announce a fire If external load s operations are being performed the cargo hook master switch shall be OFF 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications ENG compartment fuselage or electrical fire 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Initiated on the ground with the ECLs in the GROUND position and the required ENG cool down are met or before engine starting Place the fire DET test switch to TEST in the CH 47D press the LAMP TEST switch in the CH 47F or verbally announce a fire Do not allow the RCM to place the APU or BATT switch OFF as you will be unable to monitor PTIT s motor ENGs or communicate with the FE 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications Electrical fire inflight 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally state a fire 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications Smoke and fume elimination 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F During day VMC flight only 3 FS TFPS State the presence of smoke and fumes in the cockpit AUX fuel pump s failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or
60. FARE operations If water and contaminants are not removed a loss of ENG power may result CAUTION Failure to close the Unisex valves at the ERFS II tank s end of the single point pressure refueling hose assembly could allow suctioning of fuel from the helicopter main fuel tanks during FARE operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with ERFS installed or academically STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Ensure ERFS data is entered and recognized in the CAAS b Balance manage fuel tank levels if appropriate to maintain aircraft within CG limits c Operate the auxiliary fuel management panel IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL d Recognize and respond to ERFS malfunctions e Perform or describe appropriate EPs IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL 2 NCM a Configure aircraft IAW TM 1 1560 312 10 b Complete all before flight inflight and preflight duties IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and TM 1 1560 312 10 c Perform all fuel servicing IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1560 312 10 FM 3 04 111 and FM 10 67 1 d Recognize and alert P to ERFS malfunctions e After ERFS operation remove and store ERFS IAW TM 55 1560 307 13 amp P or TM 1 1560 312 10 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough mission briefing and ensure that all personnel are familiar with normal and EPs b The PC will ensure
61. FPN loaded STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications IOn O D Se Load applicable mission data if available Load FPN manually or data loader unit DLU Confirm aircraft WT is entered accurately into the CAAS Confirm elevations as required Confirm accurate coordinates Confirm inertial navigation unit values as required Update navigation systems as required Accurately determine fuel and PWR requirements by systematically updating the FD Provide timely accurate FD cues for the P 10 Configure MFDs sensors mission aids to maximize terrain threat avoidance DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will ensure all data is correctly entered into the FD The PC will direct the use of sensors to maximize terrain threat avoidance b The PC when performing P duties will direct the PI to perform crew station mission manager functions as required c The P is considered the mission manager The P will perform navigation system updates as required utilizing any available sensor d The P will update the FD as required to reflect accurate fuel PWR timing data e The P will make all data entries for FPN adjustment FD cues transponder and radio and navigational aids NAVAIDs frequency changes Procedures a Navigation and radio frequency information may be entered into the FD manually or through data transfer b The crew verifies accurate information by double che
62. GPS INU inertial navigation unit EGI 1 and EGI 2 failure d Standards The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or standard of performance to which the task must be accomplished The terms without error properly and correctly apply to all standards The standards are based on ideal conditions Many standards are common to several tasks Individual trainer instructor or evaluator pilot techniques are not standards and are not used Unless otherwise specified in the individual task the following common standards apply Alternate or additional standards will be listed in individual tasks Standards unique to the training environment for conditions are established in the training considerations section of each task FY For the purposes of this publication flight controls neutralize remains the same as a CH 47D with the exception of cyclic position is 1 2 inches aft of zero on the stick position indicator and the use of AFCS and DAFCS are synonymous 1 All tasks a Do not exceed aircraft limitations b Perform crew coordination actions IAW chapter 6 c Apply the appropriate night and environmental task considerations when performing the task under those conditions Takeoff a Take off from unimproved surfaces the NCM will call the aircraft altitude from the ground to 10 feet in 1 foot increments 2 Na b Takeoff from unimproved surfaces the P will call the aircraft altitude above hi
63. PWR AVAIL line on the cruise charts Item 56 MAX GWT for CONT PWR CRUISE no LOAD The MAX GWT for your CONT PWR will give you information on the MAX WT you can carry or the MAX airspeed you can fly based on your CONT PWR AVAIL at cruise Using the applicable cruise chart for the highest cruise altitude and associated TEMP for the planned route of flight determine which mission option to use Note Higher GWT If the mission requires the highest GWT select the highest GWT at or left of the Vye line and left of the CONT PWR line Note the airspeed for this GWT and annotate this speed in item 62 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 25 Chapter 4 Note Higher airspeed If the mission requires a higher airspeed and a lower GWT is acceptable move vertically on the CONT PWR line to the desired cruise AIRSPEED and move laterally to intersect a GWT that is at or left of the Vye line Item 57 MAX GWT for CONT PWR CRUISE with a LOAD Refer to item 56 for definition Using the applicable cruise chart for the highest cruise altitude and associated TEMP for the planned route of flight determine which mission option to use Subtract drag factor from CONT TQ line for external sling load s Refer to item 54 Item 58 MAX R C and END AIRSPEED DUAL ENG no LOAD The MAX R C and END airspeed computes at what airspeed the aircraft can achieve the highest R C or the most time out of the usable fuel load aloft time This airspeed also represents the bes
64. They will assist the P during the pickup phase of the operation and will advise when the ladder is on the ground or in the water If forward flight is required the NCM must constantly monitor the survivor s and keep the P informed of their stability Procedures Ladder operations is a method used by search and rescue aircraft to retrieve downed crewmembers from the water when no watercraft are in the area or time constraints will not allow the aircrew to wait for such craft to arrive for the rescue operations Additionally ladder operations may be used for infiltration exfiltration of personnel in confined areas such as a dense jungle environment 4 176 a The PC will ensure that the ladder is inspected serviceable and secured to the aircraft cabin floor b The NCM will remove the ramp extensions and ensure that the ramp and cabin floors are clean The NCM will inspect and secure a serviceable ladder to the aircraft cabin floor Chemlights will be attached to the bottom of the ladder and 10 feet from the bottom Proper flotation will be attached to the ladder as necessary c The PC will inform the NCM when to deploy the ladder and establish what MAX RAD ALT reading may be achieved with the ladder safely on the ground or in the water d Once personnel in the water or on the ground are located plan the approach into the wind as much as possible The approach should terminate to a HVR approximately 20 feet above the personnel TC 3 04 34 5
65. altitudes may not allow sufficient recovery time Airspeed kinetic energy may not be available to trade for lift and must be evaluated prior to and during the maneuver This is aggravated as helicopter GWT and density altitude increase Do not allow high sink rates to develop as recovery altitude may not be sufficient This is aggravated as helicopter GWT and density altitude increase 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 191 Chapter 4 c Dive dive recovery This maneuver is used at altitudes above terrain flight to rapidly mask from a threat by placing the aircraft in a dive This maneuver can be employed when necessary to break contact with enemy fire while maintaining intervisibility for suppressive fire 1 To dive the aircraft as a result of potential enemy contact apply forward cyclic to obtain the desired dive angle Adjust the thrust to facilitate the rapid descent and maintain the aircraft in trim above 40 KIAS KCAS 2 Recover at an altitude that will allow sufficient time to arrest the sink rate after thrust and cyclic control has been applied to recover from the dive The sink rate may be exacerbated by high GWT 3 Ifthe aircraft may have been observed by enemy threat it may be necessary to turn to an oblique angle of approximately 30 degrees to 45 degrees to evade while minimizing the profile of the aircraft and orienting crew served weapons for suppressive fire Note Initiate the maneuver for training at no greater than 8
66. ammunition IAW TM 9 1095 206 12 amp P To prevent accidental firing do not retract bolt and allow it to go forward if belted ammunition is in feed tray or a live round is in chamber Move cocking handling forward by hand WARNING Ensure that the M24 cabin window left side and M24 right door pintles are installed in the correct location Ensure that each unique elevation stop cam follower is installed on the correct pintle Failure to do so can result in firing the M240H weapon into the structure of the helicopter CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the armament subsystem installed with a qualified crewmember STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Install and preflight the armament subsystem IAW the aircraft and subsystem operator s manual and the weapon TM Load and safe the weapon Acquire and identify target Estimate range to target Engage targets IAW weapon control measures mission briefing and ROE Apply appropriate firing techniques Suppress neutralize or destroy as applicable oN DAR YWHN Describe or perform EPs for misfire hang fire cook off runaway gun ruptured cartridge and double feeding 9 Clear and safe the weapon 10 Enter appropriate information if required on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions 4 186 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks a The NCM will coordinate with
67. and brief any additional ground support personnel before installing and loading the weapon system Perform installation and preflight inspection of the weapons system b The NCM will brief all necessary personnel on EPs The NCM will direct assistance from any additional ground support personnel to aid with installing and loading the weapon The NCM will ensure that the proper amount of ammunition is loaded onboard the aircraft AW the mission briefing Procedures a Brief additional ground support personnel as necessary b Perform installation and preflight inspection of the weapon ensuring that the gun is safetied to the pintle Ensure that the ejector control bag and ammunition can are installed c During loading of ammunition observe all safety precautions while loading After loading the ammunition ensure that the safety button is in S position safe d To initiate the firing sequence push the safety button to the F position fire press the trigger fully and hold Low cycle rate of fire of the machinegun allows single round firing or short bursts The trigger must be completely released for each shot e Conduct weapons engagement IAW the mission briefing ROE and crew briefing After acquiring and identifying the target estimate range and ensure that the target is within the weapons field of range and the kill zone is within the weapons effective range f Use correct firing techniques and ballistic corrections to
68. avoid detection when possible 3 In daylight avoid flying over areas of high contrast such as bodies of water or open fields if possible Note If fighters are observed circling rapidly climbing or turning towards the aircraft the crew should consider a fighter attack imminent 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 131 Chapter 4 g 4 Ifhostile fighter activity is observed a Take defensive passive protection measures for example verify IFF is operational b Take offensive active protective measures if fighters are identified as enemy refer to classified special instructions c Refer to classified Army aviation TTP for further crew procedures 5 Air to ground gun rocket evasive maneuvers Fighters normally carry limited cannon ammunition with its high performance working against rocket or gun attack accuracy against helicopter targets The enemy fighter will have as little as 0 5 to 3 0 seconds to execute a gun or rocket engagement due to their high speed and the limited effective range of their gun or rockets 6 Air to ground bomb passive countermeasures Once dropped the fighter s bomb will fall on a ballistic flight path that can be avoided or mitigated if detected in time The time of fall of the bombs can be exploited by the attack helicopter crew to avoid the heart of the enemy s weapons effect zones To avoid being hit by their own fragments bombs are equipped with time delayed fuzes of 4 to 6 seconds minim
69. avoid using terms that have multiple meanings such as Right Back up or I have it Crewmembers must also avoid using indefinite modifiers such as Do you see that tree or You are coming in a little fast b Sustain a climate of ready and prompt assistance The requirement to maintain a professional atmosphere by all members of the team begins with the team leadership of the PC However all crewmembers must equally respect the value of other crewmember s expertise and judgment regardless of rank duty or seniority Every member has a responsibility to maintain SA for mission requirements flight regulations operating procedures and safety Each crewmember must be willing to practice advocacy and assertiveness should the situation demand a different course of action as time permits It is critical to maintain a crew climate that enables the opportunity to apply appropriate decision making techniques for defining the best course of action when problems arise Courses of action may demand that assistance be directed to other crewmembers or could be voluntary assistance that is offered in a timely manner depending on time constraints and information available All crewmembers must remain approachable especially in critical phases of flight when reaction time is at a premium Note The two challenge rule allows one crewmember to assume the duties of another crewmember who fails to respond to two consecutive challenges automatically For exam
70. before doing so Focuses his attention outside the aircraft in the direction of movement to provide adequate warning of obstacles and announces Tail clear left Depending on seat assignment announces Tail clear left or Tail clear right Initiates the right turn e Table 6 5 is an example of CH 47D call and response terminology Table 6 5 CH 47D call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks Starting Engines BATT Switch ON All stations check in with the PC sss 6 8 TROOP WARN ALARM and Two bella two ved two areen Forward CE confirms when not visible from JUMP LT light Test 4 9 i ramp verbal call only when not operational Ramp CE confirms that the UTIL HYD Posted at the APU ACCUMs are fully charged before posting at the APU area Fire guard posted APU clear to start Ramp CE monitors the APU for any abnormal condition or fire positioned by the APU Start APU clear to start EMERG fluid shut off valve with access door open during the entire APU start sequence PWR XFER 1 and 2 Switches ON Ramp CE checks UTIL HYD PRESS is within normal range and confirms operation APU GEN Switch ON of the panel press to test lighting Ramp CE ensures that ramp is not touching the ground prior to ENG start Ramp CE confirms PRESS are within normal ranges Ramp CE places and holds the PRESS and TEMPs normal going TEST RESET switch to TEST until the
71. both RCMs to fly while wearing mission oriented protective posture MOPP 4 gear 2 8 NIGHT UNAIDED TRAINING REQUIREMENTS a Annual night unaided training is mandatory for all aviators The tasks listed in table 2 3 and table 2 4 pages 2 3 to 2 6 will be evaluated during RL progression refresher training and a minimum of one iteration of each task will be performed annually b The commander may designate any night tasks for evaluation during the APART period 2 14 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Chapter 3 Evaluations This chapter describes evaluation principles and grading considerations for individual crewmembers It also contains guidelines for conducting academic and hands on performance testing Evaluations are a primary means of assessing flight standardization and crewmember proficiency Evaluations will be conducted IAW AR 95 1 the commander s ATP TC 3 04 11 and this ATM 3 1 EVALUATION PRINCIPLES The value of any evaluation depends on adherence to fundamental evaluation principles These principles are described below a Selection of evaluators The evaluators must be selected not only for their technical qualifications but also for their demonstrated performance objectivity and ability to observe and to provide constructive comments These evaluators are SPs IPs IEs MEs SIs and FIs who assist the commander with ATP administration b Method of evaluation The method used to conduct the evaluation must be based on unif
72. cccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeenteeeeeenaes 5 4 Perform before starting engines CHECKS cceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 5 Perform starting engine CHECKS ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetneeeeetnaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 5 8 Perform engine run up checks ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeereneaeeees 5 10 Performtaxi checks enta ear A eee Gen eee 5 11 Perform before hover checks cccccceeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeseeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 5 12 Perform hover CHECKS cescccccceceeeeeeeeeceeaceeceeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeseeecenanaeeeeeeesseeees 5 13 Perform inflight CHECKS sosea na EE eae a A ai 5 15 Perform autorotation revolutions per minute CheCK ccceceeseeeseeeeeeeees 5 16 Perform maximum continuous power check perform maximum power check 5 18 Perform communication and navigation equipment checkS 00cceee 5 20 Perform special equipment or detailed procedures checks c ceceeeeeeeees 5 21 Perform after landing through engine shutdown checks n 5 22 Figures DA Form 570124 Rawi ohne anh Se ail Sia ae asian 4 19 Final approach SEQMent ccccccecceeeesceeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeseeeeseaneeeeeeeeeeeenaees 4 140 MAHF altitude calculation formula ccccceeeeeeeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeetetsnnaees 4 140 Missed approach Segment s m ii ina aeaaee a at daveetaad iaaa aat 4 141 Intermediate approach SEQMent 0 cccc
73. change the enemy s ballistic solution as often as possible The PI presents the enemy with the most difficult target by maneuvering in three dimensions Unguided weapons are generally employed in three basic methods aimed fire curtain fire and barrage fire each requires a different countermeasure Curtain and barrage fire may not be specifically aimed at an individual aircraft but rather fired into a predicted or suspected air avenue of approach that the enemy believes will be over flown by the aircraft 1 Countering aimed fire When encountering accurate aimed fire the crew should immediately alert the flight jink until the aircraft exits the enemy WEZ while suppressing with organic weapons if feasible Jinking is defined as deliberate controlled changes of multiple axes in order to elude effective enemy fire Turns can be lateral or vertical and are most effective when combined such as changing direction and altitude simultaneously Jinking is used to disrupt deny the enemy a weapon s firing solution by moving the aircraft away from the predicted point of impact intercept Properly executed jinking maximizes errors in the enemy weapon system s firing solution by forcing the gunner to correct for azimuth range altitude and changing velocity constantly and simultaneously This maneuver incorporates a change in direction with a optional climb or descent every several seconds Jinks should be random in direction so as not to become pred
74. cool down met Abort start may also utilize the FE CE verbally stating simulated conditions requiring the ENG start be aborted 2 FS TFPS Verbally direct the crewmember to abort the start or initiate at the instructor operator station IOS of the FS TFPS Dual ENG failure 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS SE failure Low altitude low airspeed abort takeoff and cruise 1 Low altitude low airspeed This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D F SE OGE HVR capability is required when performing this maneuver This condition may be simulated during external sling load s operations in the aircraft if the cargo hook master switch is off to prevent inadvertent load s jettison IP should be especially vigilant and ready to use EMERG release as required when the master switch is off Using the ECL decrease the Ng or N to ground idle The crewmember should state the indications and the IP announces ENG FAILURE illumination of the appropriate ENG fail warning CH 47F ENG fail caution CH 47D or states the Ng is simulated below 48 percent b FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or place one ECLs to stop Note An associated ENG FAIL caution is associated with an actual ENG failure 2 Abort takeoff This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D F Abort takeoff can be performed any time the aircraft i
75. course ground track or heading as appropriate The P will adjust the thrust control as required to maintain the desired climb descent rate or altitude and maintain aircraft in trim with the pedals Perform traffic pattern operations IAW ATC directives AIM local SOP and FM 3 04 203 4 68 a VMC Climb The P will raise the thrust control to initiate climb The P will adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim The P will lower the thrust control to stop climb at desired altitude b VMC Climbing turns The P will raise the thrust control to initiate climb The P will adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim and apply cyclic in the desired direction of turn The P will adjust the cyclic as required to stop turn on heading and lower the thrust control to stop climb at desired altitude c VMC Straight and level flight The P will adjust the thrust control to maintain altitude The P will adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim The P will maintain airspeed and heading d VMC Level turns The P will apply cyclic in the desired direction of turn The P will adjust the thrust control to maintain altitude and adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim The P will apply cyclic opposite the direction of turn to stop the turn on the desired heading e VMC Descents The P will lower the thrust control to initiate the descent The P will adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim The P will raise the thrust control to stop rate of des
76. d FM 3 04 140 e FM 3 04 111 TASK LIST a Standards versus descriptions The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or level of performance to which the task must be accomplished Attention to the use of the words will should shall must may or can throughout the text of a task standard is crucial The description explains one or more recommended techniques for accomplishing the task to meet the standards b Critical task The following numbered tasks are CH 47D F crewmember critical tasks TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing CONDITIONS Prior to flight in a CH 47D F helicopter and given DA Form 5484 Mission Schedule Brief information and a unit approved crew briefing CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 The PC will acknowledge an understanding of DA Form 5484 and will actively participate in a crew mission briefing 2 The PC will conduct or supervise a crew mission briefing using table 4 1 or a more detailed unit approved crew briefing CL 3 Crewmembers receiving the briefing will verbally acknowledge a complete understanding of the aircrew mission briefing Table 4 1 Sample aircrew briefing checklist 1 Crew introduction qualifications 2 Required items Publications ID tags ALSE personnel and mission equipment 3 Mission overview flight
77. during the standardization evaluation Tasks evaluated at night or while using NVG will suffice for tasks required in day conditions Mission tasks will be evaluated during the APART if the task is on the individual s CTL and designated with an E The commander should select mission additional mission tasks for evaluation based on the unit s METL Refer to chapter 5 for MP ME APART requirements Table 2 6 Rated crewmember task list Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight Tasks that must be performed during instrument flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight The tasks selected under the N column do not need to be evaluated during the standardization evaluation If tasks are evaluated at night it will suffice for tasks required in day conditions NVG Tasks that must be performed during NVG flight Tasks evaluated while using NVGs will suffice for tasks required in day conditions S I or NG in the EVAL column Tasks that are mandatory for standardization instrument or annual NVG flight evaluations respectively These tasks apply to CH 47F only Task C e fo n we VL 1000 Paricnsteina Crew Mission Bvefg SENG m a 003 feont S 1004 Plana Visual Fight Rues Fight oo o OS 1006 Plan an instrument Fight Rules Fight J xo Jo 1010 Prepare a Perfomance Planing Card x Js 1012 erty Arrat Weigand Balance M xo Js 1013 Operate Mision P
78. entry it may be necessary to use the windshield wipers 2 Landing Entry of the aft wheels into the water is easily recognized because the helicopter may decelerate rapidly depending on the rate of descent Touchdown attitude should be held constant until the apparent water speed has decreased below 10 knots The thrust control should be lowered slowly 3 After landing At or below 10 knots the nose can be lowered to the water by lowering the thrust control rod and neutralizing the cyclic stick A 4 to 5 knots forward speed will result when the helicopter is level and the flight controls are neutralized with the thrust control at the ground detent Note Aft landing gear ground switches are not actuated during water landing therefore LCT actuators must be manually set to GROUND position 4 84 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Note When the helicopter is in the water two way communication is not possible on systems whose antennas are submerged The HF radio can be operated TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 85 Chapter 4 TASK 1068 Perform Go Around CONDITION In a CH 47D F helicopter after performing a precision or non precision approach STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the following additions modi
79. excessive nose low pitch attitude at higher airspeeds This blade flapping along with the nose low pitch attitude may cause excessive stress on the aft vertical 4 24 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks shaft and rotor system and must be avoided Using the airspeed operating limits chart RET LCT record the MAX AIRSPEED for forecast cruise conditions This chart is located in Chapter 5 of the operator s manual If the planned GWT is not intercepted then refer to the MAX GWT for planned conditions chart and adjust the planned GWT accordingly Item 47 LCT RET Vyg with a LOAD Refer to item 46 for definition Using the airspeed operating limits chart RET LCT record the MAX AIRSPEED for forecast cruise conditions If the planned GWT is not intercepted then refer to the MAX GWT for planned conditions chart and adjust the planned GWT accordingly Item 48 49 DRAG FACTOR The drag factor value is the amount of additional PWR required based on the wind resistance of the flat plate drag of the external sling load s The drag factor of the load s is calculated by the square sq area of the load s the type of load s and the way the load s is rigged If the flat plate drag area is not available in the appropriate manuals then you must manually calculate Tandem Configuration Example Concrete Block Dimensions Height 3 Width 5 Length 8 Height x Width 15 sq feet Width x Length 40 sq feet Total Flat Plate Dra
80. external sling load s words and phrases 4 88 F flight evaluation 3 7 G grading considerations 3 2 H heads up display See appendix B heads up display HUD qualification 2 7 l instructor pilot training and techniques See appendix C L leadership 6 2 M mission tasks 2 9 mission training 2 6 N note meaning of 1 1 nuclear biological and chemical training 2 16 TC 3 04 34 P performance tasks 2 9 personnel terminology 1 2 Q qualification training 2 1 R refresher training 2 2 S situational awareness 6 4 statements and directives 6 4 symbol usage 1 1 T task conditions 4 1 task description 4 4 task list 2 9 task standards 4 3 technical tasks 2 9 terminology personnel 1 2 U unexpected events 6 3 W warning meaning of 1 1 word distinctions 1 1 workload distribution 6 3 Index 1 This page intentionally left blank TC 3 04 34 TC 1 240 5 April 2013 By order of the Secretary of the Army RAYMOND T ODIERNO General United States Army Chief of Staff Official Prr JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 1309505 DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed IAW the initial distribution number 116030 requirements for TC 3 04 34 This page intentionally left blank This page intentionally left blank This page intentionally left blank PIN 102971 000
81. ground MPs MEs are authorized to conduct torque TQ differential check as required by the appropriate MTF e Actual ENG stoppage inflight or while taxiing Power transfer unit PTU switches ON or No 1 or No 2 HYD CONTR switches out of the both position while taxiing or flying Both engine condition levers ECLs are out of the flight position while taxiing or flying Bus tie relay disabled or gang bar placed down APU operations during taxiing or flying Jettison of external sling load s EMERG descent Dual full authority digital engine control FADEC primary PRI and or reversionary REV failure dual PRI failure both ENGs operating in REV may be performed by Directorate of Evaluation and Standardization DES trained SPs IPs or MEs at USAACE EAATS and other DA approved training sites e ECL s out of flight position with No 1 or No 2 ENG FADEC switch s in REV TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks ENG shutdown with APU inoperative Dual generator GEN failure Dual rectifier RECT failure AFCS DAFCS OFF External sling Load s Hook up AFCS DAFCS OFF Combat Maneuvering Flight AFCS DAFCS OFF Fast Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations AFCS DAFCS OFF Rappelling Operations AFCS DAFCS OFF Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration Operations AFCS DAFCS OFF Rescue Hoist Winch Operations AFCS DAFCS OFF Caving Ladder Operations AFCS DAFCS OFF Shipboard Operations Embedded
82. has been spotted Stop LASER illumination of a target Refers to friendly aircraft that present a potential hazard to the current route of flight will be followed by an approximate clock position and the distance from your aircraft with a reference to altitude high or low Transfer of controls Positive three way transfer of the flight controls between the crewmembers for example I have the controls You have the controls and I have the controls Command to deviate from present ground track will be followed by words RIGHT or LEFT specific heading in degrees a bearing Turn right 30 degrees or instructions to follow a well defined contour Follow the draw at 2 o clock Indicates the inability to comply with a specific instruction or request Indicates PRI radio selected will be followed by radio position numbers on Up on the inter communication panels Up on 1 up on 3 Visual Sighting of a friendly aircraft ground position Opposite of BLIND Weapon switches are in the ARMED SAFE or OFF position Wilco have received your message understand and will comply Winchester No ordnance remaining Increase decrease the sensor s focal length Zoom IN OUT is normally Zoom In Out followed by ONE TWO THREE or FOUR to indicate the number of fields of view FOVSs to change Note It is recommended only one change in or out at a time be used for the FOV
83. in a training area or tactical environment with combat maneuvering flight briefing complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Pe Dole i a Establish entry altitude 100 feet Establish entry airspeed 10 KIAS KCAS Maintain the aircraft in trim 1 ball width Maintain pitch attitude not to exceed 20 degrees Maintain roll not to exceed 60 degrees Maintain aircraft within limits and flight envelope Correctly perform crew coordination actions CAUTION Do not exceed CGI limits during the execution of these maneuvers Initiate training at altitudes of no lower than 500 feet AHO with a minimum recovery altitude of 200 feet AHO to ensure adequate room to recover DESCRIPTION 1 4 190 Crew actions a The PC will consider and ensure the crew is aware of the effects of an ENG failure during combat maneuvering flight Airspeed should be maintained between minimum and MAX SE airspeed If an ENG failure occurs above or below these airspeeds TQ will immediately double associated with possible contingency PWR application b The P will announce the maneuver to be performed and any deviation from the maneuver The P will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft throughout the maneuvers The primary reference during these maneuvers will be the visible horizon The P will make smooth and controlled inputs Desired pitch and roll angles are best determined
84. in the FS TFPS a CH 47D Anytime provided fuel is remaining in the AUX tanks Verbally state the indications or pull the AUX FUEL PUMP DC CB A 1 or A 4 The crewmember should detect unbalanced fuel consumption or should note the AUX PRESS light illuminated b CH 47F Anytime provided fuel is remaining in the AUX tanks Verbally state the indications or pull the AUX FUEL PUMP DC CB A 10 or A 13 The crewmember should detect unbalanced fuel consumption or note the AUX PRESS advisory activated on the WCA 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 C 5 Appendix C C 6 ii jj l 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS verbally describe the indications or perform the steps listed in paragraph gg 1 a or b Fuel venting 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Anytime provided fuel is remaining in the AUX tanks 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications L or R FUEL PRESS caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Anytime operating below 6 000 feet PA Verbally state the indications or turn both fuel pump switches for a main tank OFF It can also be accomplished by pulling the main forward and main aft FUEL PUMP DC CBs CH 47D A 2 and A 3 CH 47F A 11 and A 12 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS verbally describe the indications or perform
85. in what direction the crew cleared the load s and the aircraft The NCM will monitor the load s rigging and advise the P when the sling s are tight During the load s hook up and after the sling s are tight the P should refer to the RAD ALT for actual aircraft height AGL The P should then round up the height to the nearest 5 feet and add 10 feet for the appropriate HVR height 6 The NCM will call out load s height in 1 foot increments until the load s is 10 feet off the ground When the load s is stable and the rigging appears safe the NCM will announce that the load s is cleared for flight Ensure that aircraft limitations are not exceeded Takeoff 1 The P will maintain a 10 foot load s height until the P completes a HVR PWR check and a before takeoff check 2 Before takeoff the P will ensure that the load s is cleared for flight by the NCM calling the load s The P will make smooth control inputs to initiate the takeoff and establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance 3 During takeoff NCM will call the aircraft load s height AHO at 15 feet 20 feet 25 feet 50 feet 75 feet and 100 feet The P will back up the NCM by calling out the load s height by referencing the RAD ALT TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 4 When above 100 feet AHO or when clear of obstacles adjust attitude and PWR as required to establish the desired R C and airspeed During the acceleration
86. initiating the procedure The crew will confirm that the correct NAVAID communication frequencies HSI HSD 5 and HSI mode select panel are set as required b The P will focus primarily inside the aircraft on the instruments and perform the approach The P will follow the heading course altitude and missed approach directives issued by the P ATC The P will announce deviations not directed by ATC or the P and will acknowledge all navigation directives given by the P c The P will call out the approach procedure to the P and will advise the P of unannounced deviations JThe P will enter FD data as directed by the P The P will monitor outside for the landing environment announce when he or she makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing IAW AR 95 1 and if directed by the P take the flight controls to complete the landing The P will announce if he or she does not make visual contact by the MAP and call out the missed approach procedures d During simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles The NCM will take a position on the P s side of the aircraft 2 Procedures Perform the desired approach procedures IAW AR 95 1 the DOD FLIP FM 3 04 240 TM 1 1520 240 10 and TM 1 1520 271 10 Note GPS IFR navigation must be certified by the FAA or host country regulations prior to GPS IFR use With an IFR certified GPS ensure the DAFIF data is current and
87. knob on Aft hook checking AFT hook Aft hook ratchets operational Resetting MID hook clear MID hook is closed Resetting Armed in tandem Forward and aft hook operational Ensure forward and aft hook manual release knobs ratchet Resetting MID hook clear Resetting Armed in all Forward and aft hook operational Ensure forward and aft hook manual release MID hook open knobs ratchet and MID hook opens Resetting MID hook clear MID hook is closed Ensure MID hook closes Checking safe Safe in the rear Aft CE presses cargo release on hoist operators grip Ensure hooks do not actuate DECU Prestart BIT Perform 88 on 1 and 2 Do not read the DECU s digital displays until Refer to Note 2 the ECLs are in ground or until requested by the PI Area Clear for start 1 and 2 ENG areas are clear fire NCM will post 45 degrees off the nose of the guard posted ready on 1 or 2 ENG A good location is even with the position lights outside the rotor disk NCM confirms that the ENG areas are clear before clearing the Pls to start ENGs Starting Engines EAPS Fan switches ON 1 or 2 ENG air particle separator If installed FOD may blow out during the EAPS fans clear EAPS fans purge so be sure the area is clear prior to operational turning them on First ENG Start 1 or 2 Clear for start If performing a two crewmember run up the other CE will post on the opposite side prior to the start sequence Refer to Note 3 Seco
88. loaded prior to IFR use If a certified GPS or current DAFIF data is not available then crews will not use the GPS for IFR navigation However they should consider and plan for its use as an EMERG backup system only TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 102 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1180 Perform an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter in VMC or simulated IMC given an approved EMERG GPS recovery procedure with procedure clearance received and the before landing check completed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Enter confirm the appropriate waypoint initial approach fix IAF intermediate approach fix IF final approach fix FAF MAP or missed approach holding fix MAHF into the navigation system Execute the procedure IAW an approved recovery procedure Maintain a briefed airspeed not to exceed 90 KIAS KCAS on final and missed approach segments Maintain the prescribed course 5 degrees Comply with the descent minimums prescribed for the procedure Arrive at the minimum descent altitude MDA before reaching the MAP IW If using the FD selects the correct course guidance source Execute a missed approach on reaching
89. manual f Control interference check Depress centering device release switch and move either directional pedal to full forward travel Check for contact between the aft positioned pedal adjustment lever and forward edge of cockpit floor structure If contact exists the MP or NCM will visually check the outboard bellcranks in the first stage mixing unit for contact with the mechanical stops IAW the note in the MTF to verify the floor structure is not the source of flight control range limiting The left directional pedal in the forward position will require checking of the lower stop while the right directional pedal forward will require checking the upper stops The bellcranks must make contact with 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 5 Chapter 5 5 6 the stops prior to the pedal making contact with the floor structure With the centering device release switch depressed move the cyclic full forward then laterally towards the aft positioned directional pedal The pedals should displace slightly aft pedal moves forward away from cyclic and forward pedal moves aft as the cyclic comes in close proximity to the aft pedal Allowable contact between the cyclic tube and aft pedal adjustment lever will be IAW the note in the MTF manual During the above stated procedures check for interference between cyclic tube and floor structure and forward portion of the cyclic boot plate as well as for interference between the cyclic grip and instrument panel g Obtai
90. night during the final 100 feet should be slightly slower than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes ROUGH UNPREPARED SURFACE CONSIDERATIONS Closely monitor touchdown speed when landing to a rough or unprepared surface Consistent with the situation and aircraft capabilities a more pronounced deceleration before touchdown coupled with stronger aerodynamic braking after touchdown may be appropriate Note that the wheel brakes may be less effective If the surface is soft exercise care when lowering the thrust control until the aircraft comes to a complete stop Note The wheel brakes may be less effective To prevent an abrupt stop smoothly lower the thrust control until the aircraft comes to a complete stop ROLL ON LANDING TO WATER CONSIDERATIONS Roll on landings to water can be performed within the limitations shown in chapter 5 of the appropriate operators manual but should be performed only during training missions or actual SE conditions when a hovering approach is not possible Roll on landings for training should only be performed to calm water Sea State 1 or less 1 Approach Prior to performing a roll on landing to the water the PITOT HEAT switch must be ON The ramp lower half of the cabin door lower rescue door and drain plugs must be CLOSED Landing searchlights shall be RET A shallow approach should be flown at an airspeed that provides safe aircraft control Prior to water
91. of performing a slope landing in Task 1062 in this ATM may be used for this type of landing All crewmembers must assist in providing information on aircraft position in the landing area OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS More detailed flight planning is required for nighttime flights When selecting colors for navigational aid s such as maps and kneeboard notes interior cockpit lighting should be considered TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 2 FS Training a Training may be conducted in the aircraft or FS Academic and flight training may be conducted at high altitude Army aviation training site HAATS or using the HAATS mountain training POI if available or the recommended POI in FM 3 04 203 chapter 4 b The optimal flight training area is an actual mountain environment If unforeseen circumstances prevent the accomplishment of this training in the aircraft then a compatible visual FS may be used for training and evaluation Ifa FS is used for training the datum plane will be set no lower than 5 000 feet MSL for the training area selected The TEMP wind and aircraft GWT should be varied to achieve the MAX training effect Evaluation An evaluation may be required at the discretion of the commander in the aircraft or TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5A pril 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 189 Chapter 4 TASK 2127 Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter
92. of vision 6 Aerodynamics FM 3 04 203 TM 1 1520 240 10 and TM 1 1520 271 10 This subject area applies only to RCMs Topics in this subject area are as follows e e e e e e e N 7 Attitude and heading control Dissymmetry of lift In ground effect IGE out of ground effect OGE hovering flight Characteristics of dynamic roll over Retreating blade stall Settling with power Types of drag ight mission operations in FM 3 04 203 Topics in this subject area are Unaided night flight Visual illusions Distance estimation and depth perception Dark adaptation night vision protection and central night blind spot Night vision limitations and techniques Types of vision Use of internal and external lights Night terrain interpretation map preparation and navigation 8 Tactical and mission operations FM 3 04 111 FM 3 04 126 FM 55 450 2 FM 4 20 197 FM 4 20 198 FM 4 20 199 FM 3 52 Army Tactics Techniques and Procedures ATTP 3 18 12 FM 3 04 203 the commander s ATP TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and the unit SOP Topics in this subject area are CBRNE operations ASE employment Downed aircraft procedures Aircraft armament subsystems Communication security COMMSEC Mission equipment Internal load s operations Aviation mission planning 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 3 5 Chpater 3 3 6 Fratricide prevention Evasive maneuvers Cargo rescue hoist operation
93. on 1 or 2 zero on Standing in a position to view the HYDs Check 2 or 1 Corresponding movement maintenance panel and both rotor heads the forward and aft heads PRESS is Aft CE observes the operation of the System normal 1 and 2 After FLT CONT PRESS rotor heads and flight controls for switch is placed back to BOTH each system Forward CE observes the operation of the rotor heads and flight 6 12 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 6 CH 47F NCM call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks a Ce ee Fuel quantity Check Refuel station reads outside Aircraft fuel load verified from PMD Preflight Ibs internal ERFS installed Cargo hooks hoist winch CAUTION One CE will observe operation of the cargo Check operation as required All l in cl f hook s and make the appropriate responses personnel must remain clear o for the operation The other CE will be sted penny ny times Ready positioned in the cabin to operate the hoist outside ready aft two man crew operator s grip as required If single Ready aft one man crew crewmember perform both Armed in FORWARD Forward hook operational Ensure manual release knob on forward hook ratchets Armed in MID MID Hook is clear Ensure all crew members are clear of the MID hook Checking MID hook MID hook is open Ensure MID hook opens Armed in Aft Hoist operator s panel armed Ensure manual release
94. or she has control of the brakes and the PWR steering The P will monitor LCT operation and take care to not exceed ground control limitations d All crewmembers will clear the aircraft as necessary The P will raise the thrust control to start forward movement and then lower it to ground detent All thrust control movements will be announced 1 The P will maintain the taxi speed with moderate brake applications and call for thrust control application reduction as appropriate 2 The P will slowly rotate the PWR steering control knob to turn the aircraft in the desired direction During taxi at light GWT the P may have to advise the P to apply AFT cyclic to prevent a loss of steering control e When the NCM is required outside the aircraft during taxiing the NCM will take a position where the P P can clearly see his or her hand and arm signals or will remain attached to the aircraft communication system f Prior to four wheel taxi visually confirm that both aft gears are in the trail position g During four wheel taxi the P must not allow the PWR steering control knob to spring back to the neutral position h Ifthe LCT actuators cycle between RET and ground because of light loading on the aft landing gear it may be necessary to apply up to 2 inches of aft cyclic If this action does not prevent further LCT cycling set the cyclic trim switch to MANUAL If the LCTs are not at GROUND manually set them to that posi
95. other aircraft If visual contact is lost with other aircraft complete the following b 1 The crew will immediately make a radio call to the flight and begin reorientation procedures example Chalk 3 has loss of visual contact with the formation 2 Lead will announce and maintain heading altitude and airspeed until all aircraft have rejoined the flight The P will also announce his or her position relative to the next waypoint 3 The aircraft that has lost visual contact with the flight will immediately assume leads heading airspeed and maintain vertical separation as briefed 4 If IMC are encountered execute IIMC breakup as briefed The P will ensure that the appropriate radio calls are made during IMC breakup The P and NCM will provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles detected in the flight path and identified on the map The P and NCM will inform the P if visual contact is lost with other aircraft or if an enemy is sighted Also when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside along with the seat position The PC will call out direction and altitude in case of IMC breakup The NCMs will position themselves in the aircraft to observe other aircraft in the formation and assist in maintaining aircraft separation and obstacle clearance Procedures a b Perform formation flight IAW the unit s SOP and the common references in this ATM If the tactic
96. publication The asterisk indicates that the source was also used to develop this publication ARMY PUBLICATIONS AR 40 8 Temporary Flying Restrictions Due to Exogenous Factors 16 May 2007 AR 70 62 Airworthiness Qualification of Aircraft Systems 21 May 2007 AR 95 1 Flight Regulations 12 November 2008 AR 95 2 Airspace Airfields Heliports Flight Activities Air Traffic Control and Navigational Aids 10 April 2010 AR 190 11 Physical Security of Arms Ammunition and Explosives 15 November 2006 AR 190 51 Security of Unclassified Army Property Sensitive and Nonsensitive 30 September 1993 AR 600 105 Aviation Service of Rated Army Officers 22 June 2010 AR 600 106 Flying Status for Nonrated Army Aviation Personnel 08 December 1998 AR 750 1 Army Material Maintenance Policy 20 September 2007 References 2 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 References ATTP 3 18 11 Special Forces Waterborne Operations 14 October 2011 DA Pam 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System Aviation TAMMS A 15 March 1999 FM 1 230 Meteorology for Army Aviators 30 September 1982 FM 3 04 111 Aviation Brigades 07 December 2011 FM 3 04 113 Utility and Cargo Helicopter Operations 07 December 2007 FM 3 04 126 Attack Reconnaissance Helicopter Operations 16 February 2007 FM 3 04 140 Helicopter Gunnery 14 July 2003 FM 3 04 203 Fundamentals of Flight 07 May 2007 FM 3 04 240 Instru
97. received over a digital enabled NET However digital traffic is not possible over a voice NET b Digital NET users must have subscriber and originator ID tags set in a minimum of two IDM aircraft possess a common very high frequency VHF ultra high frequency HF or frequency modulation frequency and subscribers must be enabled as team primary members 2 Procedures a The crew will initially construct and develop the desired digital NETs during pre mission planning through the use of approved software Certain critical elements of digital NETs will not be able to be configured in the aircraft b Unit of assignment mission essential task list aircraft configuration and resources will determine the ability to establish a digital NET for communication TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 TFPS or desktop trainer 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 51 Chapter 4 TASK 1034 Perform Ground Taxi CAUTION While turning during a two wheel taxi the P must avoid the forward gear contacting the ground CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter on a suitable surface with the before ground taxi after landing check completed and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Maintain a constant speed appropriate
98. route time line and AR 95 10 DOD notices to airmen NOTAM system air coordination order 4 Weather departure en route destination and void time 5 Formation multi aircraft operations 6 Tactical considerations rules of engagement ROE weapon engagement rules weapon status and ID friend or foe IFF combat search and rescue CSAR terms evasion plan 7 External sling load s operations 8 Airspace surveillance procedures visual sectors third pilot duties Task 1026 9 Analysis of the aircraft a ig Mission data loaded if required Logbook and preflight deficiencies b Performance planning e Re computation of performance planning card PPC if necessary e Single engine capability Best SE Maximum MAX R C indicated airspeed IAS and minimum MAX SE IAS e GO NO GO data and validation factor c Mission deviations required based on aircraft analysis 10 Crew actions duties and responsibilities a Transfer of flight controls command select and two challenge rules b Emergency actions e Actions to be performed by P P and NCM e Emergency equipment first aid kits survival kits evasion and escape kits e Egress procedures and rendezvous point e IIMC NVG failure e Mission considerations Threat situation EMERG squawk communication zeroize equipment disable aircraft and collect destroy classified materials weapons security 11 General crew duties a P e Fly the aircraft Primary focus outside
99. s manual release 2 Cargo hook pneumatic release if the pre charge is low and requires servicing The EPs listed herein are demonstrated practiced and evaluated during training Any EP may be performed in the CH 47D F FS TFPS The performance of EP training in the aircraft will be briefed prior to the flight and all emergencies will be considered actual unless stated otherwise Aircraft EMERG conditions procedures restrictions and the only authorized methods of simulating the condition in the aircraft are outlined in paragraph C 2 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 C 1 Appendix C WARNING Simulation of emergency conditions other than verbal in the actual aircraft will only be accomplished while the aircraft is operating in VMC Note Pulling of CBs other than those listed below is not authorized in the CH 47D F to demonstrate or simulate an EMERG procedure C 2 INSTRUCTOR PILOT TECHNIQUES a b Autorotate This may only be performed in the FS TFPS EMERG ENG shutdown This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 1 CH 47D F Initiated on the ground with the ECL in the ground position and the required ENG cool down met Not to be performed while ground taxiing 2 FS TFPS No restrictions Abort start This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 1 CH 47D F initiated during the ENG start sequence or when the aircraft is parked brake set ECL in the ground position and the required ENG
100. scanning all areas After the first ENG is stabilized at ground idle the aft CE is clear to reposition to check the maintenance panel for proper indications and APU area for leaks After the second ENG is stabilized at ground idle the aft CE must reposition to check the maintenance panel for proper indications and APU area for leaks prior to repositioning to clear ENGs to flight Note 4 If flight has two NCMs the aft NCM will call RAMP UP and forward NCM will call CABIN DOOR SECURE If the flight only has one NCM the aft NCM will make both calls Note 5 If the flight has two NCMs the aft NCM will call AFT READY and the forward NCM will call FORWARD READY If the flight has one NCM the aft NCM will call AFT READY 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 15 This page intentionally left blank Appendix A NonRated Crewmember and Trainer Training and Qualification A 1 NONRATED CREWMEMBER TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION MOS qualification is conducted at DA approved training sites CEs must complete the aircraft qualification training listed for system subjects required academic subjects and flight training subjects for MOS 15U a Academic qualification training The NCM must receive sufficient instruction to be knowledgeable in the aircraft manuals systems and flight training subjects listed below The academic instruction may be completed in any order but must be completed to include the examination and documented
101. some distance ahead of the aircraft and lying along or near the course 1 Using these terrain features to key on the P maneuvers the aircraft to take advantage of the terrain and vegetation for concealment 2 If this navigational technique does not apply identify the desired route by designating a series of successive checkpoints 3 To remain continuously oriented compare actual terrain features with those on the map 4 An effective technique is to combine the use of terrain features and rally terms when giving directions This will allow the P to focus his or her attention outside the aircraft b For low level navigation the time and distance can be computed effectively This means the P can fly specific headings and airspeeds Each of the methods for stating heading information is appropriate under specific conditions 1 When a number of terrain features are visible and prominent enough for the P to recognize them the most appropriate method is navigation instruction toward a terrain feature in view TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 When forward visibility is restricted and frequent changes are necessary controlled turning instructions are more appropriate 3 Clock headings are recommended when associated with a terrain feature and with controlled turning instructions Note For additional information refer to Tasks 1044 1046 and 1166 Note The aircrew should incorporate the use of Army approve
102. standardization evaluation If tasks are evaluated at night it will suffice for tasks required in day conditions NVG Tasks that must be performed during NVG flight Tasks evaluated while using NVGs will suffice for tasks required in day conditions S or NG in the EVAL column Tasks that are mandatory for standardization or annual NVG flight evaluations respectively Task Task Title 4000 Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight Checks 4081 Perform Before Starting Engine Checks 2 12 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 2 6 2 7 Training Table 2 9 Maintenance test pilot maintenance test flight evaluator task list CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS a Aircraft currency Aircraft currency will be IAW AR 95 1 Crewmembers whose currency has lapsed must complete a PFE administered by an IP SP FI or SI as appropriate Commanders should consider selecting tasks from each mode of flight D N and T and evaluating tasks from each selected mode during the currency evaluation These requirements will be outlined in the unit standing operating procedure SOP The crewmember will demonstrate proficiency in those tasks and modes selected by the commander If the crewmember fails to demonstrate proficiency the crewmember will be placed in the appropriate RL An appropriate training program will be developed to enable the crewmember to regain proficiency in the unsatisfactory tasks b NVG currency To be considered
103. stations will have a full page ENG indication caution advisory system instrument on one MFD The center MFD No 5 will have a full page warning caution advisory displayed until before taxi checks during startup and prior to conducting ENG shutdown checks 3 Comply with call and response terminology as outlined in chapter 6 and by the unit SOP 4 Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 5 Complete post flight inspection and properly secure the aircraft after the last flight of the day IAW the appropriate operator s manual DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Each crewmember will complete the required checks pertaining to their assigned crew duties IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL Crewmembers will coordinate with each other before entering data into aircraft systems b The P will read the CL and announce APU and ENG starts c All crewmembers will clear the area around the aircraft before APU start and each ENG start d NCMs will perform duties as required by duty position and as directed by the PC IAW the unit s SOP while maintaining situational awareness SA e The PC will ensure the appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 DA Form 2408 13 1 and the PAT log IAW the unit SOP and DA Pam 738 751 f If two or more NCMs will perform flight duties the FE will determine which crewmember will perform specific portions of each task g Secu
104. such as rocks Set the brakes to minimize forward roll after landing e Soft surface area This is considered as a thick layer of snow or dust with no visible sub surface Release the brakes to minimize abrupt stop after landing and unnecessary stress on the aft landing gear Note When landing in deep sand or snow the aircraft wheels skis may settle at different rates Note During sand dust landings all doors and windows should be closed and vent blowers turned off Note OGE hovering reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO if ground reference is lost Note HVR OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation If ground references are limited the P may elect to perform coupled HVR flight Task 1039 and transition inside to the HVR symbology Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO if ground reference is lost Note At night use of the landing search or anti collision light may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS 1 Before commencing the approach the crew will determine and brief an escape route in case a go around is necessary 2 An approach one third of the useable landing area will reduce the approach angle and minimize PWR requirements 3 During the approach continue to determine t
105. tactical flight 3 Considerations When tactics are insufficient the crew will select and apply the appropriate EVM Any EVM must be used in concert with ASE onboard weapon systems and other TTP to minimize the SAFIRE threats to the aircraft EVM are broadly categorized by whether the enemy weapon is guided or unguided Generally the aircrew must defeat the weapon system for guided weapons and defeat the gunner for unguided weapons Both guided and unguided weapons require time to get to the target based on weapon to target range and projectile velocity At some ranges the TOF can be exploited to allow the PI to maneuver the aircraft out of danger However the time required varies greatly depending on the type of weapon and TOF Tank main gun rounds and automatic antiaircraft cannons have extremely high velocities and very short TOF where as rocket propelled grenade RPG and certain antitank guided missiles ATGMs have comparatively slow TOF 4 Communication Intra cockpit and inter flight communication during a SAFIRE or air attack event are critical in performing EVM in a timely manner Alerting the rest of the flight maximizes mission survivability by providing early warning and reaction time and perhaps maneuver space with the goal of minimizing other aircrews exposure to the WEZ if not enabling them to avoid the WEZ altogether The threat call must be both directive telling the flight what you want them to do and descriptive telli
106. takeoff to ensure the predicted HVR TQ is at or less than the 30 MIN TQ AVAIL at arrival Item 106 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE DUAL ENG no LOAD Refer to item 30 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height IGE for forecast arrival conditions Refer to item 30 Note For TEMPs below 0 degrees C add the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT value DUAL ENG to the predicted HVR TQ value DUAL ENG This value will be added to all predicted HVR DUAL ENG calculations Item 107 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE DUAL ENG no LOAD Refer to item 31 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height OGE Refer to item 31 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 29 Chapter 4 Item 108 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE DUAL ENG with a LOAD Refer to item 32 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the predicted TQ required to HVR at a height that will place the load s approximately 10 feet AGL and IGE Refer to item 32 Item 109 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE DUAL ENG with a LOAD Refer to item 33 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the predicted TQ required to HVR OGE Refer to item 33 Item 110 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE SE no LOAD Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height IGE Refer to it
107. the MAP if a safe landing cannot be accomplished SO POON Be ob During the missed approach immediately establish a climb using an appropriate R C airspeed until est blished at the minimum safe altitude MSA DESCRIPTION 1 Before flight the crew should review the recovery procedure with the map to familiarize themselves with the procedure local terrain and obstructions in the vicinity of the procedure The PC performs a thorough map reconnaissance to determine the highest obstruction in the area of operations 2 Before initiating the procedure the P must climb to the prescribed MSA proceed toward the IAF and make the appropriate radio calls During the procedure the P will focus primarily inside the aircraft on the instruments Adjust the aircraft ground track to cross the IAF IF and then the FAF on the prescribed course When over the FAF begin the final descent as appropriate 3 The P remains primarily focused outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles hazards The P will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit JThe P will enter FD data as directed by the P The P will monitor the aircraft instruments during the procedure and the P should tune the communication and navigation radios and transponder as required The P will be prepared to call out the procedure to the P if asked and be in a position to assume control of the aircraft and land the aircraft if VMC is encountered
108. the aircraft along the route of flight within 200 meters Arrive at check points destination at ETA 1 minute J Select the course deviation indicator for the active course guidance source F If using the FD selects the correct course guidance source prior to coupling the system DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigational instructions or cues given by the P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading altitude and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P will announce significant terrain features to assist in navigation b The P will be the primary operator of the electronic aided navigation system The P will direct the P to change aircraft heading altitude and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the desired course The P will use rally terms specific headings relative bearings or key terrain features to accomplish this task c The P will announce all plotted wires before approaching the location when the aircraft s altitude makes the wires a hazard The P will monitor aircraft instruments and both the P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft while providing adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles Note Only the P will perform inflight time labor intensive navigation programming duties for example building routes Procedures Perform the turn on test and programming procedures IAW the
109. the aircraft at the appropriate airspeed while maintaining 100 percent rotor revolutions per minute RRPM c Perform the PAT IAW the applicable reference Once the check has been completed for both ENGs confirm a system check and continue with the mission Manipulation of the ECLs may not be required if the TQs are in the appropriate ranges for the PAT TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 46 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 TASK 1028 Crewmember Tasks Perform Hover Power Check CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the before HVR check complete at an appropriate HVR height and with performance planning information AVAIL and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Position the aircraft in the vicinity of the takeoff point and in the direction of takeoff at the appropriate HVR height 2 F Ensure the WT is entered accurately into the CAAS and that the HVR override data correctly represents performance planning data 3 Determine if sufficient PWR is AVAIL to complete the mission by comparing actual TQ to predicted TQ GO NO GO TQ and the validation factor obtained during performance planning 4 Determine if SE capability exists throughout all modes of flight 5 D
110. the approach into the wind if possible c The P will provide the P with information regarding airspeed and altitude The P will also monitor the cockpit indications The P will ensure that the PITOT HEAT switch is turned ON both searchlight switches are OFF and the control switches are in the RET position The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when their attention is re established outside d The NCM will advise the PIs of any unusual water accumulation in the cargo area During ramp down operations the NCM will advise the PIs of the water level before it reaches fuselage station 400 Procedures a RCM 1 Upon arrival at the landing area perform a VMC approach to arrive at a 15 foot HVR with no forward movement During the approach inspect the landing area for debris and abort the landing if the landing site is not clear of obstructions When landing reduce the thrust control to a PWR setting that prevents the water form coming forward of fuselage station 400 IAW the water landing AWR 2 Maintain the controls at neutral for a forward speed of 4 to 6 KTS During ramp down operations do not apply AFT cyclic or adjust the RRPM to 97 percent to slow the taxi speed At speeds up to 5 KTS use the pedals and cyclic to make turns Turning will not be performed during ramp down operations 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 181 Chapter 4 3 Raise the thrust control to m
111. the effects of the wind b Perform a ground speed check as soon as possible by computing the actual time required to fly a known distance Adjust estimated times for subsequent legs of the flight route using actual ground speed Compare planned ground speed with actual ground speed and adjust airspeed as required to arrive at each control point at its original ETA NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS More detailed flight planning is required when the flight is conducted at terrain flight altitudes when visibility is reduced or in a night or NVG environment Interior cockpit lighting should be considered when selecting colors for preparing NAVAIDs such as maps and kneeboard notes FM 3 04 203 contains details on night navigation and mission planning TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 66 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1046 Perform Electronically Aided Navigation CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an electronically aided navigational system installed and operational STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the installed electronically aided navigational system IAW the appropriate TM or manufacturer s operating manual 2 3 4 5 Determine the position of
112. the last part of the approach with hand and arm signals c Hovering 1 Maintain a HVR until the LSE gives the signal to set the aircraft down Follow the LSE s signal to move left right aft or forward 2 Control drifts using the ship s superstructure and the horizon if visible for attitude reference while hovering Note The P will verbally relay the signalman s signals if the P loses visual contact with the LSE d Landing 1 In rough seas attempt to land when the ship is at the apex of a pitch up 2 Watch the LSE and listen to guidance from the ship s tower Lower the thrust control and perform a controlled touchdown with the main wheels inside the landing deck circle 3 When the landing gear is on the deck smoothly lower the thrust control to the full down position The P shall immediately turn OFF the AFCS DAFCS to prevent un commanded inputs 4 Maintain the cyclic centered and ignore aircraft motion Wait until the wheels are chocked and chained before exiting the aircraft e Takeoff 1 The P will show his or her hands during the day or will flash a light at night to indicate to the LSE which aviator is at the controls 2 The P shall turn ON the AFCS DAFCS just before takeoff 3 When cleared for takeoff increase PWR and smoothly ascend to a HVR height of 10 feet keeping the LSE in sight Slide left or right as directed to clear obstructions and depart the ship at a 45 degree ang
113. the safety of the SPIES members To avoid jerking the SPIES members off the ground the slack in the ropes must be removed cautiously Do not start forward flight until all obstacles are cleared c MAX en route airspeed will not be faster than 70 KIAS KCAS in moderate climates and 50 KIAS KCAS in cold climates while team members are attached to the SPIES rope MAX aircraft bank angle will be no greater than 30 degrees During forward flight the NCM must constantly monitor the SPIES members and keep the P informed of their stability It may be necessary to reduce airspeed if SPIES personnel begin to spin or if the cone angle exceeds 30 degrees d Upon arrival at the dismount area transition to hovering flight at an altitude of 250 feet AGL Start vertical descent with the rate not to exceed 100 FPM at touchdown Maintain a stable HVR until SPIES team members clear the rope OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 The SPIES is suitable for extracting teams from the water For this procedure three inflatable life vests or any type of floatation device are tied to the SPIES rope to provide buoyancy for the rope while in the water 2 Takeoff en route and landing are the same for water as over land The dismounting procedures differ when landing on a ship Once onboard the team members take their orders from personnel in charge of the deck 3 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 4 Overwater flight at any altitude is char
114. to 3 200 psi e UTIL PRESS Normal PRESS between 2 500 to 3 500 psi b HYD TEMPs Check the FLT CONT and UTIL HYD TEMP gauges for normal TEMP e FLT CONT and UTIL HYD TEMPs are in the caution range between 95 to 120 degrees Celsius e MAX TEMP for all systems is 120 degrees Celsius c D Latch indicators Check for tripped black and white indications d F Digital indicators Check verify fault indicators are not illuminated Note The only latch indicators that a RESET can be attempted on are the debris screen latches D Warning lights Ensure warning lights are not illuminated Press to test during cruise check to ensure the bulbs have not burned out e Fluid levels Ensure the fluid levels in all three systems remain constant Note The aircraft hydraulic systems may be serviced inflight 14 AFT synchronizing shaft bearing and mount Check for vibrations and signs of overheating 15 Ramp area Check for leaks chafed lines extended filter buttons accumulator ACCUM PRESS shorted or grounded wires and security of aft XMSN access doors TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Either RCM will call for the cruise check after takeoff or when the aircraft enters the mission profile b The NCM s will check the ramp and cabin area during the initial cruise check when requested by either RCM and every 30 minutes thereafter as the mission allows 2 Procedures
115. to HVR IGE OGE with a LOAD SE Refer to item 20 and 21 for definition Using the HVR chart SE contingency TQ AVAIL obtained in item 86 and the forecast arrival conditions record the MAX allowable GWT to HVR for SE operation IGE OGE Refer to item 20 and 21 Item 98 99 MAX G WT to HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE no LOAD DUAL ENG Refer to item 22 and 23 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer item 22 and 23 Item 100 101 MAX G WT to HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE with a LOAD DUAL ENG Refer to item 24 and 25 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 24 and 25 Item 102 103 MAX G WT to HVR CONT IGE OGE no LOAD DUAL ENG Refer to item 26 and 27 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 26 and 27 Item 104 105 MAX GWT to HVR CONT IGE OGE with a LOAD DUAL ENG Refer to item 28 and 29 for definition Using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart and forecasted conditions at arrival record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 28 and 29 Note If the value for the predicted HVR TQ for items 106 107 108 and 109 is greater than the 30 MIN TQ AVAIL item 87 the TAKEOFF GWT item 6 and 7 will be adjusted for example adjust fuel or cargo prior to
116. to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 16 and 17 Item 30 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE DUAL ENG no LOAD Predicted HVR TQ may be used to confirm the pre calculated aircraft GWT or to provide a basis for determining a possible TQ measuring system malfunction This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height IGE usually conducted at a 10 foot wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height IGE Note For TEMPs below 0 degrees C add the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT value DUAL ENG to the predicted HVR TQ value This value will be added to all predicted HVR DUAL ENG calculations Note If the value for the predicted HVR TQ for items 30 31 32 and 33 is greater than the 30 MIN TQ AVAIL item 11 the TAKEOFF GWT item 6 and 7 must be adjusted to ensure the predicted HVR TQ is at or less than the 30 MIN TQ AVAIL 4 22 Item 31 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE DUAL ENG no LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel OGE usually conducted at an 80 foot wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the TQ required to HVR OGE TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Item 32 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE DUAL ENG with a LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR with the load s approximately 10 feet above ground level AGL IGE Conducted at a 10 foot wheel height
117. to determine PWR requirements for the conditions at takeoff cruise and arrival 2 Prior to takeoff analyze winds obstacles and density altitude Perform a HVR PWR check if required 3 The P will select a takeoff angle depending on the wind demarcation line density altitude GWT and obstacles After clearing obstacles accelerate the aircraft to the desired airspeed b When flying in a valley 1 The aircraft should be flown in the smoother up flowing air on the lifting side of the valley windward side 2 Under light winds the aircraft should be flown closer to the side of the valley This allows MAX distance to turn 180 degrees should it become necessary for Wx or enemy situation Additionally less populated areas are present on the side of the valleys as opposed to the center of the valley Caution should be used when flying on the leeward side due to potentially significant downdrafts 3 At higher GWTs and PAs the MAX allowable airspeed will decrease It may be necessary to decrease airspeed to remain within aircraft limitations and prevent blade stall c Select an approach angle 4 188 1 Depending on winds demarcation line density altitude GWT and obstacles select an approach angle An approach angle of 30 degrees or less will minimize the possibility of settling with PWR 2 During the approach continue to determine the suitability of the intended landing point The rate of closure may be difficult to determi
118. to return to the desired altitude d Ifthe aircraft attitude is changed excessively or abruptly it may be difficult to return the aircraft to a level attitude and over controlling may result Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Due to the limited field of view of the NVG the P must avoid abrupt changes in aircraft attitude An extreme nose high attitude limits the forward field of view and may cause disorientation The P should maintain proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance and clearance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 128 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1412 Perform Evasive Maneuvers CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter in a tactical environment familiar with classified evasive tactics techniques and procedures TTP and all organic ASE having received enemy fire STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform appropriate evasive maneuver EVM communications 2 Perform appropriate EVM for the type of threat 3 Evaluate any damage to aircraft 4 Recommend or execute a course of action DESCRIPTION 1 EVMs consist of a combina
119. to the complexity of determining obstacle clearance 4 140 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks c The area of consideration for missed approach surface and the 20 1 obstacle clearance evaluation for all rotary wing Missed Approach Obstacle Clearance Missed Approach Segment Obstacles cannot penetrate the surface area See NOTE A Distance from the obstacle to the 3 nm point and multiply by 304 20 1 Example tower 3 nm away eS 2 7 7 2 nm 3 x 304 912 Note This computation must be completed for all obstacles within the above area If the obstacles penetrate the surface area establish a higher climb gradient a higher MDA move the MAP or turn the missed approach Figure 4 4 Missed approach segment 5 Intermediate approach segment figure 4 5 a The intermediate segment begins at the IF and ends at the FAF b Determine the IF The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 5 NM from the IF to the FAF The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either side Final Approach Fix FAF Altitude Intermediate Approach Segment B Add 500 ft MAP 3 nm past MAP gt 3 10 nn gt 35 nm gt 1 nm IF AF 4 nm 2 nm on either side A Highest obstacle within this area A Determine highest obstacle from 1 nm before IF to FAF and 2 nm laterally A Figure 4 5 Intermediate approach segment 6 Initial approach segment figure 4 6
120. to the flight position and re establish DUAL ENG flight h Using the recorded PTIT value on the ENG being PACed calculate a trigger value IAW the appropriate MTF manual i F Note OAT using the FAT gauge in the cockpit when calculating required values for PAC j Verify all required steps are completed 3 Crew stations The MP must be in the left seat for this maneuver TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 19 Chapter 5 TASK 4262 Perform Communication and Navigation Equipment Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the communication frequency s and navigation charts equipment STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and ensure all navigation and communication equipment functions IAW the appropriate operator s manual and the MTF manual DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The MP may perform these checks or direct assistance from the RCM to perform them as appropriate b The P will remain focused outside during the procedures maneuver as appropriate for the procedure and maintain airspace surveillance The MP should direct the NCM to assist with maintaining airspace surveillance 2 Procedures a Perform IAW section IV of the appropriate MTF manual b Verify all required steps are completed TRAINING AND EVALUATION
121. tools in assisting commanders with development and implementation of their ATP The proponent of this publication is the United States U S Army Training and Doctrine Command TRADOC Send comments and recommendations on Department of the Army DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms or automated link http www apd army mil through the aviation unit commander to Commander United States Army Aviation Center of Excellence USAACE ATTN ATZQ TDT F Flight Training Branch Building 4507 Andrews Avenue Fort Rucker AL 36362 5000 or direct e mail questions to usarmy rucker avncoe mbx ATZQ TDT F mail mil or online at https www us army mil suite page 432 Recommended changes may also be e mailed to usarmy rucker avncoe avncoe mbx ATZQ ES mail mil This publication implements portions of standardization agreement STANAG 3114 Edition Eight This publication has been reviewed for operations security considerations vi TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Chapter 1 Introduction The tasks in this ATM enhance training in individual and aircrew proficiency The training focuses on tasks supporting the unit s mission The mission essential task list METL will dictate the scope and level of training to be achieved individually by crewmembers and collectively by aircrews Commanders must ensure aircrews are proficient in the METL 1 1 CREW STATION DESIGINATION The commander will designate a crew station s
122. training subject written examination Egress procedures b Flight training The NCM will be required to demonstrate proficiency in all individual base tasks listed in table 2 4 page 2 5 and demonstrate crew coordination and airspace surveillance proficiency An X in the N column of table 2 4 page 2 5 identifies night tasks required for qualification training Flight hour requirements for aircraft qualification training are based on individual crewmember proficiency The flight time shown in table A 2 may be used as a guide Total flight training for aircraft qualification will not be less than 10 hours Table A 3 page A 3 may be used as a guide for flight time allotted during each training day Table A 2 Guide for flight training of nonrated crewmembers 1 A minimum of one hour will be at night 3 The evaluation may be a continual evaluation Flight Instruction Flying Hours Base tasks 8 0 Emeraency procedures 2 0 Evaluation 3 0 Total hours 13 0 Notes 2 Emergency procedures are required in each mode of flight TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Non Rated Crewmmeber and Trainer Training and Qualification Table A 3 Guide for flight training sequence Flight Training Sequence Training day 1 2 3 4 5 Daily 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 0E Cumulative time 2 5 5 0 7 5 10 130 Note The denotes night flight and E denotes evaluation
123. unless landing can be accomplished per AR 95 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Each RCM will review the approach to be flown before initiating the procedure The crew will confirm that the correct NAVAID communication frequencies and systems are configured correctly b The P will focus primarily inside the aircraft on the instruments and perform the approach The P will follow the heading course altitude and missed approach directives issued by the P ATC The P will announce any deviation not directed by ATC or the P and acknowledge all navigation directives given by the P c The P will call out the approach procedure to the P and advise the P of any unannounced deviations d The P will call out the approach procedure to the P and advise the P of any unannounces deviations e The P will e Monitor outside for the landing environment e Announce when he or she makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing IAW AR 95 1 e If directed by the P take the controls to complete the landing e Announce if he or she does not make visual contact by the MAP and call out the missed approach procedures f During simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles The NCM will take a position on the P side of the aircraft 2 Procedures Perform the desired approach procedures IAW AR 95 1 the DOD FLIP FM 3 04 240 TM 1 1520 240 10 and TM 1 1520 271 10
124. up crew clear right Forward Hook up crew clear left Back Sling s coming tight Left Sling s tight Right Load s is off the ground Down Cleared for flight Up Load s on ground Hold fwd aft up and down Slack in the sling s Pole in hand Release the load s Clevis on pole Load s is are released Hook in hand Clear to reposition Load s is are hooked Cargo hook master switch is OFF Hook up and HVR 1 The P will set cargo hook control switch in the ALL position and place the cargo hook switch in the ARM position The P may place the radio switches on the P ICS OFF as directed by P 2 The P will announce when the load s is under the nose of the aircraft or when he or she loses sight of the load s The NCM will use HOTMIC hot microphone and will inform the P that he or she will be going on HOTMIC The P will follow hand signals from the signalman and commands from the NCM to HVR over the load s The P will remain vertically clear of and centered over the load s 3 When the load s is hooked the NCM will inform the P that the load s is hooked remove slack from the sling s and ascend vertically to a stabilized load s height of 10 feet 4 Ifthe NCM is using HOTMIC the NMC will inform the P that he or she is going off HOTMIC 5 Ifa ground crew is used for the hook up the NCM will advise the P when and
125. using radio communication procedures and phraseology IAW the AIM DOD FLIP and Department of Transportation DOT FAA Order 7110 65 c Operate intercommunication INTERCOMM system d Perform or describe two way radio failure procedures AW the DOD FLIP or host country regulations 2 NCMs a Operate INTERCOMM system b Use the appropriate radio internal communication system ICS with the desired facility as required for NCMs DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will determine radio frequencies IAW mission requirements during the crew briefing and will indicate whether the P or the P will establish and maintain primary communications b The P will announce information not monitored by the P c The P will adjust avionics to required frequencies The P will copy pertinent information and announce information not monitored by the P d During normal operations the NCM will monitor external communications to prevent interruption when external communications are transmitted or received Monitoring external communications may not be desirable during operations requiring extensive internal communication for example external sling load s hoist winch operation or emergencies e Crew actions for two way radio failure are as follows 1 P or P will announce two way radio failure to all crewmembers 2 The PC will direct the efforts to identify and correct the avionics malfunction 3 The P will focus outside the aircraft during VM
126. water release 1 Altitude and airspeed affect the dump pattern It is most concentrated at lower altitudes AGL and at a HVR The pattern will spread with altitude and speed The PC will determine the most appropriate height and speed for the pattern desired or AW the mission briefing TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Evaluation of the fire should include wind direction velocity terrain and type of fire Fires usually require a drop height of 100 to 200 feet AGL and a ground speed of 30 to 60 KTS 3 The aircraft s ground track should be upwind and adjusted so the spray will provide MAX cooling to hot spots as well as dampen unburned vegetation Altitude and airspeed may be adjusted for fires of varying intensity and types However it must be noted that low slow passes may tend to increase the fire s intensity due to rotor down wash 4 When the approach angle is intercepted decrease the thrust control to establish the descent When passing below 300 feet AGL place cargo hook master switch in the ARM position When reaching the desired airspeed and altitude the recommended crew coordination terms for bucket operations are as follows a Approaching the target PREPARE TO OPEN THE DOORS approximately 10 seconds out b Over the target OPEN DOORS c When the drop is complete CLOSE DOORS Note The NCM will advise the P of the condition of the bucket and call out the water level whi
127. when VMC inside when IMC e Avoid traffic and obstacles 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 7 Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Sample aircrew briefing checklist e Cross check system and instruments e Monitor transmit on radio s as directed by the PC b P e Assist in traffic and obstacle avoidance e Tune radios and set transponder e Navigate and F perform crew station mission management e Copy clearances automated terminal information service and other information e Cross check system and instruments e Monitor transmit on radio s as directed by the PC e Read and complete CL items as required e Announce when focused inside c FE CE and other assigned crewmembers e Complete passenger brief e Secure passengers and cargo e Assist in traffic and obstacle clearance e Perform other duties assigned by the PC 12 Crew level after action review AAR Time and location 13 Crewmembers questions comments and acknowledgment of mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions a A designated briefing officer will provide a thorough and detailed mission brief to the PC IAW AR 95 1 The PC will acknowledge a complete understanding of the mission brief and initial DA Form 5484 b The PC has overall responsibility for the crew mission briefing The PC may direct other crewmembers to perform all or part of the brief c Crewmembers will direct their attention to the crewmember conducting the briefing They will addres
128. when they meet the criteria of TC 3 04 11 DACs will receive mission task training IAW their job title a Training requirements 1 Mission training Mission training programs help RL 2 crew members develop the ability to perform specific tasks selected by the commander to support the unit s METL a Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed in paragraphs 3 4b 8 and 9 b Flight training The training will consist of those mission tasks in table 2 5 page 2 7 as selected by the commander and additional tasks necessary to complete the unit s mission This training may be conducted by a UT The crewmember will receive training from all designated crew station s A task that may be performed from either crew station does not need to be evaluated from both stations Flight mission training hour requirements are based on demonstrated proficiency The evaluation must be conducted by a SP IP SI or FI and may be continuous 2 NVG mission training NVG mission training will be IAW the commander s training program TC 3 04 11 and this ATM When commanders determine a requirement for using NVG in mission profiles they must develop a mission training program and specify mission additional NVG tasks as required to support the unit s METL Before undergoing NVG mission training the RCM must complete qualification or refresher training RL 3 base tasks from table 2 5 pa
129. will initiate the turn to downwind as required to maintain the desired ground track The P will adjust the thrust control and cyclic as required to maintain traffic pattern altitude and airspeed h Before landing check The P will perform the before landing check before turning base and announce when it is completed NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and should concentrate on obstacle avoidance and aircraft control The P will make all internal cockpit checks 2 For NVG training in the traffic pattern the recommended MAX airspeed is 100 KIAS KCAS and the recommended MAX bank angle is 30 degrees TRAINING CONSIDERATIONS For traffic pattern training the recommended airspeed is 70 KIAS KCAS and a 500 FPM R C or descent on crosswind and base legs and 100 KIAS KCAS on the downwind leg TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 69 Chapter 4 TASK 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach CAUTION Landings to the ground will be accomplished with the ramp in the full up position unless internal cargo loading prohibits or if tactical situation dictates If landing with the ramp in other than the full up position caution must be exercised by the crew to avoid ramp cont
130. with the UP DOWN switch on the thrust control and heading with pedals as necessary 6 Upon approaching the desired termination point begin decelerating so as to arrive in a stabilized HVR using primarily acceleration cue and velocity vector 7 When performing hovering flight without symbology and little to no visual references accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed that will keep the snow sand dust cloud just aft of the cabin door Note Maintain optimum visibility by observing references close to the aircraft Exercise caution when operating in close proximity to other aircraft or obstacles Note When visual references deteriorate and or crew is unaware of potential obstacles that make a 10 foot HVR taxi unsafe determine whether to abort the maneuver and ground taxi air taxi or perform an ITO Task 1170 Note Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO Task 1170 or unusual attitude recovery Task 1182 if ground reference is lost CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS All crewmembers must be focused primarily outside for obstacle avoidance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 59 Chapter 4 TASK 1040
131. 0 KIAS KCAS not less than 1 000 feet AGL and recover not less than 200 feet AGL Note During this maneuver airspeed will increase rapidly Ensure airspeed does not exceed Vye by initiating a recovery prior to the limit NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 Rapid evasive maneuvers will be more hazardous due to division of attention limited visibility and aircraft limitations Be particularly aware of aircraft altitude and three dimensional position in relation to threat obstacles and terrain Proper sequence and timing is critical in that the P must announce intentions prior to initiating maneuvers that might cause spatial disorientation Select a reference point to maintain orientation on threat or friendly troops to aid in maintaining SA Reference points may be acquired by selecting a GPS reference point or prominent terrain feature 2 As airspeed increases altitude above the obstacles should also increase Bank angle s should be commensurate with ambient light and altitude above the terrain High bank angles will result in an inaccurate readout from the RAD ALT and therefore is not reliable Use of NVGs without HUD symbology display will require greater crew coordination to monitor TQ airspeed trim and rates of descent information not present with NVGs only Note While performing combat maneuvering flight visual contact with other aircraft in the formation may be lost due to maneuvering or reduced visibility If this oc
132. 00 328 23 Technical Manual Aeronautical Equipment Maintenance Management Policies and Procedures 30 July 1999 TM 1 1520 240 23 amp P Interactive Electronic Technical Manual Field Maintenance for Helicopter Cargo Transport CH 47D Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List NSN 1520 01 088 3669 EIC RCD 20 December 2011 TM 1 2840 265 23 amp P Interactive Electronic Technical Manuals IETM For Field Maintenance For For Engine Gas Turbine Model T55 GA 714A Including Repair Parts And Special Tools List NSN 2840 01 458 5361 10 February 2012 TM 1 6625 724 13 amp P Operator s Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Test Set Aviation Vibration Analyzer AVA with Version 7 01 NSN 6625 01 282 3746 07 March 2002 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 References 1 References TM 9 1005 224 10 Operator s Manual for Machine Gun 7 62 MM M60 W E NSN 1005 00 605 7710 EIC 4AJ and Machine Gun 7 62 MM M60D W E NSN 1005 00 909 3002 EIC 4A8 TO 11W2 6 3 1 02 April 1998 TM 9 1005 262 13 Operators Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual for Armament Subsystem Helicopter 7 62 MM Machine Gun Mounts Door Mounted Lightweight Model M23 P N 11691604 NSN 1005 00 907 0720 Door Mounted Lightweight Model M24 P N 11691606 NSN 1005 00 763 1404 Ramp Mounted Lightweight Model M41 P N 8436598 NSN 1005 00 087 2046 and Window Mounted Lightweigh
133. 1 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew briefing b Ensure that the aircraft is configured for ladder operations c Ensure that the ladder is inspected serviceable and secured to the aircraft cabin floor d MAX airspeed with ladder deployed is 60 KIAS KCAS with personnel attached to the ladder and 40 KIAS KCAS with no personnel attached e Maintain appropriate HVR altitude 5 feet f Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended HVR point NCM Configured for ladder operations inspect and install a serviceable ladder to the cabin floor Advise the P when the survivors are in sight Inform the PIs when the ladder is being deployed recovered Direct the P to a stabilized HVR over the survivors Deploy light markers as required mone sp Deploy ladder extract survivor s and secure ladder equipment DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with ladder operations EMERG and communication procedures The PC will ensure that the aircraft is rigged b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to ensure aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over the target with corrections from the P and NCM as required c The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles
134. 1 1520 240 CL and TM 1 1520 271 CL b Perform appropriate EP c Select confirm the suitability of the landing area if required NCM a Recognize announce and analyze indications of an EMERG Perform or describe all immediate action EMERG checks IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL and TM 1 1520 271 CL b Perform appropriate EP c Prepare the aircraft and passengers for an EMERG landing d Assist in confirming the suitability of the landing area if required e Assist in evacuating passengers to designated assembly area DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions Any crewmember detecting an EMERG will immediately announce the EMERG to the other crewmembers If time permits the RCMs will lock shoulder harnesses make a mayday call and tune the transponder to EMERG as appropriate 2 a The crew will perform the underlined and non underlined steps as applicable IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL and initiate the appropriate type of landing if required 1 During VMC the P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to maintain aircraft control and obstacle clearance 2 During IMC the P will remain focused inside the aircraft on the flight instruments to maintain aircraft control 3 If time permits RCMs will also lock shoulder harnesses make a mayday call and tune transponder to EMERG as required b If time permits the P will verify all EMERG checks with the appropriate operator s manual
135. 1 and FADEC 2 cautions 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS This EP can be performed in the aircraft by a DES trained SP IP or ME at USAACE EAATS or other DA approved training sites and by DES trained instructors DES trained instructors may train other instructors who then may perform this task 2 CH47D F Special training required 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or place the PRI REV switches to the REV position i REV 1 and or REV 2 cautions without FADEC cautions 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications j REV 1 and or REV 2 cautions with FADEC cautions 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications k TQ measuring system malfunction 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or demonstrated by pulling the DC TQ CB CH 47D A 5 or CH 47F A 20 1 ENG XSMN clutch failure to engage 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications m ENG shutdown complete electrical failure 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Verbally describe the
136. 10 feet 4 Hook authority a Normal release Rests with PC but normally is released by the NCM b EMERG Release Rests with PC PC will determine when the load s will be jettisoned based on aircraft performance The NCM at the load s must jettison the load s if it will endanger the crew or aircraft Load s jettisons will be announced to the aircrew 5 ICS Failure between RCM and NCM two challenge rule a Before load s is hooked slack in sling s NCM opens hook with normal release b After slings tight load s is airborne NCM with communication will notify crew and call the load s down c Between Pls PI with communication takes flight controls d Two challenge rule If any RCM or NCM identifies a potential hazard that crew member will call out the hazard and a corrective action If the P does not respond after a second call out then it is the responsibility of the P to announce I have the FLIGHT CONTROLS and make the appropriate corrective action 6 Aircrew comments and acknowledges briefing 2 Procedures Refer to table 4 4 page 4 79 for words and phrases that may be used for external sling load s operations 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 79 Chapter 4 4 80 a Table 4 4 Words and phrases for external sling load s operations Cargo hook master switch is ARMED Aft hook is loaded forward hook is loaded Load s under the nose MID hook is loading Load s in sight Hook
137. 180 Perform emergency global positioning system recovery procedure 4 103 Task 1182 Perform unusual attitude recovery eect eeeeee ee eene nese enneeeeee teaser tnaeeeees 4 105 Task 1184 Respond to inadvertent instrument meteorological conditions c 4 107 Task 1188 Operate aircraft survivability equipment cceecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteteenaees 4 109 Task 1190 Perform identify hand and arm Signals ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeettieeeeeetteeeeees 4 111 Task 1194 Perform refueling Operations cc ececeeeeeeeeeetee seer tennessee seeeeetieeeeetneeeees 4 112 Task 1200 Perform nonrated crewmember duties during a maintenance test flight 4 113 Task 1202 Perform auxiliary power unit operations eccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseaeees 4 115 Task 1253 g Operate common avionics architecture system control display unit multi TUNCtION CIS Play aiie siseseeretined erat E AE TAA OTET 4 117 Task 1260 g Operate digital map cccccceceeeeenee cece eeeeeeeenaaeceeeeeeeseeeeccueaeeeeeeeeeteenaees 4 118 Task 1262 Participate in a crew level after action review cccccceeeeseeceeeeeeeseeseeeees 4 119 Task 1402 Perform tactical flight mission planning cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeettieeeeeetteeeeees 4 121 Task 1404 Perform electronic countermeasures electronic counter countermeasures DPIOCEdUIreS singh aie a ae ns enna ea 4 123 Task 1406 Perform terrain fligh
138. 2 Procedures a Perform or describe preflight inspection turn on test operation EPs and shutdown of installed ASE equipment Evaluate and interpret the ASE visual and aural indications 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 109 Chapter 4 b Execute mission employment IAW doctrine and determine failure alternatives TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references computer base aircraft survivability equipment trainer CBAT aircraft survivability equipment trainer ASET programs CMWS or variant ASE operator s manual s and unit battalion brigade level intelligence staff officer S 2 officer tactical operations TACOPS officer 4 110 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1190 Perform Identify Hand and Arm Signals CONDITIONS Given a list of hand and arm signals from FM 21 60 to identify or perform STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM Identify or perform at a minimum the hand and arm signals required for moving an aircraft left right forward or backward and those for takeoff landing external sling load s hooked and release sling load s as appropriate AW FM 21 60 2 NCM Identify or perform at a minimum the hand and arm signals required for moving an aircraft left r
139. 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 2079 Perform Amphibious Craft Recovery Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with water operation brief complete and all drain plugs removed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Ensure that water operations briefing is completed to include a review of mission related EPs b Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for water operations IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and that the static line is installed During ramp down operations remove the ramp drain plugs c Observe water operation limitations IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 or TM 1 1520 271 10 d Do not exceed ground control limitations e Maintain HVR altitude 15 feet 5 feet above the water 2 NCM a Configure the aircraft for water operations IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 or TM 1 1520 271 10 b Assist the PIs in a reconnaissance of the intended landing area c Clear the aircraft during landing and takeoff d Advise the PIs before the water reaches fuselage station 400 e Perform crew coordination actions f Enter appropriate information on the DA Form 2408 13 and ensure that required inspections and servicing are completed IAW TM 10 1520 240 23 1 and TM 10 1520 271 23 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure that all personnel are familiar with aircraft safety and EPs IAW the unit s SOP b The P should make
140. 3 TC 3 04 34 4 163 Chapter 4 lifting the patient off the ground using the hoist or aircraft The PC will also ensure that all crewmembers understand CUT CABLE procedures 2 The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to ensure aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of HVR and remain centered over the target incorporating corrections from the NCM 3 The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles The P and NCM will also assist the P in maintaining a stable HVR by providing the P with information regarding the drift of the aircraft The P will also monitor cockpit indications The P will be able to operate the control panel for the rescue hoist if necessary 4 The NCM will ensure that the hoist is configured and will ensure that all lifting devices such as jungle penetrator SKED stokes litter and survivor s slings are secured in the aircraft before takeoff 5 The NCM will ensure that the winch is configured for rescue hoist operations and the appropriate write up is entered on DA Form 2408 13 1 for the MID hook being removed AW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 6 The NCM will conduct the hoist operation IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 CL and the unit SOP Cargo winch operations 1 The NCM will ensure that the winch is configured for rescue hoist operations and the
141. 5 01 350 0349 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 1 5855 01 424 2284 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 2 5855 01 424 2285 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 3 EIC N A 5855 01 424 2286 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 4 5855 01 424 2287 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 5 5855 01 447 1071 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 6 5855 01 447 1887 EIC N A 01 December 1997 TM 11 5895 1199 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for the Mark XII IFF System 01 July 1984 TM 38 250 Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments AFMAN 24 204 NAVSUP PUB 505 MCO P4030 191 DLAI 4145 3 DCMAD1 CH3 4 HM24 01 September 2009 TM 55 1560 307 13 amp P Operator Aviation Unit and Aviation Interediate Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and special Tools Lost for Extended Range Fuel System Army Model CH 47 Helicopter Part Number 855DSCC D 0007 2 NSN 1560 01 221 7600 Including C1 amp C2 11 December 1990 TM 55 1680 317 23 amp P Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Army Aircraft Survival Kits Includes C1 C9 26 March 1987 TM 55 1680 351 10 Operator s Manual for SRU 21 P Army Vest Survival NSN 8465 00 177 4819 Large 8465 01 174 2355 Small Includes C1 C3 22 April 1987 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FORMS DA Form 759 Individual Flight Record and Flight Certificate Army References 4 TC 3
142. 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 117 Chapter 4 TASK 1260 i Operate Digital Map CONDITIONS In a CH 47F helicopter with an operational MFD and the appropriate navigational maps loaded STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the following additions modifications 1 Operate bezel keys on the MFD to select desired map configuration overlays and orientation 2 Operate the multi function control unit to gain desired information and to manipulate desired mission data on the digital map display DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will primarily remain focused outside the aircraft b The P will primarily perform digital map operations 2 Procedures a Select appropriate type of map for display b Select desired viewing range and scale c Select appropriate type of overlay for the tactical situation NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Ensure MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for day night or NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 118 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1262 Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review CONDITIONS After flight in a CH 47D F helicopter and given a unit approved crew level AAR CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications
143. 72 CRUISE FUEL FLOW SE no LOAD Using the SE fuel flow chart and the TQ value listed in item 68 record the predicted fuel flow The baseline is 0 degrees C therefore increase or decrease this fuel flow by percent for every 10 degrees C TEMP change from the baseline TEMP Item 73 CRUISE FUEL FLOW SE with a LOAD Using the SE fuel flow chart and the TQ value listed in item 69 record the predicted fuel flow Increase or decrease this fuel flow by 1 percent for every 10 degrees C TEMP change from the baseline TEMP Item 74 MIN SE AIRSPEED no LOAD Minimum SE IAS is used to determine the minimum airspeed that will allow continued SE operations Using the appropriate cruise chart enter the chart at 50 percent of the computed contingency TQ AVAIL for cruise conditions Move vertically to the first intersection of the actual GWT line If the intersection is below the MAX R C and END airspeed line record the airspeed that will allow continued SE operation If the TQ line is to the left of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line enter UA for the minimum airspeed When the TQ line is to the right of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line below the MAX R C and END airspeed line enter OGE for the minimum airspeed that will allow continued SE operation Item 75 MIN SE AIRSPEED with a LOAD Refer to item 74 for definition Using the appropriate cruise chart enter the chart at 50 percent of the computed conti
144. A calculation formula 8 The procedures diagram figure 4 8 page 4 143 The procedure diagram may be computer generated or hand sketched The diagram need not be as detailed as a DOD approved chart but must provide all data as outlined in the example to execute the procedure 4 142 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks F co 159 Avn Regt Date Developed 5 Jan 05 Expire 5 Jan 06 Date Developed Expire APCH CRS RWY HOG 330 COPTER GPS RECOVERY 330 APCH CRS 330 APTELE _289 Chinook Landing Zone Remarks Missed Approach Climb straight Remarks ahead to 3500 direct EAD WP and hold APP CON TWR GND 125 4 365 4 48 500 126 2 316 0 121 9 254 5 FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY GPS PPS REQUIRED FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY GPS PPS REQUIRED USE ONLY USE ONLY ASE 7 e WPMAP 239 WPFAF MSA 30 NM WPMAP pnm MSA 30 NM 3500 D FOR VFR TRAINING AND FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY USE ONLY EMERGENCY USE ONLY WPFAF WRIFO 330 TO LZ CHINOOK CATEGORY COPTER COPTER INAV MDA 600 320 Developed by Date Signed Developed by Date Signed Fit Checked by Date Signed Fit Checked by Date Signed Approved by Date Signed Approved by Date Signed IF WPIFO N09 23 40 W 100 00 06 FAF WPFAF N09 23 45 W 100 01 06 MAP WPMAP N0923 50 W 100 02 06 MAHF WMAHF N09 24 15 W 100 03 50 IAP1 WPIA1 N09 23 10 W 100 01 03 IAP2 WPIA2 N09 23 10 W 100 01 03
145. AVAIL 10 MIN The MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN is used to represent the MAX 10 MIN TQ output or the MAX 10 MIN limit for PWR turbine inlet TEMP PTIT that both ENGs can produce under the forecasted conditions A value less than 100 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit will be reached prior to exceeding the DUAL ENG TQ limit A value greater than 100 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit should not be reached prior to reaching the MAX DUAL ENG TQ limit If the calculated value is greater than 100 percent TQ a value of 100 percent will be entered into the block IAW the DUAL ENG TQ limit stated in the appropriate operator s manual This represents a combining XMSN limit the ENGs may produce PWR in excess of the combining XMSN limit It is possible that with a calculated value of 100 percent the ENG could reach both limits PTIT and DUAL ENG TQ Using the MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN chart and the forecast conditions at departure record the MAX 10 MIN TQ limit AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Item 10 MAX TQ AVAIL SE The MAX TQ AVAIL SE is used to represent the MAX SE TQ or the MAX SE contingency PWR PTIT output that one ENG can produce under the forecasted conditions A value less than 123 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit will be reached prior to exceeding the SE TQ limit A value greater than 123 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit should not be reached prior to reaching the MAX SE TQ limit If the calculated value is greater than 123 percent TQ a v
146. AX SE TQ limit If the calculated value is greater than 123 percent TQ a value of 123cpercent will be entered into the block IAW the SE TQ limit stated in the appropriate operator s manual It is possible that with a calculated value of 123 percent the ENG could reach both limits PTIT and SE TQ Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast conditions at time of departure record CONT TQ AVAIL for SE operation If the SE XMSN TQ limit line is reached before the planned PA enter 123 percent Refer to item 12 Note The procedure for calculating items 14 thru 29 apply to both NO LOAD and WITH LOAD Item 14 15 MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN IGE OGE no LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at a desired IGE OGE wheel height no LOAD using the MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart Using the GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at departure enter the top chart structural limit at the FAT and read down to PA Move horizontally to the left to the MAX structural GWT and note the WT Then re enter the top chart at the FAT and read down to PA on the bottom chart ENG PWR AVAIL Move horizontally to the right to read MAX IGE GWT for the desired wheel height To calculate OGE value re enter the top chart at the FAT and read down to PA on the bottom chart ENG PWR AVAIL Move horizontally to the left to read MAX OGE GWT for the desired wheel height Record the m
147. August 2009 TM 1 1520 240 10 Operator s Manual for Army CH 47D Helicopter EIC RCD 22 February 2011 TM 1 1520 240 CL Operator s and Crewmember s Checklist for Army CH 47D Helicopter 22 February 2011 TM 1 1520 240 MTF Maintenance Test Flight Manual for Army Model CH 47D Helicopter 22 February 2011 TM 1 1520 240 PMS1 Preventative Maintenance Services Modular Daily Inspection Checklist CH 47D Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 240 PMS2 Preventative Maintenance Services Cycle Service Program Intermediate Inspection CH 47D Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 240 PMS3 Preventative Maintenance Services Cycle Service Program Inspection CH 47D Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 240 PMS4 Preventative Maintenance Services Corrosion Prevention for CH 47D Helicopter 01 September 2011 TM 1 1520 271 10 Operator s Manual for Army CH 47F Helicopter EIC 31 October 2011 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 References 3 References TM 1 1520 271 CL Operator s and Crewmember s Checklist for Army CH 47F Helicopter 31 October 2011 TM 1 1520 271 MTF Maintenance Test Flight Manual for Army Model CH 47F Helicopter 31 October 2011 TM 1 1520 271 PMS1 Preventative Maintenance Services Modular Daily Inspection Checklist CH 47F Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 271 PMS2 Preventative Maintenance Services Cycle Service Program Intermediate Inspection CH 47F Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 271 PMS3
148. C or inside IMC on the instruments as appropriate but should not participate in troubleshooting the malfunction 4 The P will remain focused primarily inside the aircraft to identify and correct the avionics malfunction The other crewmembers must remain primarily focused outside the aircraft in order to maintain the P scan f Crew actions for aircraft INTERCOMM failure 1 The PC will direct assistance from the crew to determine the malfunction and corrective action Alternate actions may include switching to a different ICS box changing microphone cords if available hooking up to a different ICS station hand and arm signals or passing notes 2 Ifthe problem cannot be corrected the PC will determine the course of action which may vary from landing as soon as practical to landing as soon as possible 2 Procedures a Adjust avionics to the required frequencies Continuously monitor the avionics as directed by the PC 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 49 Chapter 4 1 When required establish communications with the desired facility 2 Monitor the frequency before transmitting Transmit the desired required information Use the correct radio call sign when acknowledging each communication 3 When advised to change frequencies acknowledge instructions Select the new frequency as soon as possible unless instructed to do so at a specific time fix or altitude 4 Use radio communication procedures and phraseology as appropriate for
149. CE is clear to reposition to check the maintenance panel for proper indications and APU area for leaks After the second ENG is stabilized at ground idle the aft CE must reposition to check the maintenance panel for proper indications and APU area for leaks prior to repositioning to clear ENGs to flight Note 4 If flight has two NCMs the aft NCM will call Ramp UP and forward NCM will call Cabin Door Secure If the flight only has one NCM the aft NCM will make both calls Note 5 If the flight has two NCMs the aft NCM will call Aft Ready and the forward NCM will call Forward Ready If the flight has one NCM the aft NCM will call Aft Ready f Table 6 6 is an example of CH 47F call and response terminology Table 6 6 CH 47F NCM call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks Before Starting Engines BATT SwichON AlstatonscheckinwihtnePC CS TROOP WARN ALARM and Two bells two red two green Forward CE confirms when not visible from JUMP LTS As required ramp verbal call only when not operational Fire guard Posted Posted at the APU Ramp CE confirms that the UTIL HYD ACCUMs are fully charged before posting at the APU area APU Start APU clear to start Ramp CE monitors the APU for any abnormal condition or fire positioned by the EMERG fluid shut off valve with access door open during the entire APU start sequence APU GEN Switch ON Ramp CE checks UTIL HY
150. CES Appropriate common references ASET and FM 34 25 7 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 135 Chapter 4 TASK 2010 Perform Multi Aircraft Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the mission briefing completed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications RCM 1 mo aogs pe Participate in a formation flight briefing IAW unit SOP Correctly perform takeoff join up and or landing in formation Correctly perform formation changes when required Maintain proper separation for the type of formation flight being conducted If visual contact is lost properly execute briefed loss of visual contact inflight link up procedures Perform techniques of movement if required NCM a b Assume a position in the helicopter as briefed to observe other aircraft in the formation Announce if visual contact is lost with other aircraft DESCRIPTION 1 4 136 Crew actions a Note The most important consideration when an aircraft has lost visual contact with the formation is to announce loss of visual contact to the other members of the crew and the rest of the flight and reorient Except for enemy contact all mission requirements are subordinate to this action The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft for clearing and tracking other aircraft The P will announce any maneuver or movement before execution and inform the P and NCM if visual contact is lost with
151. Calls over target Open bucket doors COIN OD A R wWl hM 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 151 Chapter 4 4 NCMs Respond Bucket doors open bucket is 4 bucket empty Note Water bucket doors are opened or closed depending on bucket type and clear for flight as required Landing 1 Normal load approach 2 Clear bucket to ground 3 Clear to slide direction away from load 4 Release the slings and disconnect electrical lines 5 Recover bucket and secure in aircraft Emergency procedures 1 Open the bucket if necessary 2 Call bucket open bucket empty 3 Jettison the load if necessary 4 Call load jettisoned 5 Hook operations Normal and EMERG 6 Lost communication procedures g Post mission Ensure that water bucket is serviceable de rig aircraft and water bucket and ensure that all documentation is complete on water bucket usage and inspection SAND DUST SMOKE CONSIDERATIONS If during the approach visual reference with the water release area or obstacles is lost immediately initiate a go around or ITO as required Be prepared to transition to instruments Once VMC is regained continue with the go around If required releasing the water reduces the GWT of the aircraft and minimizes PWR demand MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS If at any time during an approach if sufficien
152. D PRESS is within normal range and insures the cargo ramp is not touching the ground prior to ENG start PWR XFER 1 and 2 Ramp CE confirms PRESS are within normal switches ON ranges Maintenance Panel Check PRESS and TEMPs are normal Ramp CE places and holds the TEST going to test all PWR train and HYD RESET switch to TEST until the Pls confirm lights indicated going to reset the proper indications Debris chips hots Maintenance panel is operational and two master caution lights and checks all Refer to Note 1 the maintenance panel PWR train and HYD lights before stating test results Anti lce Check as required WARNING CE takes one flight glove off and feels for the Pitot heat can cause severe burns Presence of heat on three pitot static tubes Ensure the Pls turn off the pitot and four AFCS DAFCS yaw ports heat when done Pitot and yaw port heat operational External lights Check as White light or IR light is on Forward and aft CE As applicable observes required extending 45 degrees bright dim the operation of the search lights position off as required Left right and aft lights and anti collision lights position light operational If required Upper and lower anti collision lights operational As required Rotor blades Check position Clear of the tunnel area Aft CE confirms that the position of the rotor blades is not within 30 degrees of aircraft centerline Flight control travel and PRESS is normal
153. FARP equipment is loaded and secured in the aircraft FM 3 04 111 or TM 1 1560 312 10 7 Fuel will be transferred from the internal tanks in the same order as if the tanks were being self deployed To maintain the aircraft s CG the fuel transfer sequence will be 3 1 2 Preflight inspection 1 Requirements are found in FM 3 04 111 appendix J and table J 8 2 The FARP CL is found in FM 3 04 111 appendix J and table J 12 3 These are the minimum inspections and procedures that will be accomplished during FARP operations and further instructions will be found in unit SOPs Preflight 1 After receiving a mission briefing ensure that required fuel and ammunition is on hand Ensure that it is installed secured inventoried and operational before flight IAW the units SOP 2 Conduct a thorough crew and support team briefing covering as a minimum landing direction frequencies and call signs EPs execution security set up refuel rearm and recovery dispersal plan alternate setup location site layout and load s Arrival 1 The designated primary rearming refueling aircraft will set up first 2 The secondary rearming refueling aircraft will carry a duplicate 2 point FARE for back up The secondary aircraft will loiter outside the weapons surface danger area and no closer than 150 feet from the rearm refuel site 3 The security team will immediately establish perimeter defense as briefed The site layout and FARE sy
154. HVR for internal load s and conducted approximately at a 40 foot wheel height HVR for external sling load s Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the predicted TQ required to HVR at an IGE height that will place the load s approximately 10 feet AGL for external sling load s or IGE for internal load s Item 33 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE DUAL ENG with a LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height OGE conducted at an 80 foot wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at takeoff record the predicted TQ required to HVR OGE Item 34 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE SE no LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR with a SE at the desired wheel height IGE usually conducted at a 10 foot wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height IGE Compare to SE contingency TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVAIL item 10 to determine if sufficient PWR is AVAIL to HVR SE at the appropriate wheel height Note For TEMPs below 0 degrees C double the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT value DUAL ENG and add the derived value to the predicted HVR TQ value SE This value will be added to all predicted HVR SE calculations Item 35 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE SE no LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR with a SE at the desired wheel height OGE usually conducted at an 80 foo
155. IAW the appropriate manuals d Each crewmember will ensure that all safety and operational procedures are conducted IAW TM 1 1560 312 10 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS If time permits accomplish servicing and preflight inspections during daylight hours During the hours of darkness use a flashlight with an unfiltered lens to supplement available lighting HYD leaks oil leaks and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 04 111 FM 10 67 1 IETM EM 0199 TM 1 1520 240 PMD TM 1 1520 271 PMD and TM 1 1560 312 10 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 169 Chapter 4 TASK 2068 Perform Shipboard Operations WARNING Do not move the cyclic with the pitch and roll of the ship Do not allow the rotor to dip down to a low position as it could be fatal to deck crews and those exiting the aircraft CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and the appropriate joint publication JP reference STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 2 RCM a Comply with arrival and departure and landing signal enlisted LSE controller instructions b Set parking brakes before landing c Ensure a green deck before landing NCM a Ensure landing gear wheels is cleared on deck
156. IL for cruise conditions Move vertically to the intersection of the actual GWT line above the MAX R C and END airspeed line Record the MAX airspeed that will allow continued SE operation If the TQ line is to the left of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line enter N A for the MAX airspeed Note The effect of drag on an external drag is not accounted for in item 68 Item 78 MAX GWT SE The MAX GWT SE value will give you the MAX allowable GWT that will sustain SE flight at the planned cruise PA to be flown for the mission Using the SE service ceiling chart in the appropriate operator s manual chapter 9 record the MAX allowable GWT that will allow sustained SE flight at the planned cruise PA to be flown for the mission This value is based on MAX END R C airspeed at the MAX allowable GWT derived from the chart Item 79 SINGLE ENG SERVICE CEILING SESC no LOAD The SESC value will give you the MAX altitude that will be able to sustain SE flight at the planned cruise FAT and GWT Using the SESC chart in Chapter 9 of the appropriate operator s manual record the MAX altitude attainable that will allow sustained SE flight using the actual aircraft GWT and forecast conditions Item 80 SESC with a LOAD Refer to item 79 for definition Using the SESC chart in Chapter 9 of the appropriate operator s manual record the MAX altitude attainable that will allow sustained SE flight using the actual aircraft GWT and forecast co
157. INING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 15 Chapter 5 TASK 4236 Perform Autorotation Revolutions per Minute Check CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the applicable MTF manual CL with all required inflight checks complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Re brief the RCM just before the maneuver As a minimum include the thrust positions of ground detent thrust control to the floor relaxed position and power recovery 2 Select a suitable autorotation area that will permit a safe descent and EMERG touchdown straight in landing into the prevailing wind 3 Accomplish the PWR recovery prior to 1 000 feet AGL 4 Readings will be taken in a stabilized autorotational glide at 80 5 KIAS KCAS in trim with thrust control full down S 6 The MP will MAN the thrust control and FADEC RPM switch throughout the maneuver Throughout this maneuver the NCMs will be seated with seat belts fastened DESCRIPTION 5 16 1 Crew actions a Prior to the maneuver the MP will re brief the RCM on the maneuver especially the required thrust positions of ground detent thrust control to the floor relax pressure and power recovery The RCM will be at the flight c
158. L M OL EZ6ON LYIdM Ld OS 0 00L M 1 260N AHYWM AHY 90 Z0 00L M 0S EZ60N dYNdM dYIN 90 L0 00L M SP EZ6ON AYddM sv 90 00 00 M Or EZ 60N _OdlaM HI poubis aad Aq peanosddy paubis apq Aq p yo y9 HA poubis C CHCQC lt CWSNNNNN AQ ipadojanaq YaldOO ANODSLV9 MOONIHO Z1 ee E a OL 0 Ay A se a 08 SZOL ape Oz Raa x a dVWdM o aea A GALYAANI SkA OdldM 4vdam J AHVIA 682 A373 oose XINO ASN AONSDYAWA ONY ONINIVYL HSA 404 NO9 ddV AINO 3SN AONJ9YINI ANY NINIVYHL YA YO 4 WN 0 VSW SILY J13 ldV 3ZzaL DH AMY SYJeW yY SH HOdV padojeneg ajeq yun pie AINO ASN AONIOYINI i ONY ONINIVYL Y4A HOS D Ow 328 cose wus dYNdM WN O YSN aF O Zid iskosa Ooo y a RB oS y AVAdM Oon ggg R AVN oon A UQES Sus sz EA AINO 3SN GAYINDAY Sdd Sdo AON3J9YJNWI ANY ONINIVYL Y4A YOS S HSZ BLZL OOLE 29cb 00S 8h PSE PSeL SSL aN YML NO9 ddV SILY PIOY pue dM ay43 9911p 009 0 pe ye yyf iens quia yoeosddy passi SMIBLUOY uoz Bulpueq yoouryg 68 Flaldv OLE OES AYJAODJY Sd9 YILdO2 bee oah am Suo Hody 90 uer auldxy g0 uer g pedojanaq aea 4594 UAY W6GL 09 4 4 147 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Chapter 4 TASK 2052 Perform Water Bucket Operations WARNING Never dump water onto ground personnel as the water impact could result in injury Minimize hovering or flying slowly over
159. M a Select a suitable landing area b Set the parking brakes before landing c Maintain heading 5 degrees d Maintain minimum drift before touchdown and then no drift allowed after wheel contact 2 NCM a Confirm suitable landing area b Clear the aircraft c Announce drift and altitude DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will announce their intent to perform a slope operation and will establish the helicopter over the slope The P will ensure the brakes are set and will announce their intended landing area and any deviations from the intended maneuver The P should be aware of the common tendency to become tense and as a result to over control the aircraft while performing the slope operation The P will note the aircraft attitude at a HVR prior starting descent to land on the slope b All crewmembers will clear the aircraft and provide warning of obstacles excessive drift or excessive attitude changes c The P and NCM will assume a position where he or she can observe the slope operation The NCM will clear the sector while checking that the rotor blades are clear of obstacles and the ground The NCM will call out wheel height from 10 feet to the ground in 1 foot increments The NCM will advise the P when all landing gear are on the ground and the aircraft is stable 2 Procedures a Upslope landings 1 With the aircraft heading upslope the P will lower the thrust control until the forward landing gear con
160. MERG descent 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Verbally state conditions requiring an EMERG descent uu LCT system s failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D Verbally describe the indications Select MANUAL on the cyclic trim switch or pull CB B 9 No 2 PDP for AFT LCT actuator or CB B 10 No 1 PDP for FWD LCT actuator b CH 47F Verbally describe the indications Select MANUAL on the cyclic trim switch or pull CB B 18 No 2 PDP for AFT LCT actuator or CB B 17 No 1 PDP for FWD LCT actuator 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications or perform the steps listed in paragraph uu 1 a or b CAUTION Ensure the following airspeeds are met to ensure there is no additional stress placed on the aft vertical shaft and rotor systems Failure retracted will be executed at airspeeds less than Vne for LCT RET Failure extended at cruise airspeed not below 70 KIAS KCAS vv Single AFCS DAFCS failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Ensure airspeed is no greater than 100 KIAS KCAS or Vye whichever is slower Manually turn OFF the appropriate system as required with the AFCS DAFCS SYSTEM SEL switch 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications ww Dual AFCS DAFCS failure 1 Condition
161. MTF manual 3 Crew stations For general maintenance test flights GMTFs the MP will be in the left seat For LMTFs this section will identify when the MP must be in the left seat to ensure safe efficient and effective completion of task execution These tasks are listed below a Starting ENG checks Control interference neutral pedal measurement cyclic position indicator measurement control and flight control HYDs check ENG start abort initial ENG start over speed OVSPD REV start b ENG Run up checks GEN under frequency c Before HVR check FADEC system and REV mode beep d HVR Mechanical rig control positions and TQ differential check e Inflight checks 60 and 140 KIAS KCAS speed sweep if lateral pedal measurements are required autorotation and PAC Training and evaluation requirements 1 Other than RL progression and APART tasks can be performed evaluated in the aircraft FS TFPS or academic environment The evaluation criteria are addressed in the standard section of this chapter and any additional standards in the specific task If one or more checkis performed unsatisfactorily the task will be graded with a U unsatisfactory However when the task is reevaluated only those unsatisfactory checks must be reevaluated 2 Checks At a minimum the following checks will be evaluated for MP ME APART purposes a Preflight b Control interference c Control interlock d Control centering e ENG checks o
162. MTFs in both the CH 47D and CH 47F evaluation requirements will be conducted in the CH 47F due to CH 47F specific tasks If this requirement cannot be met due to aircraft or personnel availability the evaluation may be conducted in the CH 47D with the approval of the ATP waiver authority 5 References The references are sources of information relating to that particular task In addition to the common references listed in chapter 4 the following references apply to all MTP tasks These references apply to each of the tasks listed in this chapter and will not be listed for each task a Aircraft logbook and historical records b TM 1 1500 328 23 c DA Pam 738 751 d TM 1 1520 240 10 e TM 1 1520 240 CL f TM 1 1520 240 MTF g TM 1 1520 271 10 h TM 1 1520 271 CL i TM 1 1520 271 MTF j IETM 1 1520 240 23 amp P k TM 11 1520 240 23 1 IETM 1 1520 271 23 amp P m IETM 11 1520 271 23 amp P n AR 95 1 o AR 750 1 p AR 700 138 q TM 1 2840 265 23 r TM 1 6625 724 13 amp P s Applicable airworthiness directives or messages from the U S Army Aviation And Missile Command AMCOM or Aviation Missile Life Cycle Management Command AMLCMC TASK LIST a Standards versus descriptions The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or standard of performance to which the task must be accomplished Attention to the use of the words will should shall must
163. N REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references DOD FLIP FI and unit SOP 4 90 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1094 D Perform Flight with Advanced Flight Control System j Digital Advance Flight Control System Off CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter in VMC STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Maintain trim flight 1 ball width 2 Maintain the standards for the task maneuver being performed DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P or P will announce to the other crewmembers when he or she detects an AFCS DAFCS malfunction b The P will react positively and smoothly to divergent movements enter all maneuvers slowly and avoid over controlling the aircraft c During VMC the P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to maintain aircraft control and obstacle clearance 2 Procedures a The P will smoothly coordinate control movements to maintain the aircraft in trim The P will monitor the turn and slip indicator for indications of divergent movements b The P will smoothly and positively react to any divergent movements of the aircraft The NCM will check that all passengers are wearing their seatbelts and that all cargo and mission equipment is secured Note Any man
164. NG is not subject to a specific MTF manual check ensure the system is checked IAW the appropriate operator s manual An example is a limited maintenance test flight 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 1 Chapter 5 e LMTF for a No 1 ENG replacement the No 2 ENG must have the appropriate operator s manual checks performed such as FADEC REV system s check or PAT 8 Anytime an ECL is moved to the ground position the MP will verify the ENG is stabilized at ground idle Description The description explains how the elements of the task should be done to meet the standards When specific crew actions are required the task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as follows 5 2 1 Crew actions These define the portions of a task to be performed by each crewmember to ensure safe efficient and effective task execution When required MP responsibilities are specified All tasks in this chapter are only to be performed by qualified MPs MEs or student maintenance test PIs undergoing qualification training as outlined in AR 95 1 The MP is the PC in all situations except when being trained or evaluated by an ME For all tasks MP actions and responsibilities are applicable to MEs When two MEs are conducting training evaluation together or two MPs are jointly performing TF tasks the mission brief will designate the aviator assuming PC responsibilities 2 Procedures This section includes additional information to augment the
165. NVG TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Pam 738 751 TM 1 1520 240 PMD TM 1 1520 271 PMD TM 1 1520 240 23 series and TM 1 1520 271 23 series 4 116 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1253 H Operate Common Avionics Architecture System Control Display Unit Multi Function Display CONDITION In a CH 47F helicopter with an operational CAAS CDU MED STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the following additions modifications 1 Configure the CAAS CDU MED for the mission IAW operator s manual TM 1 1520 271 10 2 Initialize the CAAS CDU MFD for operation DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to information given by the P b The P monitors all mission equipment and uses the CAAS CDU MFD for communication navigation and mission information 2 Procedures a The P will place the CAAS into operation during run up and will operate inflight through shutdown by using any or all of the following functions 1 Perform the turn on and then select the desired display for each aircraft MFD Understand factors and emergencies adversely affecting the MFDs which could result in degraded mission performance or the mission being aborted Perform the proper shutdown procedures IAW the operator s manual 2 Initiali
166. NVG current crewmembers will participate at least once every 60 consecutive days in a 1 hour flight in the aircraft while wearing NVG RCMs will occupy a crew station with access to the flight controls NCMs must be performing crew duties 1 Crewmember If a crewmember s currency has lapsed he or she must complete at a minimum a 1 hour NVG PFE administered at night in the aircraft by a NVG SP IP SI or FI as appropriate 2 RCM The RCM must occupy a crew station with access to the flight controls during the evaluation 3 NCM The NCM must occupy a crew station in the aircraft while performing crew duties during the evaluation 4 Minimum tasks Minimum tasks to be evaluated are indicated by an X in the NVG column of table 2 3 or table 2 4 pages 2 3 to 2 6 as applicable The commander may designate other mission and or additional tasks Note Crewmembers qualified in the CH 47D and CH 47F may maintain NVG currency in either aircraft and will be considered NVG current in both aircraft CHEMICAL BIOLOGICAL RADIOLOGICAL AND NUCLEAR AND HIGH YIELD EXPLOSIVE TRAINING IAW TC 3 04 11 crewmembers must wear the complete chemical biological radiological nuclear and high yield explosive CBRNE ensemble during CBRNE training All CBRNE training will be performed in the aircraft CBRNE training is not required for FAC 3 positions and DACs CAUTION While conducting CBRNE training the commander will ensure that aircre
167. OFF 2 The P will turn on the P s radio switches as required 3 The P will advise the P to make smooth control applications to prevent load s oscillation The NCM will monitor the load s for oscillation load s height and advise the P of the status of the load s d Approach and load s release 1 The P may turn OFF the P s radio switches as directed 2 The P will establish and maintain an approach angle that will keep the load s clear of obstacles to the desired point of termination 3 The P will establish a rate of closure appropriate for the conditions and the load s A go around should be made before descending below obstacles or decelerating below ETL 4 Before passing below 200 foot AHO load s height and below best SE airspeed place the cargo hook master switch in the ARM position and the cargo hook control switch is in the appropriate position The crew will verbally confirm placement of the cargo hook master switch to the ARM position 5 The NCM will call the aircraft load s height altitude AHO on approach at 100 feet 75 feet 50 feet 25 feet 20 feet 15 feet and the altitude that places the load s at 10 feet The P will back up the NCM calling the load s by referencing the RAD ALT 6 The P will terminate the approach at a stationary HVR with the load s 10 feet above the intended release point The NCM will confirm that the release point is clear and direct the aircraft to the rele
168. P IE or FI course Initial validation of a crewmember s qualifications will be conducted in the aircraft Recommended performance and evaluation criteria 1 PI The PI must demonstrate a working knowledge of the subjects in paragraph 3 4b and perform selected tasks to ATM standard while applying aircrew coordination principles In addition the PI must be familiar with the individual aircrew training folder IATF and understand the requirements of DA Form 7120 R Commander s Task List 2 PC MP The PC MP must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 1 In addition the PC MP must demonstrate sound judgment maturity and technical tactical proficiency in the employment of the aircraft unit mission crew and assets 3 UT The UT must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 or 8 In addition the UT must be able to instruct in the appropriate tasks and subjects recognize errors in performance or understanding make recommendations for improvement train to standards and document training 4 IP or IE The IP or IE must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 In addition the IPAE must be able to objectively train evaluate and document performance of the UT PC PI SI FI FE and CE using role reversal as appropriate This individual must possess a thorough knowledge of the fundamentals of instruction and evaluation be able to develop and implement an individual training plan and possess a thorough understanding of the
169. Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the hover power before takeoff checks completed and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications DYE RS eS Properly clear the aircraft i Ensure FD cues are displayed accurately as required Maintain takeoff heading 10 degrees below 50 feet AGL Maintain ground track aligned with takeoff direction Maintain aircraft in trim above 50 feet AGL or as appropriate for transition to terrain flight Maintain takeoff PWR until reaching minimum SE airspeed desired climb airspeed or transition to mission profile DESCRIPTION 1 4 60 Crew actions a The PC will determine the direction of takeoff by analyzing the tactical situation wind long axis of the takeoff area and the lowest obstacles The PC will confirm that required PWR is available by comparing the information from the PPC to the HVR PWR check The PC will ensure that the required fuel for the mission is available by comparing the required fuel onboard the aircraft to the PPC If the fuel onboard is inadequate add sufficient fuel abort or revise the mission b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to provide obstacle clearance The P will announce whether the takeoff is from the ground or from a HVR and his or her intent to abort or alter the takeoff The P will select refere
170. Pls to test all latches IND going to confirm the proper indications Four master reset maintenance panel is caution capsules and two master caution operational Refer to Note 1 lights and checks all the latches for tripped condition before stating test results Maintenance panel Check CAUTION One CE will observe operation of the cargo hooks and make the appropriate responses for the operation The other CE will be positioned in the cabin to operate the hoist operator s grip as required If single crewmember perform both All personnel must remain clear of MID hook at all times Ready outside ready aft two man crew Ready aft one man crew Cargo hook s hoist winch Check operation as required TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 5 CH 47D call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks Armed and forward Forward hook operational Ensure menial release Knob on forward hook ratchets Checking MID hook MID Hook is open Ensure MID hook opens Hoist operator s panel armed checking aft hook Aft hook operational Armed and aft Ensure manual release knob on aft hook ratchets Ensure forward and aft hook manual release Armed and tandem Forward and aft hook operational knabs ratchet MID Hook clear MID hook is Resetting closed Armed and all Forward and aft hook operational Ensure forward and aft hook manual knobs MID hook open ratchet
171. Preventative Maintenance Services Cycle Service Program Inspection CH 47F Helicopter 16 June 2008 TM 1 1520 271 PMS4 Preventative Maintenance Services Corrosion Prevention for CH 47F Helicopter 15 March 2012 TM 1 1560 312 10 Operator s Manual for Extended Range Fuel System IT ERFS II Configured for the Army CH 47D Helicopter P N HM022 509 NSN 1560 01 456 2704 EIC RCG 30 September 2000 TM 1 1560 312 23 amp P Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual and Repair Parts and Special Tools List for the Extended Range Fuel System II ERFS II Configured for the Army CH 47 Helicopter 28 February 2011 TM 1 1680 377 13 amp P Interactive Electronic Technical Manual IETM for Air Warrior 15 December 2009 TM 1 2840 248 23 amp P Interactive Technical Manual IETM for Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Engine Aircraft Turboshaft T700 GE 700 T700 GE 701 T700 GE 701D EIC N A 31 August 2010 TM 11 1520 240 23 Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual for Army Model CH 47D Helicopter NSN 1520 01 088 3669 EIC RCD Avionics Configuration Includes C1 C9 15 April 1996 TM 11 1520 240 23P Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for CH 47D Electronic Equipment Configuration NSN 1520 01 088 3669 EIC KTD 01 June 2001 TM 11 5855 300 10 Operator s Manual for Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 NSN 585
172. Q value that is equal to your MAX allowable GWT for your mission profile based on departure conditions If this value is exceeded prior to obtaining a desired wheel height HVR altitude then the aircraft GWT must be adjusted unload cargo passengers or fuel to ensure the aircraft is kept within the operator s manual limitations Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of departure record the predicted TQ required to HVR at the appropriate HVR altitude and at the MAX allowable GWT for the mission profile item 40 To calculate the validation factor enter the HVR chart at the FAT and move right horizontally to the PA Move down vertically to the GWT chart until the lowest MAX GWT calculated for the mission profile is intersected Move left horizontally until the desired HVR altitude IGE or OGE if appropriate is intersected then move down vertically to the predicted HVR TQ DUAL ENG Item 42 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT for MISSION PROFILE with LOAD Refer to item 40 for definition Record the MAX allowable GWT for the entire mission profile at the appropriate HVR altitude Determine this value by comparing MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN items 24 and 100 and MAX GWT CONT PWR item 57 for cruise Refer to item 40 Item 43 VALIDATION FACTOR with a LOAD Refer to item 41 for definition Using the HVR chart and forecast conditions at the time of departure record the predicted TQ required to HVR at the appropriate HVR altitude and at the MAX allowabl
173. R NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Closure rates are more difficult to determine Consideration should be given to keeping formation changes to a minimum All crewmembers must avoid fixation by using proper scanning techniques Consider the use of aircraft external lighting to aid in the visual acquisition of other aircraft during loss of visual contact 1 During unaided night flight the crew should use formation and position lights to aid in maintaining the aircraft s formation position Lighting will be IAW AR 95 1 and unit SOP 2 When conducting NVG formation flight the crew should use the IR formation lights and IR anti collision lights to maintain the aircraft s position in the formation The NCM not engaged in observing other aircraft in the formation will perform flight duties as directed by the PC Note Additional crewmember requirements are in TC 3 04 11 chapter 4 SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS 1 Takeoff A simultaneous formation takeoff may not be possible due to loss of visual contact with other aircraft in the formation Crews should consider taking off single ship then conducting an inflight link up once clear of the snow sand dust cloud During single ship takeoff it is important to notify the formation when clear of the dust cloud to notify the next aircraft ready for takeoff 2 Approach A landing should be made to the ground with forward ground speed and heading for all aircraft off set by 10 degrees from lead
174. REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 20 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4276 Perform Special Equipment or Detailed Procedures Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the applicable MTF manual CL or unit SOP STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 When applicable perform required checks outlined or as required for installation or modification of aircraft system 2 Perform applicable checks from the MTF manual for systems affected during installation modification DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The MP will direct assistance from the RCM and NCM They will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures a Perform IAW the appropriate MTF manual or other appropriate reference b Verify all required steps are completed TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and additional authorized references including AWR 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 21 Chapter 5 TASK 4284 Perform After Landing through Engine Shutdown Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the applicable MTF manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the f
175. S REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 62 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1042 Perform Cruise Check Procedures CAUTION Flight crewmembers will use a safety restraining harness at all times while moving about the cabin area If crewmembers are not performing any tasks or maneuvers they should remain seated with seat belts secured CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the appropriate operator s manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications I RCM a Call for the cruise check 15 to 30 minutes after takeoff or after initial entry into mission profile b Read the cruise check from the appropriate operator s manual CL and confirm the appropriate responses c Perform an inflight fuel consumption check d In addition to the fuel check correctly monitor the fuel quantity and consumption rate at least every 30 minutes during the flight e Check individual fuel tank levels for proper system operation during the fuel consumption check and at least every 30 minutes during the flight f F The P will update the FLPN values for wind outside air temperature OAT and speed as appropriate The P will confirm fuel and PWR requirements fuel remaining in CAAS with planning requirements g Initiate an appropriate course of action if actual fuel consumption varies from the planned value and the mission cannot be completed with t
176. SED These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication STANDARIZATION AGREEMENTS STANAG 3114 Edition Eight Air Standard 60 16 Aeromedical Training of Flight Personnel 22 October 1986 JOINT PUBLICATIONS JP 3 50 Personnel Recovery 20 December 2011 JP 3 04 Joint Shipboard Helicopter Operations 30 September 2008 ARMY PUBLICATIONS AR 95 10 Department of Defense Notice to Airmen NOTAM System 01 August 2004 AR 95 27 Operational Procedures for Aircraft Carrying Hazardous Materials 11 November 1994 AR 385 10 The Army Safety Program 23 August 2007 AR 700 138 Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability 26 February 2004 ATTP 3 18 12 Air Assault Operations 01 March 2011 DA Pam 350 38 Standards in Commission Training 13 May 2009 FM 2 0 Intelligence 23 March 2010 FM 3 01 80 Visual Aircraft Recognition 17 January 2006 FM 3 04 120 Air Traffic Services Operations 16 February 2007 FM 3 04 203 Fundamentals of Flight 07 May 2007 FM 3 04 300 Airfield and Flight Operations Procedures Including CI amp C2 12 August 2008 FM 3 25 26 Map Reading and Land Navigation 18 January 2005 FM 10 67 1 Concepts and Equipment of Petroleum Operations 2 April 1998 FM 21 60 Visual Signals 30 September 1987 TM 1 1500 250 23 Aviation Unit and Aviation Maintenance for General Tie Down and Mooring on all Series Army Models AH 64 UH 60 CH MH 47 UH 1 AH 1 and OH 58 Helicopters 24 August 1990 TM 1 15
177. TC 3 04 34 TC 1 240 Aircrew Training Manual Cargo Helicopter CH 47D F April 2013 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited Headquarters Department of the Army This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online https armypubs us army mil doctrine index html To receive publishing updates please subscribe at http www apd army mil AdminPubs new_subscribe asp TC 3 04 34 TC 1 240 Training Circular Headquarters No 3 04 34 Department of the Army Washington DC 5 April 2013 AIRCREW TRAINING MANUAL CARGO HELICOPTER CH 47D F Contents Page PREFACE cecon a a a T satgebels disuseeeeustoeets vii Chapter 1 INTRODUC TION a a ae aao ana a thet a eean ae EEE aaea 1 1 1 1 Crew Station Designation sssssssssneerenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 1 1 1 2 Symbol Usage and Word Distinctions c ccccecssseeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeenes 1 1 Chapter 2 TRAINING a Seite a eine eee a eh ess 2 1 2 1 Qualification Training 0 cccccececeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeseeeseneeeseeeeeees 2 1 2 2 Refresher Training eeen aeaea ie ctevedenteteceacedtecessectuctdvercvedestecteccsteecs 2 2 2 3 MISSION Tra Ng e a a ea ara aaae Saa Pan e a Ea Eaa aes 2 6 2 4 Continuation Training s sisien eooo aaiae anehi an haaa Eaa andan 2 7 PE A E A E E ley 2 8 2 6 Currency Requirements 2 cccccceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseeseeeneeeeeeens 2 13 2 7
178. TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Table 4 3 Example of crew briefing checklist for external sling load s procedures 1 Prior to hook up Determine takeoff GWT SE capability and verify GO NO GO and validation factor 2 P Duties a ARM the cargo hook master switch b Turn OFF radio pin switches for P if required c Common Missile Warning System CMWS ASE Variant STANDBY d ARC 220 STANDBY or OFF e Inform P before reaching limits f Perform HVR PWR check and before takeoff check g Cargo hook master switch e OFF above 200 feet AHO and SE airspeed e ARMED below 200 feet and SE airspeed h The P will back up the NCM calling the load s using the RAD ALT 3 NCM Duties a NCM calling load s will have radios OFF and winch hoist control grip secured and positioned within reach b Advise load s in sight c Direct P over load s no more than two directions at a time d Advise when load s is hooked e Advise when hook up personnel s are clear and direction f Advise when load s is clear to come up g Advise when sling s are tight h Advise load s height during takeoff from the ground to 10 feet in 1 foot increments i Monitor load s inflight j The NCM will call the load s height from 10 feet to the ground and from the ground to 10 feet in 1 foot increments The NCM will call the load s height AHO on takeoff approach at 100 feet 75 feet 50 feet 25 feet 20 feet 15 feet and
179. TM 1 1520 240 23 or TM 1 1520 271 23 series If any procedure is conducted or the result is not AW the applicable maintenance or troubleshooting manual the MP will be notified 2 Procedures a Prior to and during the TF the NCM must constantly monitor all aircraft systems and components The NCM will inform the MP of any unusual vibrations noises smells leakage or component malfunctions The CE will also perform any maintenance procedures and checks required by the MP b Prior to flight the NCM will remove any additional panels covers and cowlings required by the MP If the DASH actuator is required for a mechanical rig check the NCM will set it to 36 inches and disconnect the electrical connectors c The NCM will make the following checks 1 Maintenance panel check The NCM will check the maintenance panel IAW the CH 47D F MTF manual The NCM will check and announce each individual HYD SYS PRESS MAX fluctuation 50 psi and press to test all panel lights The NCM will ensure that the XMSN MAIN and AUX PRESS lights and ground contact lights remain ON The NCM will announce when he or she tests the latch indicators and fault indicator check all indicators for proper operation 2 Cargo hooks and winch The NCM will ensure that the cargo hook area and winch are clear of obstructions and non flight personnel are at a safe distance The NCM will also ensure that the cargo hook and winch operational check is co
180. The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight 4 182 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during nighttime overwater operations If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the PI may opt to approach the cast area so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits Proper scanning techniques are necessary Conditions specified in the aircraft operator s manual must be met before the aircrew conducts nighttime water operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and AWR for CH 47D F helicopters to conduct water landing 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 183 Chapter 4 TASK 2081 Operate Night Vision Goggles CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given a set of NVGs STANDARDS Appropriate common stan
181. a D After either RCM has called for the cruise check the P will read the operator s manual CL for the appropriate checks The RCM will record the time and fuel quantity The P will obtain the rate of consumption from the fuel flow indicators and will compute and record the burnout and reserve entry time The P will determine if sufficient fuel is available to complete the mission with the required reserve and will check individual fuel tanks for the current fuel level b At least every 30 MINs the P will monitor the fuel quantity consumption rate and verify system operation If the fuel quantity or flow indicates a deviation from the initial check the P will repeat the initial check to determine if the fuel quantity is adequate for the mission The P will also check individual fuel tanks to ensure that the system is operating normally and determine if the fuel quantity in the auxiliary AUX fuel tanks is decreasing normally Note fj CAAS updates fuel consumption continuously Note Verify ability to transfer fuel from internal ERFS to external tanks before using internal tank fuel quantities in fuel reserve burnout computations c The NCMs will check the ramp and cabin area and notify the PIs of any discrepancies when found If no discrepancies are found announce RAMP and CABIN CHECK COMPLETE all SYSTEMS NORMAL Note The clear visor provides eye protection while not degrading the crewmember s ability to see inside the aircra
182. a Academic training The MP will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed in paragraph 3 4b 1 1 b Flight training The MP ME will receive flight training and demonstrate proficiency in all tasks in table 2 9 page 2 14 Refer to chapter 5 for more guidance b Minimum flight hours There are no minimum flight hour requirements The training is proficiency based determined by the crewmember s ability to accomplish the designated tasks satisfactorily NVG mission training may be included as part of refresher training c HUD Qualification RCM will be HUD qualified prior to progressing to NVG RL 1 2 4 CONTINUATION TRAINING Crewmembers are designated RL 1 when they meet the criteria of TC 3 04 11 ATP commanders will designate continuation training requirements for DACs on DA Form 7120 1 R Note Uts and evaluators may credit those hours they fly while performing assigned duties regardless of their crew station toward their semi annual flying hour requirements a Semi annual flying hour requirements aircraft The minimum requirements for crewmembers are as follows 1 RCMs a FAC 1 45 hours which must be flown while occupying a crew station with access to the flight controls b FAC 2 33 hours which must be flown while occupying a crew station with access to the flight controls I FAC 3 no flying hour requirements 2 NCMs 24 hours in the aircraft while performing crew duties b Semi annual fl
183. a Before starting the approach The P will verify that the brakes are released and that the swivels are locked When the desired approach angle is intercepted the P will lower the thrust control as required to establish the descent b During the approach 1 The P will maintain the desired airspeed until reaching a point from which the obstacles can be cleared but no lower than 100 feet AHO The P will then assume a progressive decelerating attitude to achieve a touchdown on the AFT landing gear The touchdown speed will be commensurate with aircraft performance and landing area conditions 2 The NCM will inform the P when the aircraft is clear of all obstacles in the flight path 3 The P will slip the aircraft during the deceleration to achieve runway alignment before touchdown I The P will check that the LCTs RET during the deceleration The P will maintain the desired angle of descent with the thrust control 4 If at any time during the approach touchdown or during the rollout the maneuver may be aborted or a go around initiated if any crewmember determines the landing area is unsuitable If a SE EMERG condition exists and sufficient SE PWR is AVAIL execute go around or abort the landing Before touchdown The P will adjust the thrust control to achieve a smooth touchdown on the AFT landing gear before going below ETL d After landing 1 The P will maintain the landing attitude with the cyclic and thrust control no
184. abin door As Ramp is up cabin door secured Ramp should be in the full up position for required Refer to Note 4 taxi takeoff hover flight and landings unless there is a load s on it that prevents placing the ramp in the UP position Crew passengers and Aft ready forward ready Aft CE always calls first mission equipment Check Refer to Note 5 ready for taxi Taxi director and blade Internal or outside Call made as appropriate for the conditions watchers Positioned PAT check Perform first flight 1 or 2 Clear to towards ground For example the DECU will begin its BIT and of day may be deferred to testing 1 or 2 Read the last flash 88 OA and a two digit value The BIT is hover hexadecimal digit series displayed not complete until the DECU stops flashing and apply the temp bias Announce codes Note the last two digit value displayed the adjusted PAC and trigger value and apply the PACN adjustment 1 or 2 clear to flight Hover Check Ground CONTACT indicating Both off out Verify that both ground contact indicating lights Off lights are extinguished PAT Perform as required Refer to PAT check above Refer to PAT check above Before Takeoff Crew passengers and Aft ready forward ready Aft CE always calls first mission equipment Check Refer to Note 5 Cruise Check Ramp and cabin area Check Ramp check in progress Ramp is If single crewmember combine the calls For every 30 minutes inside Ramp i
185. able charts before using Note For all updated NOTAMs log on primary web site https www notams jcs mil dinsQueryWeb or the alternate web site http www faa gov air_traffic publications notices STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine if the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission 2 Determine if the flight can be performed under IFR IAW AR 95 1 applicable FARs host nation regulations local regulations and SOPs 3 Determine the proper departure en route and destination procedures IAW AR 95 1 applicable FARs host nation regulations local regulations and SOPs 4 Select route s and altitude s that avoid hazardous Wx conditions Do not exceed aircraft or equipment limitations and conform to IFR cruising altitudes IAW DOD FLIP If off airway determine the course s 5 degress and determine the off airway altitude without error 5 Select an approach that is compatible with the Wx approach facilities and aircraft equipment and determine if an alternate airfield is required IAW AR 95 1 applicable FARs host nation regulations local regulations and SOPs 6 Determine distance 1 NM true airspeed TAS 5 knots ground speed 5 knots and ETE 1 minute for each leg of the flight 7 Determine the fuel required for the mission IAW AR 95 1 and FM 3 04 240 100 pounds 8 Verify that the aircraft will remain within WT and CG lim
186. accomplishment c Determine the magnetic heading ground speed and ETE for each leg to include the alternate airfield if required d Compute total distance flight time and calculate the required fuel using a CPU 26A P computer Weems plotter or equivalent or approved mission planning software MPS Determine if the duplicate weight and balance forms in the aircraft logbook apply to the mission IAW AR 95 1 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 13 Chapter 4 Verify that the aircraft WT and CG will remain within allowable limits for the entire flight Complete the appropriate FLPN and file with appropriate agency NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS More detailed planning is necessary at night because of visibility restrictions Checkpoints used during the day may not be suitable for night or NVG use TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted academically or CH47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references and aircraft logbook 4 14 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1006 Plan an Instrument Flight Rules Flight CONDITIONS Prior to IFR flight in a CH 47D F helicopter given access to weather information NOTAMs flight planning aids necessary charts forms and publications and weight and balance information Note The use of computer flight planning programs is authorized The crew should verify the information with applic
187. act with the ground CAUTION To prevent droop stop pounding do not exceed ground control limitations after all landing gear contact the ground CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given VMC with the landing area reconnaissance and before landing check completed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of termination HVR or touchdown surface 2 Maintain rate of closure appropriate for the conditions 3 Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction as appropriate 4 Align aircraft with landing direction below 50 feet AGL or as appropriate for transition from terrain flight 5 Perform a smooth and controlled termination to a HVR or touchdown to the surface 6 Determine wind direction and velocity throughout the landing sequence using wind indicators and the CAAS DESCRIPTION 4 70 1 Crew actions a The P will select a suitable landing area analyze suitability barriers winds approach path touchdown point and takeoff direction The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver The P will announce when he or she begins the approach and whether the approach will terminate to a hover or to the surface The P will also announce the intended point of landing and any deviation from the briefed approach to include a go around if
188. acterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 5 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 6 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 7 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 For unaided night flight the landing light and searchlight should be operational If a NVG filter is installed it should be removed 2 Due to the high HVR altitude of SPIES operations it is very difficult to determine altitudes and relative position over the ground The barometric altimeter is not reliable for this maneuver but can be used as an aid to help maintain a constant altitude References such as tops of trees lights and man made objects can be used to help prevent drift by lining up the objects and maintaining their relative position once the aircraft is at a stable altitude 3
189. aircraft breakup procedure individual aircraft holding altitudes separation when individual aircraft are allowed to depart their assigned altitude missed approach procedures with aircraft in the holding pattern frequencies and command control procedures TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 104 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter in VMC with reference to instruments only STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Analyze aircraft attitude Without delay use correct recovery procedures with minimum loss of altitude 2 Without delay perform recovery procedures in the following sequence a Attitude Level the wings and pitch attitude while maintaining the aircraft in trim b Heading Establish and maintain appropriate heading c TQ Adjust to cruise or climb PWR d Airspeed Maintain the desired airspeed e Altitude Return to the appropriate desired altitude after establishing aircraft control Clear the aircraft Recover without exceeding aircraft operating limitations DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The trainer or evaluator will place the aircraft in unusual attitude and transfer the controls to the P
190. ake a vertical ascent to approximately 15 feet above the water Perform HVR PWR check and before takeoff checks Perform a VMC takeoff Place the PITOT HEAT switch to the OFF position Note CH 47 Aft landing gear switches are not actuated in the water The DASH actuators will continue to respond to longitudinal stick inputs Longitudinal cyclic movements of 0 1 inch if held may cause the DASH actuators to hard over If longitudinal cyclic movement is required for taxing set the AFCS DAFCS SEL switch to OFF Note Hovering over water with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and proper crew coordination If possible select a stationary object as a visual reference 4 Water operation ramp down considerations a A safety boat is present when performing recovery operations b Brief medical support available c Communication must be maintained during recovery operations b NCM 1 Before the flight ensure that the center cargo hook is stowed and the lower rescue door secure Install all fuselage drain plugs during ramp down water operations do not install ramp drain plugs Inspect the seal on all lower antenna mounts and inspect access panels for security Install static line for use as a handhold 2 During the approach perform a reconnaissance of the landing area Assist the PIs with determining the suitability of the landing area 3 During the descent advise the PIs in 25 foot
191. al situation requires perform techniques of movement IAW FM 3 04 203 Maneuver into the briefed flight formation Maintain horizontal and vertical separation for the type of formation being flown TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks c The following procedures will be performed if visual contact is lost unless otherwise established in unit SOPs 1 Takeoff Immediately make a radio call to the formation All helicopters should leave the ground simultaneously The trailing aircraft must remain at a level altitude or stack up 1 10 feet vertically to remain out of the disturbed air of the aircraft in front of them In the event an aircraft in the flight loses visual contact with the formation the crew will immediately make a radio call to the formation and the P will adjust to an altitude that will afford visual acquisition above or below the briefed cruise altitude and attempt reorientation of the formation 2 Cruise Free cruise formation should be employed when operating at terrain flight altitudes or in a combat environment This will allow the individual aircraft more flexibility to move within the formation avoiding terrain obstacles and enemy threat Consideration should be given to DGs fields of fire to aid in protecting the entire formation During periods of degraded visibility crews are more susceptible to losing other aircraft in the formation Crews should consider flying a close formation to maintain orientation on the fl
192. alue of 123 percent will be entered into the block IAW the SE TQ limit stated in the appropriate operator s manual This represents an ENG XMSN limit the ENGs may produce PWR in excess of the ENG XMSN limit It is possible that with a calculated value of 123 percent the ENG could reach both limits PTIT and SE TQ Using the SE contingency TQ AVAIL or contingency TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast conditions at departure record the MAX TQ AVAIL for SE operation Item 11 INTERMEDIATE TQ AVAIL 30 MIN The intermediate TQ AVAIL 30 MIN is used to determine the MAX 30 MIN TQ output or the MAX 30 MIN limit for PTIT that both ENGs can produce based on the forecasted conditions A value less than 100 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit will be reached prior to exceeding the DUAL ENG TQ limit A value greater than 100 percent will indicate that a PTIT limit should not be reached prior to reaching the MAX DUAL ENG TQ limit If the calculated value is greater than 100 percent TQ a value of 100 percent will be entered into the block IAW the DUAL ENG TQ limit stated in the appropriate operator s manual This represents a combining XMSN limit the ENGs may produce PWR in excess of the combining XMSN limit It is possible that with a calculated value of 100 percent the ENG could reach both limits PTIT and DUAL ENG TQ Using the intermediate TQ AVAIL 30 MIN chart and the forecast conditions at departure record the MAX 30 MIN TQ AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation
193. am members will position themselves at the door or ramp area The cast master will then tap each team member on the shoulder and give the 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 179 Chapter 4 command GO On the command GO each team member will exit the aircraft IAW the instruction received during the safety briefing The cast master may also jump but must always exit last 8 After entering the water all team members will indicate that they are unhurt by raising one arm overhead The aircraft will not leave the area until all team members report no injuries The P will maintain heading altitude and airspeed until the last team member has exited the aircraft 9 After deployment the drop profile is terminated by increasing altitude and airspeed to the desired mode of flight c Preparation of the aircraft 1 The ramp extensions must be removed 2 Helicopter internal cargo handling system will be installed as required 3 Pilot and co pilot RAD ALTs must be installed and operational 4 The aircraft will be prepared for water landings such as drain plugs installed and center cargo hook stowed 5 Aircraft windshield wipers must be operational 6 Pitot and yaw port heat must be operational 7 A headset for the cast master will be onboard OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefo
194. an increase thrust control until all slack is removed from the suspension cable and the lip of the bucket is clear of the water Maintain heading with pedals f Apply additional thrust control to raise the filled bucket clear to the water s surface to a height of 10 feet Ensure that the bucket is holding the water and monitor aircraft instruments to ensure that aircraft limitations are not exceeded Note Use the manufacturer s recommended en route airspeeds for each type of water bucket This prevents the buckets from twisting and pinching the cables d Takeoff Establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance When above 100 feet AGL or when clear of obstacles adjust attitude and PWR as required to establish the desired R C and airspeed Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent bucket oscillation Note Ensure that the cargo hook master switch is in the ARMED position when operating at altitudes below 300 feet AHO and in the OFF position above 300 feet AHO e Enroute Maintain the desired altitude flight path and airspeed Make smooth control applications to prevent bucket oscillation If a lateral bucket oscillation occurs reduce airspeed If fore and aft oscillation occurs perform the same procedures as in Task 1063 in this ATM Note When flying with the bucket empty open the bucket to allow streamlining This prevents the bucket from twisting and pinching the cables f Approach and
195. ance for the final MAHF missed intermediate initial segments and the MSA 4 Determine altitudes based on obstacle clearance for FAF MAHF MAP IF IAP and MSA figure 4 to figure 4 page 4 5 Determine the appropriate obstacles in the missed approach segment and determine 20 1 slope penetration 6 Establish a 3 NM holding pattern at the MAHF 7 Prepare an EMERG recovery procedure diagram IAW the example 8 Complete a suitability flyability check to include loading waypoints under VMC to validate the procedure Note All altitudes are in feet mean sea level MSL all waypoints are latitude longitude LAT LONG all distances are NM and visibility is SM All obstacles are MSL unless otherwise noted The FIH has the necessary conversion tables WARNING Ensure coordinates for maps and GPS are the same datum for example WGS 84 or points on the ground may be off significantly and obstacle clearance will be questionable Note PPS refers to the GPS precise positioning service It is DOD policy that military aircraft operate with the GPS in the PPS mode 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 139 Chapter 4 Note Complete the enclosed figures for determining approach criteria The width cannot be adjusted DESCRIPTION 1 Select the most suitable recover landing area Select an area based on METT TC and obstacles Ensure proper coordination for airspace de confliction has been accomplished 2 Final approach segment figure
196. and MID hook opens Resetting Checking safe Safe in the rear WARNING Pitot heat can cause severe Anti ice system Check as required yaw port heat operational White light or IR light is on extending 45 degrees off burns Ensure the Pls turn off the pitot heat when done Pitot and Aft CE presses cargo release on hoist operators grip Ensure hooks do not actuate CE takes one flight glove off and feels for the presence of heat on two pitot static tubes and four AFCS DAFCS yaw ports Forward CE observes the operation of the search lights Altimeters Set and check On and set If the maintenance work order MWO is installed or as required SLT FIL switches Check and set as required Refuel station reads outside H Ibs internal ERFS installed Fuel quantity Check as required Rotor blades Check position Clear of the tunnel area PRESS is normal on 1 or 2 zero on 2 or 1 Corresponding movement forward and aft heads PRESS is normal 1 and 2 Flight control travel and HYDs Check 88 on 1 and 2 Refer to Note 2 DECU PRESTART BIT Perform 1 and 2 ENG Areas are clear fire Area Clear for start guard posted ready on 1 or 2 1 or 2 ENG air particle separator EAPS fans clear EAPS fans operational EAPS Fan switches ON First ENG Start 1 or 2 Clear for start 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 Aircraft fuel load verified from PMD Preflight Aft CE confi
197. and clear of obstructions the right ramp should make the primary calls d When personnel equipment is clear each NCM at a station will visually confirm personnel equipment is clear and release or retrieve ropes as briefed The right ramp should announce AFT ROPES RELEASED AFT READY the right gun will announce FORWARD ROPES RELEASED if applicable FORWARD READY CLEARED FOR FLIGHT e The P will announce his or her intent to depart the target area The P will maintain outside visual reference and depart the area maintaining obstacle clearance along the intended ground track f Standard terminology will be used during rappelling insertion table 4 10 Table 4 10 Standard rappelling insertion terminology Speaker Reason Statement From P to the crew _ Indicates ready for rope deployment Ropes ropes ropes From FE CE to Pls Indicates the ropes are deployed over target Ropes out From FE CE to Pls Indicates the first roper is exiting aircraft Roping in progress From FE CE to Pls Indicates the ropes have been cut away Ropes released Indicates the ropes have been pulled back into the laircraft and are secured From FE CE to Pls Hold position Hold From FE CE to Pls Indicates direction in which to reposition the Move left right forward From FE CE to Pls Ropes retrieved 4 158 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Ta
198. andards and the following additions modifications 1 Maintain orientation within 500 meters or 25 NMs 2 Arrive at check points destination at ETA 1 minute DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions given by the P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading altitude and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P will announce significant surface features to assist in navigation b The P will direct the P to change aircraft heading altitude and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the desired course The P will use rally terms specific headings relative bearings or key terrain features to accomplish this task The P will announce all plotted wires before approaching the location when the aircraft s altitude makes the wires a hazard The P will monitor aircraft instruments and both the P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft while providing adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside c The FE and or CE will continually watch for traffic and obstacles along the flight path 2 Procedures a Both pilotage and dead reckoning will be used to maintain the position of the aircraft along the planned route Planned headings will be adjusted as necessary to compensate for
199. appened 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Discuss impacts of crew coordination requirements aircraft equipment operation tactics commander s intent and so forth c What was right or wrong about what happened 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Explore causative factors for both favorable and unfavorable events 3 Discuss crew coordination strengths and weaknesses in dealing with each event d What must be done differently the next time 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Identify improvements required in the areas of team relationships mission planning workload distribution and prioritization information exchange and cross monitoring of performance e What are the lessons learned 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Are changes necessary to a Crew coordination techniques b Flying techniques 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 119 Chapter 4 Table 4 5 Suggested format for a crew level after action review checklist c Standing operating procedures d Doctrine ATM or TMs 3 Effect of segment actions and interactions on the overall mission a Each crewmember states in own words b Lessons learned 1 Individual level 2 Crew level 3 Unit level 4 Advise unit operations of significant lessons learned TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Tra
200. appropriate TM The proper updating and shutdown procedures will be performed IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 or manufacturer s equipment operator s manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the manufacturer s operating manual if required 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 67 Chapter 4 TASK 1052 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Flight Maneuvers CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the aircraft cleared when applicable STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications I Turns a Clear the aircraft b Maintain selected bank angle 10 degrees c Roll out on desired heading 10 degress Climbs and descents Clear the aircraft Traffic pattern flight Enter operate in and depart a traffic pattern DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions a The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft The P will announce and clear each turn climb and descent b The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside Procedures The P will adjust cyclic as required to maintain the desired airspeed
201. appropriate write up is entered on DA Form 2408 13 1 for the MID hook being removed AW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 2 The NCM will conduct the rescue hoist operation IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 CL and the unit SOP 2 Procedures 4 164 a General recovery procedures over land 1 Crewmembers alerted approximately 5 minutes before arrival at pickup site 2 Crewmembers complete all required checks such as rescue hoist control panel switches set hoist circuit breakers CBs set ICS selector switches set and crewmembers reposition for hoist operations 3 Make the approach into the wind if possible and plan to terminate the approach at an altitude that will clear the highest obstacle 4 Select an appropriate reference point to maintain heading and position over the ground Once stabilized over pickup site perform hoist operations IAW FM 8 10 6 TM 1 1520 240 10 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 CL and the unit SOP Inert patient recovery 1 General format is the same as over land except the NCM medical officer MO is lowered on the hoist and secures the patient to the recovery device 2 Prior to deploying all crewmembers will be briefed on method of recovery simultaneous or singular recovery of the patient and MO and a radio communications check should be made between the PI NCM and MO General recovery procedures overwater 1 General format is the same as over land except a smoke device may be u
202. are clear of the ground The P will maintain directional control with the pedals and speed with the thrust control 1 During forward taxi the P will raise the thrust control to slow or stop the aircraft The P will lower it to increase forward speed If desired the P will lower the forward gear to the ground while taxiing in a straight line or when all movement is stopped 2 For back taxi the P will raise the thrust control until the aircraft begins to move rearward The P will maintain directional control with the pedals and speed with the thrust control The P will lower the thrust control to slow or stop the aircraft The P will raise the thrust control to increase rearward speed 3 Prior to two wheel taxi the PC will have the FE CE visually confirm that both aft gears are in the trail position and that both aft wheel swivel lock actuators are locked 4 52 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 4 The P may use lateral cyclic inputs to assist with directional control These inputs are normally required when taxiing in a crosswind 2 Crew actions Four wheel taxi a The P will announce his or her intent to begin the four wheel taxi and state the taxi plan The P will call for the before taxi check or the taxi check as appropriate b The P will read the appropriate taxi check The P will ensure that the swivel switch is at STEER and that the AFCS DAFCS SEL switch is OFF c The P will advise the P that he
203. arts Select and enter the desired cruise speed Refer to item 54 Additionally ensure speed selected is not in excess of AIRSPEED LIMIT speed reference item 44 nor the Vye line indicated on the cruise charts Item 63 CRUISE SPEED AIRSPEED DUAL ENG with a LOAD Refer to item 62 for definition Select and enter the desired cruise speed Refer to item 57 Additionally ensure speed selected is not in excess of AIRSPEED LIMIT speed item 45 Item 64 CRUISE SPEED AIRSPEED SE no LOAD The airspeed calculated in item 58 without a load s represents the best SE airspeed and should be used unless the mission dictates otherwise when operating SE Select and enter the desired cruise speed that is not greater than the MAX airspeed for SE cruise as computed in item 76 or slower than minimum airspeed for SE cruise as computed in item 74 Item 65 CRUISE SPEED AIRSPEED SE with a LOAD The airspeeds calculated in item 59 with a load s represents the best SE airspeeds and should be used unless the mission dictates otherwise when operating SE Select and enter the desired cruise speed that is not greater than the MAX airspeed for SE cruise as calculated in item 77 or slower than MIN airspeed for SE cruise as calculated in item 75 Item 66 CRUISE TQ DUAL ENG no LOAD Using the applicable cruise chart record the TQ required to maintain the cruise airspeed listed in item 62 4 26 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Item 67 CRUISE TQ DUAL ENG
204. ase point The NCM will then clear the load s down vertically he or she will call out load s height in 1 foot increments until the load s is completely on the ground 7 Continue descent to obtain slack in the sling s and then HVR laterally to ensure that the clevis is clear of the load s before releasing the load s the NCM will advise the P when the clevis is clear 8 The NCM will release the load s upon confirmation from the P or IAW the unit s SOP The NCM will confirm that the load s is released before clearing the P to reposition from the release point 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 81 Chapter 4 Note Before conducting an external sling load s operation all crewmembers must ensure that they are able to communicate with each other Note The NCM will place the INTERCOMM switch to HOTMIC when using the cargo loading pole If two or more NCMs will be conducting crew duties the NCM calling the load s may brief one of the additional crewmembers to place him or her on HOTMIC Note The P will not allow the external sling load s to descend below the HVR height until the NCM calling the load s has cleared the load s to the ground Note Load s will meet external air transportability EAT requirements IAW FM 4 20 197 Procedures for air transportation of hazardous material will be IAW AR 95 27 Note If possible avoid flight over populated areas Note Before the mission the PC will ensure that all cre
205. ask content will vary with the airframe c Conditions This specifies the common wartime or training evaluation conditions under which the MP tasks will be performed d Standards The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or standard of performance to which the task must be accomplished Standards are based on ideal conditions to which the task must be accomplished The common standards listed in chapter 4 apply to all tasks listed in this section unless specifically stated otherwise The following common standards apply to all MP tasks 1 Perform procedures and checks in sequence IAW the appropriate MTF manual as required 2 Brief the RCM NCM on the procedures applicable warnings and cautions for the task to be performed If performing an autorotation RRPM Np check or PAC a detailed brief will be conducted to include limitations thrust control positions of ground detent full down relax pressure PWR recovery autorotation and EPs for SE or DUAL ENG failure during the various stages of each maneuver 3 Perform crew coordination actions IAW the task description in chapter 6 4 Assess and address any malfunctions or discrepancies as they occur and apply appropriate corrective actions or troubleshooting procedures 5 Use the oral call out and confirmation method and announce the initiation and completion of each check 6 Direct assistance from other crewmembers and ground crew as required 7 When a system or E
206. atation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight These considerations may also apply to flight over desert or broad expanses of snow especially under low ambient lighting TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 3 25 26 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 127 Chapter 4 TASK 1411 Perform Terrain Flight Deceleration CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with tactical flight mission planning completed and aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards an
207. ate approach angle is intercepted adjust the thrust control as necessary to establish and maintain the angle 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 71 Chapter 4 c As the apparent rate of closure appears to increase progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of closure to arrive at the touchdown area slightly above ETL At this point maintain the minimum rate of closure that ensures that the snow sand dust cloud remains behind the PI s station d When the wheels or skis contact the snow ground if conditions allow maintain landing attitude to dissipate forward speed then smoothly lower the thrust control to allow the forward landing gear to settle Effort should be made not to bury wheels or skis 3 Termination to the surface with no forward speed a This termination should be made to landing areas where slopes obstacles or unfamiliar terrain preclude a landing with forward speed b Itis not recommended when new or powder snow or fine dust is present because whiteout brownout conditions will occur c The termination is made directly to a reference point on the ground with no forward speed After ground contact smoothly lower the thrust control to the ground detent position and neutralize the flight controls Note Brakes set or released may be determined by the type of surface hard or soft during the reconnaissance d Packed surface area Thin layer of snow or dust on top of a hard sub surface with some visible terrain elements
208. ate common references 5 14 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4193 Perform Inflight Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given access to the applicable MTF manual CL with the before takeoff check complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Gr Gee Do not allow the airspeed to exceed 100 KIAS KCAS during the single AFCS DAFCS evaluation F MAN the thrust control during the TQ limiting check Properly clear the aircraft before making flight control or coupled FD inputs Throughout the DASH LOW RATE check NCM will be seated with seat belts fastened Perform rotor track and balance IAW the applicable TM DESCRIPTION 1 cy Crew actions a The MP will be on the flight controls and perform the AFCS DAFCS evaluation with the exception of the pedal separation check b F During the FD evaluation the RCM will have all flight controls while the MP select cues on the MED and enter commands on the CDU The MP will brief the RCM on selected FD cues command inputs and coupled axis c The RCM will maneuver the aircraft and make flight control inputs as directed by the MP The MP will MAN the thrust control during the TQ limiting check to prevent over TQ The MP will MAN the thrust control however the RCM has all the flight controls Procedures Perform IAW the applicable MTF manual and as follows a AFCS DAFCS E
209. bally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications XSMN OIL HOT caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Instructor Pilot Supplemental Information aa bb cc dd ee ff 88 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications ENG HOT START 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally state the PTIT is rising at an abnormal rate and smoke and flames are visible from the tail cone Residual fire during shutdown 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally state the PTIT is rising smoke and flames are visible from the tail cone APU fire 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Day only initiated on the ground with the ECLs in the ground position and the required ENG cool down met or before engine starting 3 FS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications ENG or fuselage fire flight 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D
210. by referencing aircraft attitude with the outside horizon and or HUD symbology The P will only momentarily divert focus during critical portions of the maneuver to ensure trim TQ and rotor control are maintained The P also will announce recovery from the maneuver c The P will maintain airspace surveillance and momentarily divert focus during critical portions of the maneuver to ensure trim TQ CGI control maneuver parameters or aircraft limitations are not exceeded The P will provide adequate warning to avoid enemy obstacles or traffic detected in the flight path and any deviation from the parameters of the maneuver The P will also announce when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit for example when monitoring airspeed altitude attitude or CGI Procedures Note Performing these maneuvers in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL a Decelerating turn The decelerating turn is used to rapidly change the direction of the aircraft at low level altitudes while trading airspeed energy to maintain safe operational altitude The angle of TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks bank forward airspeed GWT and environmental conditions at the initiation of the maneuver will determine the type amount of deceleration necessary to slow the aircraft to maintain altitude 1 During flight with lower forward airspeed typically below MAX R C airspeed the decel
211. by the Fire guard Posted Posted at the APU EMERG fluid shut off valve with access door open during the entire APU start sequence APU Start APU clear to start After APU is started NCMs post for ENG shutdown ENG COND levers Ground 1 and 2 clear to ground PO 88 on 1 and 2 Or other code as displayed on the DECU DECU shutdown BIT Check Refer to Note 2 digital display Aft CE visually looks at the aft head and Droop stops Engaged Droops are in confirms droop stop engagement ENG COND levers STOP Fire guard posted on 1 or 2 1 or One ENG ata time 2 clear to stop RAD ALTs OFF Off in the rear If the MWO is installed CE visually confirms all appropriate lights Maintenance panel Check Maintenance panel normal no latches and TEMPs and PRESS are normal APU Switch OFF APU clear off Aft CE monitors the APU for fire Note 1 The entire maintenance panel must be checked to include all lights latches gauges and indicators Note 2 For DECU checks verify 88 on 1 and 2 or other codes displayed on DECU when called for by the PI Note 3 During the ENG start sequence NCMs will monitor entire aircraft for unusual conditions such as smoke flames fluid leaks and vibrations by visually scanning all areas After the first ENG is stabilized at ground idle the AFT 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 11 Chapter 6 Table 6 5 CH 47D call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks
212. c Cross slope landings 1 With the aircraft heading cross slope the P will lower the thrust control until the upslope aft landing gear contacts the ground The P will maintain heading with the cyclic and pedals as required 2 The P will maintain pitch attitude by coordinating thrust control reduction with aft cyclic movement This will normally place the downslope aft landing gear in contact with the ground The P will coordinate the cyclic and pedals as necessary The P will continue to lower the thrust control until the forward landing gear is on the ground 3 The P will smoothly lower the thrust control to ground detent The P will then neutralize the controls while checking the stability of the aircraft 4 The P will perform the takeoff from the cross slope in the reverse sequence Note The LCT actuators will program to the GROUND position as soon as the aft landing gear contacts the ground and the landing gear proximity switches engage This may cause the aircraft to accelerate forward To prevent this acceleration the crew has two options The P may place the AFCS DAFCS cyclic trim switch to MANUAL and land with the LCT actuators in the RET position or extend the actuators to GROUND before conducting slope operations After landing with the LCTs in the RET position ensure the LCTs are placed to the GROUND position After departing the slope the P will return the AFCS DAFCS cyclic trim
213. call s your situation location action and request for assistance if desired e Continue to be alert for unusual control responses noises and vibrations f Monitor all instruments for an indication of a malfunction g Fly the aircraft to the nearest secure location and land h After landing inspect the aircraft to determine the extent of damage and if flight can be continued Note Proper employment of terrain flight techniques will reduce exposure to enemy threat weapon systems Note Threat elements will be harder to detect Rapid evasive maneuvers will be more hazardous due to division of attention and limited visibility Maintain SA with regard to threat and hazard location Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 At low ambient light levels obstacle detection is difficult The P may experience spatial disorientation if he or she executes abrupt maneuvers Proper scanning techniques and good cockpit communication are necessary to avoid these hazards 2 The crew should consider using artificial lighting if the ambient light level is insufficient for obstacle detection TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFEREN
214. cations or by pulling the REV CURR cut out CB CH 47D C 10 No 1 PDP or D 7 No 2 PDP CH 47F B 9 No 1 PDP or B 11 No 2 PDP 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications No 1 and No 2 RECT OFF cautions 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications BATT SYS MAL Cautions 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications No 1 or No 2 HYD FLT cautions TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Instructor Pilot Supplemental Information 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications rr No l and No 2 HYD FLT CONTR cautions 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications ss UTIL HYD SYS caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications tt E
215. cccceeeeseceeceeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeeeeseestneeeeees 4 141 Initial approach segment cece cece eeeeeee cece cece eeceeaeceeeeeeesenecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeees 4 142 MSA calculation formula ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeteesecencaeeeeeeeeeeencaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 142 Sample of emergency GPS diagram 00 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeenenas 4 143 Crew coordination principles ccccccceeseccececeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeseesencnaeeeeeeeseesenaees 6 2 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Contents Tables Table 2 1 Refresher flight training guide rated crewmember ccccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeaes 2 2 Table 2 2 Refresher flight training guide nonrated crewmember ceeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeenaes 2 2 Table 2 3 Rated crewmember base task list qualification refresher training 08 2 3 Table 2 4 Nonrated crewmember 15U base task list qualification refresher training 2 5 Table 2 5 Mission training task list rated nonrated crewmember 2 6 Table 2 6 Rated crewmember task list 0 0 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 2 9 Table 2 7 Nonrated crewmember 15U task list ec eeeeeeee ester ee eeneeeeeteeeeetneeeeeeeee 2 11 Table 2 8 Door gunner non crewmember task liSt ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 2 12 Table 2 9 Maintenance test pilot maintenance test flight evaluator task list 2 12 Table 4 1 Sample aircrew briefing che
216. ccsccccesedveveteccteee cute averse ctcecenddevusseecdeciweresetescteeteeeveeesses 6 1 Distribution Restriction approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication is superseded by TC 1 240 dated 24 October 2007 Contents 6 1 Aircrew Coordination Background and Planning Strategy 000 6 1 6 2 Aircrew Coordination Principles cccccceseeeseeeceeeeeseeeeesseeneeeeeeeneees 6 1 6 3 Aircrew Coordination Objectives csceccceseeeesssneeseseeeeeseeseneesenseseenes 6 4 6 4 Standard Crew Terminology seccccesseeneseseeeeesseneeeesesneeseseseeeeseesseensesesnenes 6 4 Appendix A NONRATED CREWMEMBER AND TRAINER TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION ioiei aean e oaen A a ANAE REEE VENEA ENEA SARANA EASAN ISIN AETAT A 1 Appendix B HEADS UP DISPLAY ccccscseeecseeeeeeeeeceeeeenseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeasseeeeeeessseenenseeeenens B 1 AppendixC INSTRUCTOR PILOT SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION ccs scecesssseeeeees C 1 GLOSSARY ar arsa arara Ea AAAA AEE EN AAFO AOSE ATER Glossary 1 REFERENCES ourde A References 1 e A E a A Index 1 Tasks Task 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 7 Task 1001 Administer flight evaluation eee etter ee enneee eee tiieee ee tiieeeeeteeeeetieeeeeenaa 4 10 Task 1002 Conduct a passenger Driefing 0 ccceeecseeeee sete eeeeeeeneeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 11 Task 1003 Conduct flight instructio
217. cent at the desired altitude f VMC Descending turns The P will lower the thrust control to initiate descent The P will adjust pedals to maintain aircraft in trim and apply cyclic in the desired direction of turn The P will adjust cyclic as required to stop turn at the desired heading The P will raise the thrust control to stop the descent at desired altitude g Traffic pattern flight 1 The P will maneuver the aircraft into position to enter the downwind leg midfield at a 45 degree angle or IAW local procedures at traffic pattern altitude and at the desired airspeed Alternate entries may be used if approved by ATC On downwind the P will complete the before landing check Before turning base the P will lower the thrust control and adjust airspeed as required and initiate a descent TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 If performing a straight in or a base leg entry the P will reduce airspeed at a point to facilitate the approach The P will turn base and final leg as appropriate to maintain the desired ground track The P will perform the desired approach The P will announce each turn in the pattern and the type of approach planned The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft throughout each turn in the traffic pattern 3 Fora closed traffic pattern after takeoff the P will climb straight ahead at climb airspeed to the appropriate altitude turn to crosswind and continue the climb The P
218. checks The RCM will announce all thrust control inputs made during the TQ differential check c F The NCM may be directed to assist with estimating movement as required during TRC and PHOLD checks Procedures Perform IAW the applicable MTF manual and as follows a Determine the wind azimuth using wind recognition cues Wx reporting facility or ATS b Mechanical rig check Maneuver the aircraft to a stabilized crosswind HVR with no drift When stabilized note the longitudinal stick position IAW the applicable MTF manual Longitudinal stick position during mechanical rig checks will be determined using only a tape measure in CH 47F while the stick position indicator or a tape measure may be used in CH 47D To ensure accurate measurements hold the tape measure on its side during mechanical rig cyclic measurements in CH 47F The flat edge of the tape measure should face left and right with the knife edge facing up and down If cyclic placard values used to determine mechanical rig in CH 47F longitudinal are suspected to be in error verify measurements with rigging fixtures as required IAW the appropriate IETM Using recorded stick position calculate corrections as required IAW the applicable IETM GWT and CG for the CH 47F may be determined from CAAS values as long as they verified accurate IAW the aircraft weight and balance record c Controls positions check For longitudinal measurements maneuver the aircraft to a stabilized crosswi
219. cket ERFS rescue hoist winch is required for the performance of the task equipment availability becomes part of the conditions e Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment f NVG use may be a condition for any flight task When NVG are listed as a condition task standards will be the same as those described for performance of the task without using NVG g The aircrew will not attempt the tasks or task elements listed below when performance planning and the HVR PWR check indicates that OGE PWR is not available AVAIL Task 1063 Perform External Sling Load s Operations Task 1170 Perform Instrument Takeoff Task 1408 Perform Terrain Flight Task 1411 Perform Terrain Flight Deceleration Task 2052 Perform Water Bucket Operations Task 2054 Perform Fast Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations Task 2056 Perform Rappelling Operations Task 2058 Perform Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration Operations Task 2059 Perform Rescue Hoist Winch Operations Task 2068 Perform Shipboard Operations Task 2076 Perform Caving Ladder Operations Task 2125 Perform Pinnacle Ridgeline Operations Task 2127 Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight Any task requiring hovering flight in OGE conditions h The following actions cannot be performed in the aircraft except in an actual emergency e Touchdown autorotation e Roll on landing to water e SE takeoff from the
220. cking information displayed on the MFDs and CDUs with planning information c During flight mission management tasks are completed as required d The aircraft state and status are continually monitored and adjusted by the mission manager e The mission manager navigates and verifies navigation system accuracy and ensures the aircraft remains on the established timeline as required f The FD solutions are evaluated and updated with accurate information g The P is provided with timely information to adjust the aircraft state speed heading and altitude to meet mission requirements h Aircraft sensors are utilized to update navigation systems aid navigation and assist in terrain avoidance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 41 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 42 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance WARNING While moving about the cabin area during flight the NCMs must be secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down fitting in the cabin area NCMs will not secure their restraining harness to the ramp CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under VMC STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to flight
221. cklist 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 7 Table 4 2 Sample nonrated crewmember briefing Checklist ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenes 4 9 Table 4 3 Example of crew briefing checklist for external sling load s procedures 4 79 Table 4 4 Words and phrases for external sling load s operations cc cere 4 80 Table 4 5 Suggested format for a crew level after action review checklist 8 4 119 Table 4 6 Multi aircraft operations briefing checklist 0 ecccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetneeeeeees 4 137 Table 4 7 Landing visibility minimums based on height above landing c eeeeeee 4 143 Table 4 8 Water bucket procedure QUuide cececeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeteneeeeeeneeeeesiieeeeetiaeeeees 4 151 Table 4 9 Example of a fast rope operations Checklist cccccceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseentenees 4 155 Table 4 10 Standard rappelling insertion terminology c cece eeeeeeeeetteeeeeetnteeeeteee 4 158 Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrase c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseaeeeeees 6 5 Table 6 2 Example of aircrew coordination Callout ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesensnsaeeneees 6 7 Table 6 3 Example of acceptable navigation statement c ccecsecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeees 6 7 Table 6 4 Example of properly sequenced and timed actions ccccceeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 6 8 Table 6 5 CH 47D ca
222. contribute to loss of visual cues SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Obscurants other than Wx can induce loss of visual contact At low altitudes where these conditions would be encountered it is extremely important that these procedures be initiated immediately to prevent ground contact 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 105 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 106 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1184 Respond to Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological Conditions CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under VMC or academically STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Announce IMC maintain proper aircraft control and make the transition to instrument flight immediately 2 Immediately initiate a climb 3 Continue IIMC recovery procedures as follows a Attitude Level the wings and adjust pitch for desired airspeed while maintaining the aircraft in trim b Heading Maintain heading turn only to avoid known obstacles c TQ Maintain climb PWR until reaching appropriate cruise altitude d Airspeed Adjust to appropriate climb airspeed e Altitude Climb to a minimum safe altitude as prescribed by DOD FLIP local regulation or SOP after establishing aircraft control 4 Contact ATC as require
223. controls do not return to the approximate original position the NCM will need to inspect the flight control closet to confirm any magnetic brake slippage while overriding control centering with the centering springs as required Balance spring settings may affect the controls returning to the approximate original trimmed position and should be considered in the above checks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 7 Chapter 5 TASK 4088 Perform Starting Engine Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the applicable MTF manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications F Set ECL to stop and perform alternate REV starting procedures as required IAW the appropriate operator s manual if REV start results in indications associated with a rich hung start 25 3 Physically man the ECL until the ENG has stabilized at ground idle during all ENG starts Conduct leak checks on ENGs with the lower ENG cowling lowered so the ENG may be viewed directly to identify leak sources 4 Check associated DECU ECU hexadecimal display prior to each ENG start procedure DESCRIPTION 5 8 1 Crew actions a The MP will personally perform the ABORT START ENG START primary PRI and REV
224. copter to a concealed area using the evasive techniques below and suppressive fire as required Choose a course of action that supports the mission and the intent of the unit commander s directives For additional information refer to Task 1412 c If engaged by the enemy the crew will announce the nature of the threat hostile fire or radar detection and the direction of the threat The crewmember that first identified the threat is responsible for announcing the threat bearing relative to the aircraft and launch countermeasures suppressive fire as necessary d The P will announce the direction of flight to deploy to cover and remain focused outside the aircraft during the evasive maneuver and clearing e Avoid over controlling excessive maneuvering that may result in loss of aircraft control or insufficient PWR to recover from the maneuver f The P and NCM will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and announce adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected during the evasive maneuver g The P will remain oriented on threat location The P will announce warnings to avoid obstacles when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft again when his or her attention is re established outside and will transmit a tactical report h The NCM will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and announce adequate warning to avoid obstacles The NCM will also provide suppressive fire as required Note The NCMs must be able to t
225. ct TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS In tactical environments without navigational aids the crew should consider flying a GPS route The GPS route can be the planned mission route with sufficient terrain obstacle clearance established in the event of IMC TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 108 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1188 Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter equipped with ASE or academically WARNING ASE systems when energized may cause thermal burns or other injuries to personnel that are too close to an active system Observe all operator s manual warnings and cautions Ensure CMWS or ASE variant safety pin is installed when ever aircraft is in a non hostile environment or in a position where inadvertent flare chaff launch may cause injury to personnel and or may cause destruction of equipment or property STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Describe the purpose of each installed item of ASE b Perform describe preflight inspection turn on test operation EPs and shutdown of installed ASE c Determine partial failure alternatives d Employ describe use of installed ASE 2 NCM a Prepare equipment for ope
226. curs the crewmember should announce loss of visual contact and transmit a call to the other aircraft in the formation TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training It is recommended that DES conduct initial training on trainers however units are authorized to Self start by training and evaluating crewmembers using conditions standards and the description as outlined in this task IPs and NCM instructors FIs will not train or evaluate this task until they have been successfully evaluated by an SP or SI as appropriate All other duty designations will be trained and evaluated by an SP IP or an SI FI prior to conducting this task Continuation training may be conducted by qualified crewmembers in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft Note Crewmembers will ensure that the appropriate authority has authorized this training Note Training combat maneuvering flight with AFCS DAFCS OFF is not authorized REFERENCES Appropriate common references Task 1000 Task 1010 Task 1026 Task 1044 Task 1052 Task 1188 Task 1402 Task 1404 Task 1406 Task 1408 Task 1410 Task 1411 Task 1413 Task 2010 Task 4 192 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2086 Task 2112 Task 2125 The Army Aviator s Handbook for Maneuvering Flight and Power Management TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and unit SOP 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 193 This page intentionally left blank 5 1 Chapt
227. d Comply with ATC instructions and complete the IMC recovery IAW local regulations and SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will announce INADVERTENT IMC immediately initiate a climb and establish aircraft control while transitioning to the instruments The P will immediately announce if he or she becomes disoriented lj The P may elect to use the GO AROUND button on the thrust control b The P will announce INADVERTENT IMC and monitor the cockpit instruments to assist in recovery The P will announce when the aircraft is in a positive climb the current altitude and altitude climbing to and the heading lj If using the FD the P will enter FD data as directed by the P c The P will adjust the transponder to EMERG adjust the navigational radio s as appropriate and make the appropriate radio calls The P will perform any other tasks as directed by the P and will always remain prepared to take the flight controls should the P become disoriented d The NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning for avoiding terrain or obstacles and will announce if VMC are encountered The NCM will perform any other tasks as directed by the P P Procedures a The crew should consider establishing a TQ and airspeed appropriate for the mission environment to use in the event of encountering IMC If briefed during the crew briefing this can help eliminate confusion during the actua
228. d TM 1 1500 328 23 Topics in this subject area are for MEs and MPs only Local airspace usage Engine start MTF Wx requirements MTF Forms and records Electrical system APU Power plant Powertrain Flight controls Fuel system Maintenance operational checks MOCs MTF requirements Power assurance checks PACs Communication and navigation equipment Instrument eects CAAS functionality and instrument indication Master caution panel j warning caution and advisory system indications Engine performance check Hydraulic systems flight and UTIL Vibrations AFCS DAFCS Hydraulic systems and leak detection isolation TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Evaluations 12 SP IP IE UT SI and FI evaluator trainer topics TC 3 04 11 and IP handbook Topics in this subject area are Learning process Effective communication Teaching methods Flight instruction techniques Human behavior Teaching process The instructor as a critic Planning instructional activity Instructional aides Critique and evaluation Techniques of flight instruction Effective questions Phase 3 Flight evaluation If this phase is required the following procedures apply 1 Briefing The evaluator will explain the flight evaluation procedure and brief the examinee in the tasks to be evaluated When evaluating an evaluator trainer the evaluator must advise the examinee that during role reversal the evaluator may delib
229. d ballistic corrections will be more critical for target suppression or destruction 2s When wearing NVGs during firing target loss may accrue momentarily due to muzzle blast and the brightness of the tracers 3 Utilizing a LASER will increase target acquisition and ballistic corrections TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and academically Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 3 04 140 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 187 Chapter 4 TASK 2125 Perform Pinnacle Ridgeline Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with the before landing check completed and HVR OGE PWR AVAIL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM actions a Correctly determine PWR requirements WT limitations before conducting this task b Cross major ridgelines at a 45 degree angle c Correctly determine wind direction for pinnacle landing d Maintain a constant approach angle e For transition from terrain flight align aircraft with landing direction below 100 feet or as appropriate f MAX rate of descent during the last 100 feet of a pinnacle approach will not exceed 300 FPM 2 NCM actions Assist in determining the suitability of the landing area for the operation being performed DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Determine PWR requirements 1 Use current forecast PA and TEMP
230. d by the aviation supporting unit The aviation unit will review U S Special Operations Command USSOCOM regulation 350 6 prior to conducting FRIES operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers in the cabin area are wearing a safety harness secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or static line anytime the door or ramp is open Also ensure that all ropers are on the ground before any ropes are released CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with FRIES equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM Conduct a thorough crew and passenger briefing Maintain entry altitude as directed 10 feet Maintain entry airspeed of 80 KIAS KCAS 5 KIAS KCAS Maintain track aligned with landing direction eo aos pe Performa smooth controlled termination to a HVR over the insertion point Deceleration attitude is not to exceed 20 degrees f Maintain appropriate HVR height 5 feet NCM Ensure that the aircraft is configured for FRIES operations IAW TC 21 24 DESCRIPTION K 4 154 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure that personnel are familiar with normal and EPs The PC will ensure that the aircraft is rigged b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and will announce when he or she begins the maneuver The P will also announce the intended point of i
231. d in Task 1010 Compute values within following parameters a Torque values 2 percent b Weight values 500 pounds c Fuel flow 100 pounds per hour d Airspeeds 5 knots 5 Correlate planning information to determine aircraft and mission capabilities DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will compute or direct other RCMs to compute or obtain the aircraft performance data required to complete the mission using one of the following procedures 1 The IPAC 2 Most current AMCOM approved electronic PPC software 3 Performance data computed using the appropriate operator s manual b The PC will verify the accuracy of the computations and ensure that aircraft performance meets mission requirements and that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded and brief the other crewmembers on the performance planning data c All missions will be planned to remain within the 30 MIN PWR limit for departure arrival and continuous CONT PWR limit for cruise If the pre mission planning figures exceed these values the mission profile will be reconfigured This does not preclude flight within additional time limited 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 17 Chapter 4 4 18 operations as limited by the appropriate operator s manual for events such as un forecasted environmental conditions or unplanned mission requirements For the purpose of this task cruise flight is defined as flight at a predetermined airspeed and altitude for
232. d mission planning station and software if available with this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 Conducting the flight in reduced visibility or at night requires more detailed and extensive flight planning and map preparation FM 3 04 203 contains details on night navigation NVG navigation with standard maps can be difficult because of map colors symbology and colored markers used during map preparation 2 Use proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 3 25 26 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 125 Chapter 4 TASK 1408 Perform Terrain Flight CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with tactical flight mission planning completed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Maintain altitude and airspeed appropriate for the selected mode of flight visibility and METT TC b Maintain aircraft in trim during contour and low level flight and when appropriate for NOE flight NCM Maintain constant scan of assigned sector DESCRIPTION 1 4 126 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and acknowledge all navigational and obstacle clearance instructions given by the P The P will announce the intended direction o
233. d should be considered while performing checks with swivel switch set to STEER and LOCK Visually verify swivel lock engagement prior to performing the taxi checks with swivel switch set to the LOCK position c Verify all required steps completed TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 11 Chapter 5 TASK 4113 Perform Before Hover Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given access to the applicable MTF manual CL with the before HVR check complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the addition modification 1 Direct the NCM to visually verify swivel lock engagement prior to performing ground instability check 2 During the FADEC system check do not allow the RRPM Ng to exceed 106 percent 3 Brief the RCM on aircraft handling characteristics while performing the FADEC system and REV mode beep checks DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The MP will perform the FADEC system checks ground instability checks and initial HVR flight control response checks The MP will brief the RCM on control inputs required during FADEC system checks and required actions if the aircraft becomes airborne The RCM will be at the controls and remain focused outside during the FADEC system checks and position the flight controls as direct
234. d the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Maintain heading alignment with the selected flight path b Maintain the aft rotor clear of all obstacles c Decelerate to the desired airspeed or to a full stop 2 NCM Maintain the tail clear of all obstacles DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will announce his or her intention to decelerate or come to a full stop any deviation from the maneuver and completion of the maneuver b The P and NCM will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path and will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit and again when attention is re established outside 2 Procedures a The P will initially raise the thrust control to maintain the altitude of the aft landing gear Thrust control application may not be necessary when initiation of the maneuver is at higher airspeeds b The P must consider variations in the terrain and obstacles when determining aft rotor clearance The P will apply aft cyclic to slow to the desired airspeed or come to a full stop while adjusting the thrust control to maintain the altitude of the aft landing gear c The P will maintain heading with the pedals and will make all control movements smoothly If the altitude of the aft landing gear increases during the deceleration the P may need to lower the thrust control
235. d to obtain longitudinal stick position measurements until the error is corrected i Flight control travel and HYDs check The MP will perform all checks in BOTH No 1 and No 2 systems IAW the appropriate MTF manual NCM will reference the maintenance panel to verify pressure indications as directed by the MP The RCM may check their flight controls for travel and binding after the MP completes all steps in the appropriate MTF manual and the HYD FLT CONTR switch has been set back to BOTH j Control interlocks check Control interlock is designed to prevent inadvertent selection of a non pressurized or non operational system Verify interlock between the flight control HYD systems exists with the following procedures The MP will direct assistance from the NCM to view flight control HYD PRESS indications on the maintenance panel Using the FLT CONT HYD SEL switch select either the No 1 ON or No 2 ON position Monitoring the selected flight control HYD system pressure place the associated PTU switch to OFF This will cause the HYD pressure in the selected system to decrease As the pressure continues to decrease note the pressure indicated when the opposite de selected FLT CONT HYD returns to normal operating pressure The pressure of the selected system at which the opposite de selected system returns to normal operating pressure shall be IAW the note in the appropriate MTF manual k Control centering check Verify flight co
236. dards and the following additions modifications 1 Preflight the NVGs 2 Mount and adjust NVGs 3 Identify or describe indications and procedures of NVG failure 4 Store unit after use IAW TM 11 5855 263 10 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Any crewmember will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft b After use ensure batteries are removed Store the unit IAW TM 11 5855 263 10 2 Procedures a Ensure the NVGs are within inspection dates and check for serviceability b Adjust for proper fit focus and diopter setting c Ifthe P s NVG fail or indicate impending failure the P will announce GOGGLE FAILURE and transfer the controls to the P if necessary During NOE or contour flight the P will begin a climb at a rate that will ensure obstacle avoidance During low level flight or flight conducted at higher altitude the P will use the procedure described above A climb is not required d Ifthe P or other crewmembers NVG fail or indicate impending failure that crewmember will announce GOGGLE FAILURE and switch batteries or troubleshoot the goggles If the NVG are not restored to operation make the appropriate report and modify the mission as briefed Note NVG tube failure is infrequent and usually provides ample warning Only occasionally will a tube fail completely in a short time Rarely will both tubes fail at the same time There is no remedy for inflight tube failure TRAINING AND
237. de and has arrived at the jump location the PC will give the cast master the command AT THE START LINE 5 The cast master will confirm the position airspeed and altitude are safe and give the command GET SET to the swimmers At the command GET SET the swimmers will position to the door or ramp area The cast master will then tap each swimmer on the shoulder and give the command GO On the command GO each swimmer will exit the aircraft IAW the instruction received during the safety briefing The cast master may also jump but must always exit last 6 After entering the water all swimmers will indicate that they are unhurt by raising one arm overhead The aircraft will not leave the area until all swimmers report no injuries The P will maintain heading altitude and airspeed until the last team member has exited the aircraft 7 After deployment the drop profile is terminated by increasing altitude and airspeed to the desired mode of flight Soft duck operations 1 The cast master and NCM will ensure that the aircraft is rigged IAW the unit s SOP 2 The approach should be made into the wind Approach speed is 80 KIAS KCAS MAX from the release point to the area of the drop site The approach is situation dependent and may be either a VMC or a terrain flight approach 3 Upon arrival at the drop site a progressive deceleration and descent will be initiated The cast master or NCM will give cor
238. dequate to complete the mission 10 Load mission data to the mission data card as required 11 Produce mission products AW unit SOP as required 12 Conduct a thorough crew mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC AMC will delegate mission tasks to crewmembers will have the overall responsibility for mission planning and will conduct a thorough crew mission briefing The PC AMC will analyze the mission in terms of METT TC b The P and NCM will perform the planning tasks directed by the PC AMC The P and NCM will report their planning results to the PC AMC 2 Procedures a Analyze the mission using the factors of METT TC b Conduct a map or an aerial photoreconnaissance c Obtain a thorough weather briefing that covers the entire mission include sunset and sunrise times density altitudes winds and visibility restrictions If it is to be a night mission the briefing would include moonset and moonrise times and ambient light levels if available d Determine primary and alternate routes terrain flight modes and movement techniques Determine time distance and fuel requirements using the navigational computer or Army approved mission planning station and software if available e Annotate the map or Army approved mission planning station and software if available with sufficient information to complete the mission IAW the unit s SOP This includes waypoint coordinates that define the entry routes
239. ditions at departure cruise and arrival a computer with the current integrated performance and aircraft configuration IPAC PPC software or a blank DA Form 5701 47 R CH 47 Performance Planning Card the appropriate aircraft operator s manual mission conditions and aircraft basic weight Note Performance planning will be completed prior to every mission The IPAC is the most accurate and preferred method for calculating performance data Note The AMCOM user s manual located under the Help Menu in the IPAC program provides instructions for using the IPAC This software may be obtained at the following website https www jtdi mil Note The IPAC PPC software or the charts in the appropriate AMCOM approved aircraft operator s manual CL must be used for performance planning STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Compute performance planning data using IPAC performance planning software or use TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and the descriptions below 2 Input the appropriate information into the software 3 Calculate the PPC values using accurate conditions for the time of takeoff within the following parameters a Free air temperature FAT 5 degrees Celsius b Pressure altitude PA 500 feet c GWT 500 pounds 4 When manual calculations are required calculate PPC values IAW the appropriate operator s manual and the instructions provide
240. dly locations must be considered prior to firing NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Threat elements will be harder to detect Crewmembers must maintain SA TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 90 FM 3 54 10 FM 3 04 140 and http www usaace army smil mil ttps approvedttp html 4 132 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1413 Perform Actions on Contact CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter in a tactical environment and given a tactical mission briefing and map with graphics and enemy contact STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus use the correct actions on contact consistent with the tactical situation 1 If appropriate immediately deploy to a covered and concealed position using suppressive fire 2 Use the correct actions on contact consistent with the observation as appropriate for the mission 3 Transmit tactical report IAW SOI the unit s SOP or mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions When engaged by or upon detecting the enemy the crewmember identifying the threat will announce the nature visual observation RAD detection or hostile fire and the direction of the threat a Proper pre mission planning and intelligence data may aid in developing flight profiles and route selection to avoid hostile fire b Fly the heli
241. e ENG or fuselage fire inflight 1B ENG XMSN hot lj ENG 1 or ENG 2 XMSN warning NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Take special precautions to identify the correct switches levers when performing EPs at night or while wearing NVG TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 89 Chapter 4 TASK 1077 Perform Procedures for Two Way Radio Failure CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an inoperative radio or in a classroom environment STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Implement procedures for two way radio failure 2 Correctly perform crew coordination actions DESCRIPTION 1 VFR a If two way radio failure occurs while operating under VFR or if VMC are encountered after the failure continue the flight VMC b Land as soon as practicable 2 IFR a If two way radio failure occurs while operating under IFR in the national airspace system adjust the transponder and continue the flight IAW instructions in the FIH b If two way radio failure occurs while operating under IFR outside continental of the U S CONUS comply with international civil aviation organization rules or applicable host country regulations TRAINING AND EVALUATIO
242. e distance unaided Weapons flash may temporarily impair or shut down NVDs Training and evaluation requirements Training and evaluation requirements define whether the task will be trained or evaluated in the aircraft FS TFPS or academic environment Listing aircraft FS TFPS under the evaluation requirements does not preclude the evaluator from evaluating elements of the task academically to determine depth of understanding or planning processes Some task procedures allow multiple ways to achieve the standards h References The references are sources of information relating to that particular task Certain references apply to many tasks In addition to the references listed with each task the following common references apply as indicated 1 All flight tasks tasks with APU ENGs operating a AR 95 1 b FM 3 04 203 c FM 1 230 d TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 240 MTF e TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL TM 1 1520 271 MTF f DOD FLIP g FAR Host country regulations b Unit local SOPs i Aircraft logbook 2 All instrument tasks a AR 95 1 b FM 3 04 240 c FAA H 8083 15 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 5 Chapter 4 4 2 4 6 d DOD FLIPs e Aeronautical information manual AIM f FARs host country regulations 3 All tasks with environmental considerations are address in FM 3 04 203 4 All tasks used in a tactical situation a TC 3 04 11 b TC 21 24 c FM 3 04 113
243. e 2 digital display Droop stops Engaged Droops are in AFT or FORWARD CE visually looks at the Aft head and confirms droop stop engagement ENG COND levers STOP Fire guard posted on 1 or 2 1 or One ENG ata time after 2 minute cool down 2 clear to stop Maintenance panel Check Maintenance panel normal CE visually confirms all appropriate lights and TEMPs and PRESS are normal APU Switch OFF APU Clear off AFT CE monitors the APU for fire Note 1 The entire maintenance panel must be checked to include all lights gauges and indicators HYDs The ramp CE must insure that all three HYD systems indicate normal PRESS and TEMP ranges fluid quantity levels are at the Full line verified visually with the linear variable differential transducer on the reservoir cooler and no filter change or pump fault lights are illuminated PWR Train Prior to testing no CHIP DEBRIS or TEMP HI High should be illuminated At this time only the PRESS LO Low MAIN PRESS LO and AUX PRESS LO lights should be illuminated Ground contact The LH ground CONT and RH ground CONT indicating lights should be illuminated anytime the aircraft is on the ground in a WT on wheels condition Note 2 For DECU checks verify 88 on 1 and 2 or other codes displayed on DECU when called for by the PI Note 3 During the ENG start sequence NCMs will monitor entire aircraft for unusual conditions such as smoke flames fluid leaks vibrations by visually
244. e GWT for the mission profile item 42 Calculate the same as in item 41 b Cruise data CAUTION Strict compliance with the airspeed limitations provided in TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 figures 5 3 and 5 8 is required regardless of cruise guide indicator CGI operational status In addition adherence to inflight cruise guide limitations shall also be maintained Item 44 AIRSPEED LIMIT no LOAD This limitation will be either a structure limit or a blade compressibility limit as described in chapter 5 of the appropriate operator s manual Using the airspeed operating limits chart record the MAX airspeed for forecast cruise conditions If the planned GWT is not intercepted then refer to the MAX GWT for planned conditions chart and adjust the planned GWT accordingly This chart is located in chapter 5 of the appropriate operator s manual Item 45 AIRSPEED LIMIT with a LOAD Refer to item 44 for definition Using the airspeed operating limits chart record the MAX AIRSPEED for forecast cruise conditions If the planned GWT is not intercepted then refer to the MAX GWT for planned conditions chart and adjust the planned GWT accordingly Item 46 LONGITUDINAL CYCLIC TRIM LCT RETRACTED RET Velocity Never Exceed VNE no LOAD Limitation based on the LCT actuator s failed in the RET position With the LCTs failed in the RET position there is no cyclic feathering introduced which may cause excessive blade flapping along with an
245. e appropriate operator s manual CL the unit s SOP and for the designated duty position DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC is responsible for ensuring that a preflight inspection is conducted using the appropriate operator s manual CL The PC may direct other crewmembers to complete elements of the preflight inspection as applicable and will verify that all checks have been completed IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL The PC will expediently report any aircraft discrepancies that may affect the mission and will ensure that the appropriate information is entered DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 IAW DA PAM 738 751 b The crewmembers will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC 2 Procedures a The NCM will ensure that the aircraft is prepared for preflight The NCM will ensure the aircraft is properly serviced special equipment is installed entries in the aircraft logbook DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 IAW DA Pam 738 751 are current and correct and covers and tie downs are removed The PC will verify that all preflight checks have been completed and ensure that the crewmembers enter the appropriate information on the appropriate forms The NCM will secure all pre loaded cargo b As applicable the PC will ensure that all pertinent data has been loaded into the aircraft such as COMSEC fills GPS keys waypoints and FMs c If circumsta
246. e load plan if applicable and complete all before flight inflight and preflight duties AW appropriate publications b Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded c Secure passengers and cargo d NCMs will be familiar with EPs for FARP operation and tactical shutdown procedures AW appropriate publications DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers and support personnel are familiar with FARP operations EMERG and communication procedures The PC will confirm that required PWR is AVAIL by comparing the information from the PPC to the HVR PWR check b The PC will ensure that a preflight of the FARP system is conducted before flight and all equipment is available c The P will assist in marshaling and fireguard duties and any other duty that the PC assigns d The FE is responsible for safely loading the aircraft before mission and unloading it after the aircraft is shut down The FE also controls the fuel flow from inside the aircraft In addition the FE is responsible for cutting the fuel supply from inside the aircraft in case of a mishap or an EMERG e The CE will assist in setting up the refueling points and with marshalling and fireguard duties f The petroleum oil lubricants POL handlers are responsible for setting up the FARP and the actual refueling operation POL handlers will be the only individuals allowed to start the pumps g Aircraft internal fuel tan
247. e operators manual to lower PTIT before performing a REV start This motoring action will reduce residual PTIT and may reduce the likelihood of a hot start If indications of a rich hung or hot start are encountered during the REV start procedure abort the start by setting the associated ECL to stop and perform alternate REV starting procedures as required IAW the appropriate operator s manual c OVSPD Check With both ENGs at ground idle slowly move the ECL of the ENG that requires the OVSPD check from ground towards FLT until RRPM Ng is 79 percent While advancing the ECL verify the ENG passes through 70 percent N Ng to check ENG XMSN clutch engagement Setting the N Ng near 79 percent initially may be helpful in achieving 79 percent RRPM Nk Using both the index finger and the thumb while operating the OVSPD switch will ensure positive control and help to prevent inadvertently releasing of the switch With RRPM Ng set to 79 percent place the OVSPD switch to 1 or 2 as required and hold it in position Verify fuel flow indications decrease to approximately 300 pounds per hour indicating the OVSPD solenoid is in the CLOSED position and reducing fuel flow Monitor TQ N N lt PTIT for abnormal indications Continue to hold the OVSPD switch until fuel flow begins to increase indicating the OVSPD solenoid is beginning to RE OPEN When the increase in fuel flow is noted place the ECL of the ENG being checked to STOP and releas
248. e preflight as appropriate The RCM will complete the assigned elements and report results to the MP The MP will ensure all preflight checks have been completed c The MP will ensure logbook forms and records are reviewed and appropriate entries made AW DA PAM 738 751 and applicable TMs d The MP will determine checks necessary during the preflight and brief the crew on what checks are to be accomplished during the TF The briefing will include required procedures and stress flight safety considerations during the TF maneuvers that will be performed Procedures Perform IAW the applicable MTF manual and as follows a Conduct GMTF IAW the appropriate MTF manual and LMTF IAW the appropriate MTF manual and operators CL b The MP should direct assistance from the RCM and NCM The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed Since the checks are detailed with numerous steps required the MP RCM and NCM will keep the other crewmembers informed of the actions they are taking c Record data as required for checks to be performed Direct assistance from the RCM or NCM for recording of information as required d Verify all required steps are completed TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 4 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4081 Perform Before Sta
249. e prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation 1 For unaided night flight the landing light and searchlight should be operational If a NVG filter is installed it should be removed 2 When NVGs are used hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and crewmember coordination If possible use an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points 3 Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles 4 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during nighttime overwater operations If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the PI may opt to approach the survivor s so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable HVR
250. e surrounding airspace 1 Keep the aircraft clear from other aircraft and obstacles by maintaining visual surveillance close middle and far areas of the surrounding airspace 2 Inform the crew immediately of air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft Call out the location of traffic or obstacles by the clock altitude and distance method The 12 o clock position is at the nose of the aircraft 3 Give distance in miles or fractions of miles for air traffic and in feet for ground obstacles as appropriate When reporting air traffic specify the type of aircraft fixed wing or helicopter and if known the model The altitude of the air traffic should be reported as the same altitude higher or lower than the altitude at which you are flying b Prior to changing altitude visually and verbally clear the aircraft for hazards and obstacles inclusive of what is ahead above to the left and to the right of the aircraft 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 43 Chapter 4 c Prior to performing a descending flight maneuver it may sometimes be desirable to perform a clearing S turn to the left or right The clearing S turns will provide the aircrew with a greater visual scan area d During a HVR or hovering flight inform the P of unannounced drift or altitude changes When landing the crew will confirm the suitability of the area NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS The use of proper scanning techniques wi
251. e task to meet the standards This manual cannot address all situations therefore alternate procedures may be required Other techniques may be used as long as the task is accomplished safely and the standards are met The description applies in all modes of flight during day night IMC NVG or CBRNE operations When specific crew actions are required the task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as follows 1 Crew actions These define the portions of a task performed by each crewmember to ensure safe efficient and effective task execution The designations Pilot on the controls P and Pilot not on the controls P do not refer to PC duties When required PC responsibilities are specified For all tasks the following responsibilities apply a All crewmembers perform crew coordination actions announce malfunctions or emergency conditions monitors engines systems operations and avionics navigation communication as necessary During VMC crewmembers will focus attention primarily outside the aircraft maintain airspace surveillance and clear the aircraft Provide timely warning of traffic and obstacles by announcing the type of hazard direction distance and altitude relative to the aircraft Crewmembers also announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft except for momentary scans and announce when attention is focused outside the aircraft b PC The PC is responsible for the conduct of the
252. e that personnel are familiar with normal and EPs NCM will verify rope lengths with supportive unit and inform the PC NCM will inspect rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured properly for rappelling operations PC confirms the ropes are rigged properly 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 157 Chapter 4 b P remains focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and will announce when he or she begins the maneuver P will also announce the intended point of insertion and pass the rappelling execution command to the NCMs c P and NCM assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles The P NCM will also assist P in maintaining a stable HVR d NCMs will determine who will make specific calls and inform the PIs normally right ramp makes primary calls NCMs will be responsible for passing the 10 6 3 and 1 minute calls The right ramp usually will be responsible for making the primary rope calls e NCMs will use pre established procedures and communications including hand and arm signals with the FRM NCMs will deploy release or retrieve the ropes f NCMs will inform PC once all ropes are clear of the aircraft have been retrieved back into the aircraft or are secure during elevator training 2 Procedures a Ten minutes before ETA the P will announce TEN MINUTES OUT Each NCM or rope master will inform the passengers at his or her station of the timed call and announce wh
253. e the OVSPD switch Ensure the OVSPD switch is released only after the ECL is set to STOP TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks Verify ENG shutdown from cockpit indications and the NCM After ENG shutdown is verified slowly move the ECL of the opposite ENG from GROUND towards FLT and set as required for the OVSPD check or to maintain RRPM Np above 45 percent as IAW the MTF d Verify all required steps are completed 3 Crew stations The MP must be in the left seat for ABORT START PRIMARY START REV START and OVSPD checks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 9 Chapter 5 TASK 4110 Perform Engine Run Up Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the applicable MTF manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 2 During the GEN under frequency check do not allow RRPM Ng into 82 to 85 percent range Perform ENG power train vibration checks or rotor track and balance IAW the applicable TM DESCRIPTION 1 2 Crew actions The MP will personally perform the GEN under frequency checks Procedures Perform IAW the applicable MTF manual CL and as follows a When performing ENG vibration analysis the aircraft may become light o
254. e threat source and attempt to keep the threat system to the right rear or left rear of aircraft and simultaneously dispense chaff Attempt to keep the chaff cloud between the aircraft and the threat source Once chaff is dispensed turn the aircraft to maneuver away from the chaff cloud and continue to chaff and turn until the aircraft is masked 6 Anti tank guided missiles Some missiles fly relatively slowly and are avoidable by rapidly repositioning the helicopter If terrain or vegetation is unavailable for masking remain oriented on the missile as it approaches As the missile is about to impact rapidly change flight path or altitude to evade it 7 Artillery Depart the impact area and determine CBRNE requirements Note Dispensing chaff while maneuvering may cause tracking radars to break lock After successfully deploying to cover the crew will 1 Report the situation 2 Develop the situation 3 Choose a course of action if not directed by the unit commander The P P will announce the unit commander s directive if not monitored by the other crewmember 4 Ifhit by hostile fire rapidly assess the situation and determine an appropriate course of action a Assess aircraft controllability b Check all instruments and warning and caution lights If a malfunction is IND initiate the appropriate EP TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks c Ifcontinued flight is possible take evasive action d Radio
255. e up communication panels 1 2 3 Tells the other crewmember to place a frequency in a specific radio Release Command for the planned or expected release of an external sling load s Remington No ordnance remaining except gun or self protect ammunition Report Command to notify Roger Message received and understood Say again Repeat your transmission Slide Intentional horizontal movement of an aircraft perpendicular to its heading will be followed by the word RIGHT or LEFT Slow down Command to reduce ground speed Speed up Command to increase ground speed 1 A S Weapons impact 2 surface to surface Informative call to OR spotter five seconds prior to Splash estimated time of impact 3 Air to air target destroyed Stand by Wait duties of a higher priority are being performed and request cannot be complied with at this time TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Command to go no further halt present action Stop Strobe Indicates that the aircraft AN APR 39 has detected a radar threat will be followed by a clock direction Sighting of a target non friendly aircraft enemy position landmark traffic or obstruction positively seen or identified will be followed by a repeat of the word TARGET TRAFFIC or OBSTRUCTION and the clock position Opposite of No Joy Tally Target Terminate An alert that a ground threat
256. e water or on the ground OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references ladder AWR and TC 3 05 212 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 177 Chapter 4 TASK 2078 Perform Helocast Soft Duck Operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers and the cast master in the cabin area are wearing a safety harness secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring anytime the doo
257. ed by the MP 2 Procedures Perform IAW the appropriate MTF manual as follows a Ground instability check With the parking brake set and swivels visually verified locked and engaged apply up to 2 inches of aft cyclic and increase thrust control as required to lift the forward gear off the ground If the wheel brakes do not hold initially lower the thrust control and place the forward gear on the ground reset the wheel brakes and attempt the maneuver again Check for stability and correct response in each axis one at a time using small and smooth flight control inputs Once stability and correct response is verified lower the forward gear to the ground and neutralize flight controls b FADEC system and REV Mode beep check With aircraft stable on the ground and flight controls neutralized perform steps AW the appropriate MTF manual When the thrust control and RRPM Nz is increased during the REV mode beep check the aircraft may become light on the wheels or even airborne MANUAL programming of the LCTs may be required due to thrust control positions and RRPM Ng settings If MANUAL programming is utilized place LCTs back to AUTO mode prior to initial takeoff to HVR If the aircraft does become airborne the RCM will control the aircraft and land the aircraft as directed by the MP c Verify all required steps are completed Crew stations The MP will be in the left seat for the ground instability and FADEC system check
258. eeeeeeeeesescaaeeeeeeeeesecsncaeeeeees 4 74 Task 1063 Perform external sling load s Operations 0 0 0 eeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 77 Task 1064 Perform a roll on landing 0 cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeete eect eeneeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeeetnaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 83 Task 1068 Perform Go Aroun 0 cccceeceee sence AEE ERA 4 86 Task 1070 Respond to CMErgencies ccccecececeececeeeteee niian aiae iai 4 88 Task 1077 Perform procedures for two way radio failure 0 eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenteeeeeeaas 4 90 Task 1094 B Perform flight with advanced flight control system j digital advance flight Control SYStem Off resies iiaiai oiaoi vias Abend ea E aeiaai 4 91 Task 1162 Perform emergency egresS ecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenneee testes seeteeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 92 Task 1166 Perform instrument maneuvers eee eeeee eee ette eect eeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeetnaeeeeeeaaes 4 94 Task 1167 j Perform instrument maneuvers using standby flight display 000000 4 96 Task 1170 Perform instrument takeoff 0 ec cece etter erent ee eee tees ee teeeeeteeeeetnieeeerenae 4 97 Task 1174 Perform holding procedures c ceecccceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeseneeeeneaas 4 99 Task 1176 Perform non precision approach cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeetetsenaees 4 100 Task 1178 Perform precision approach ccececeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseetenseeaeeeeeeetetensaees 4 102 Task 1
259. efore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS During ascent to a HVR if visual references do not deteriorate to an unacceptable level continue ascent to the desired HVR altitude 1 Ten foot HVR taxi During takeoff to a HVR simultaneously accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed that keeps the snow sand dust cloud just aft of the cabin door 2 Ten foot HVR taxi If visual references are expected to be significantly degraded use the HVR symbology Task 1039 and conduct with TRC PHOLD radar altimeter RAD ALT or inertial ALT hold selected During takeoff to a HVR simultaneously accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed that keeps the snow sand dust cloud just aft of the cabin door Note Maintain optimum visibility by observing references close to the aircraft Exercise caution when operating in close proximity to other aircraft or obstacles Note When visual references deteriorate making a 10 foot HVR taxi unsafe determine whether to abort the maneuver ground taxi air taxi or perform an ITO Task 1170 3 Twenty foot to 100 foot air taxi Use this maneuver when it is necessary to move the aircraft over terrain that is unsuitable for HVR taxi Initiate air taxi the same as a 10 foot HVR but increase altitude normally not more than 100 feet and accelerate to a safe airspeed appropriate for conditions Note Ensure an area is available to safely decelerate and la
260. ehavior and terminology Hook up and HVR 1 Maintain vertical ascent heading 10 degrees 2 Maintain altitude of load 10 feet AGL 3 feet 3 Complete HVR PWR checks En route maintain load obstacle clearance minimum 50 feet AHO Approach and water release 1 Evaluate fire simulated fire for flight path and altitude requirements 2 Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure that load safely clears obstacles 3 Maintain ground track alignment with selected approach path 4 Execute a smooth and controlled pass or termination over the intended point area of water drop 5 Deploy water as directed in proper location orientation and or length NCM TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks a In conjunction with RCMs complete required water bucket checks to ensure proper system operation before mission departure and attach water bucket to the aircraft b Ensure that water bucket is configured for the condition and mode of flight c Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction d Demonstrate knowledge of fire behavior and terminology DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough crew external sling load s and water bucket briefing The PC will ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with water bucket operations and EMERG and communication procedures The PC will ensure that DA Form 7382 has been completed The PC will confirm that required PWR is availab
261. em 34 Item 111 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE SE no LOAD Refer to item 35 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the predicted TQ required to HVR OGE Refer to item 33 Note For TEMPs below 0 degrees C double the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT value DUAL ENG and add the derived value to the predicted HVR TQ value SE This value will be added to all predicted HVR SE calculations Item 112 REDICTED HVR TQ IGE SE with a LOAD Refer to item 36 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the predicted TQ required to HVR at a height that will place the load s approximately 10 feet AGL and IGE If the required PWR exceeds the MAX SE TQ AVAIL enter UA Refer to item 36 Item 113 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE SE with a LOAD Refer to item 37 for definition Using the HVR chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the predicted TQ required to HVR SE OGE Compare SE contingency PWR AVAIL item 77 to determine if sufficient PWR is AVAIL to HVR SE OGE If the required PWR to HVR SE OGE exceeds the MAX SE TQ AVAIL item 86 enter UA Refer to item 37 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCE Appropriate common references TM 1 1520 240 10 and TM 1 1520 271 10 4 30 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1012 Compute Aircraft Weight and Balance CONDITIONS Gi
262. emainder of the formation will continue to follow lead The crewmember who has lost visual contact will announce his or her position relative to the same waypoint or rally point RP to assist in reorientation to the flight This procedure will continue until the formation is reoriented and joined 2 Considerations should include but are not limited to rallying to a known point use of covert overt lighting and ground rally METT TC PWR AVAIL and ambient light will influence how contact is re established 3 Situations may occur when an aircraft rejoins the flight in another position than briefed Only after the entire flight is formed can the mission commander proceed with the mission d Aircrew briefing All multi aircraft operations will be briefed using a unit approved multi aircraft mission briefing CL Table 4 6 provides a CL of mandatory briefing items that must be included in all multi aircraft operations briefings Table 4 6 Multi aircraft operations briefing checklist Formation type s takeoff cruise and approach Altitude Airspeed outbound to RP cruise inbound from SP Aircraft lighting Loss communication s procedures Lead change procedures Loss of visual contact inflight link up rally points Actions on contact IIMC procedures 0 Downed aircraft procedures personnel recovery CSAR c oa N a wn 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 137 Chapter 4 NIGHT O
263. en the station is ready AFT READY FORWARD READY The same procedures will be conducted at the 6 3 and 1 minute timed calls At night the NCMs at each station will break the chemlights attached to the ropes by the 6 minute call b When the objective is sighted and the P judges that he or she can initiate the maneuver to stop at a stabilized HVR over the target point the P will apply aft cyclic and adjust thrust control as necessary to stabilize at a HVR over the intended target If the closure rate to the intended HVR point is too fast the P may adjust the aircraft attitude but will not exceed 20 degrees nose high Maintain appropriate roping height 5 feet The P should call out aircraft parameters attitude and RAD height during the maneuver NCMs will get into roping position by 1 minute out c When stabilized at a HVR the right ramp should announce OVER THE TARGET the P will call ROPES ROPES ROPES The NCM at each station will deploy direct or help ropes when the ropes have been deployed The right ramp should announce AFT ROPES OUT if applicable and the right gun will announce FORWARD ROPES OUT if applicable when personnel equipment exits the aircraft The right ramp should announce AFT ROPING IN PROGRESS the forward CE will announce FORWARD ROPING IN PROGRESS if applicable Although all NCMs are responsible for maintaining the aircraft at a stabilized HVR with minimum drift
264. er 5 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks This chapter describes the tasks essential for maintaining maintenance crewmember skills It defines the task title number conditions and standards by which performance is measured A description of crew actions along with training and evaluation requirements is also provided This chapter contains tasks to be performed by qualified CH 47 MP IAW AR 95 1 and chapter 2 of this document This chapter also contains tasks and procedures to be used by contractor MPs IAW AR 95 20 If discrepancies are found between this chapter and TM 1 1520 240 MTF or TM 1 1520 271 MTF the TM takes precedence TASK CONTENTS a Task number Each ATM task is identified by a 10 digit SAT number The first three digits of each task are 011 U S Army Aviation School or 096 EAATS the second three digits are 240 or 271 CH 47D or F cargo helicopter For convenience only the last four digits are listed in this TC The last four digits correspond to the MP tasks listed in table 2 9 page 2 14 e Base tasks are 1000 series numbers e Mission tasks are 2000 series numbers e Maintenance tasks are 4000 series numbers Note Additional tasks designated by the commander as mission essential are not included in this ATM The commander will develop conditions standards and descriptions for those additional tasks b Task title This identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity Task titles may be the same in many ATMs but t
265. er check MPC must be performed using MPC values If N Ng or PTIT values are exceeded before reaching target TQ during the MPC the ENG has failed the PAC If engine indications are suspected to be in error DECU ECU engine values may be verified by use of a SPORT or MSD computer This may assist in determining whether the engine is not meeting performance requirements versus engine instrument indication errors An example would be an N Ng being above charted limits with PTIT showing below charted limits c Under some conditions the ECL may reach ground before target TQ is achieved on the ENG being PACed If the ECL does reach ground while trying to achieve target TQ verify the ENG is stable at ground idle With the ECL at ground prior to reaching the target TQ setting increase the thrust control as required to obtain the required TQ setting while monitoring N Ng and PTIT This increase in thrust control will cause the aircraft altitude to increase In order to maintain a constant pressure altitude direct the RCM to increase airspeed as required to maintain the desired altitude With the aircraft stabilized at the pre selected altitude and the ENG stabilized at the required target TQ setting note and call out TQ Nj Ng PTIT and fuel flow indications on the ENG being PACed TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks f After the readings have been taken on the ENG being PACed slowly advance the ECL of the ENG not being PACed
266. erately perform some tasks outside standards to check the examinee s diagnostic and corrective action skills The evaluator will conduct or have the examinee conduct a crew briefing IAW Task 1000 and the unit s approved aircrew briefing CL 2 Preventive maintenance daily PMD preflight inspection Eng start run up procedures ENG ground operations and before takeoff checks The evaluator will evaluate the examinee s use of TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 240 MTF TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL TM 1 1520 271 MTF and IETM related maintenance publications as appropriate The evaluator will have the examinee identify and discuss the function of at least two aircraft systems 3 Flight tasks At a minimum the evaluator will evaluate those tasks designated by this ATM tasks listed on the CTL as mandatory for the designated crew station s for the type of evaluation the evaluator is conducting and those mission additional tasks selected by the commander During the APART instrument evaluation one approach must be performed coupled and one approach un coupled for CH 47F RCMs In addition to the commander selected tasks the evaluator may evaluate any task performed during the evaluation as long as the task is listed on the crewmember s CTL An IP SP ME IE UT FI and SI must demonstrate an ability to instruct and evaluate appropriate flight tasks At a minimum under Task 1070 the following EPs must be conducted during this
267. eration will require an increase of thrust control resulting in an increase in TQ While at airspeeds greater than MAX RIC the airspeed may be traded off while adjusting thrust control to maintain TQ within limits and maintain altitude 2 Maneuver is typically initiated at airspeeds of 120 to 130 KIAS KCAS to effect a direction change while maintaining altitude For initial training enter the maneuver at 110 KIAS KCAS and the appropriate TQ Apply directional cyclic to initiate turn As aircraft begins to move about the roll axis apply aft cyclic as necessary to maintain altitude by trading airspeed Apply pedal as necessary to obtain the appropriate rate of turn Adjust thrust control as necessary to maintain altitude and rotor within limits consistent TQ 15 percent of target To recover apply opposite and forward cyclic while applying opposite pedal and adjusting thrust control to maintain TQ within limits as the rotor system unloads Note For initial training enter the maneuver at 110 KIAS KCAS and appropriate TQ Also do not exceed cruise TQ setting throughout the maneuver to operating at MAX TQ AVAIL b Break turn The break turn is used at terrain and cruise flight altitudes to rapidly change the direction of the helicopter while maintaining or gaining airspeed As altitude allows this turn also enables a simultaneous three axis change of position and direction This maneuver is effective when performing evasive maneuver against
268. erform Non Precision Approach CONDITIONS In a CH 47 helicopter or simulator under IMC or simulated IMC with reference to instruments only given approach information and appropriate clearance with the before landing checks complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Execute the approach IAW AR 95 1 applicable AWRs FM 3 04 240 and DOD FLIP 2 For RNAV GPS approaches properly configure RNAV GPS equipment select an appropriate approach from a current and approved navigation database and maintain the course centerlilne within the appropriate RNAV limits for each segment of the approach 2 dot course deviation indicator CDI deflection 3 For nondirectional beacon NDB very high frequency omnidirectional range VOR or tactical air navigation TACAN approaches maintain course centerline 5 degrees 1 dot CDI deflection 4 For localizer approaches maintain course centerline 2 5 degrees 2 dot deflection 5 During airport surveillance radar ASR approaches make immediate heading and altitude changes issued by ATC and maintain heading 5 degrees 6 Comply with descent minimums prescribed for the approach 7 F For flight director operations select the correct lateral navigator and appropriate vertical and longitudinal cues 8 Perform the appropriate missed approach procedure per DOD FLIP or ATC instruction upon reaching the missed approach point MAP
269. es to assist in avoiding traffic and obstacles 1 NOE Flight Perform NOE flight at varying airspeeds and altitudes as close to the earth s surface as vegetation obstacles and ambient light permit 2 Contour flight Perform contour flight by varying altitude and while maintaining a relatively constant airspeed depending on the vegetation obstacles and ambient light Generally follow the contours of the earth 3 Low level flight Perform low level flight at a constant airspeed and altitude To prevent or reduce the chance of detection by enemy forces fly at the minimum safe altitude that will allow a constant altitude Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL Note Terrain flight is considered sustained flight below 200 feet AGL except during takeoff and landing TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 When wearing NVGs the P will not exceed 40 KIAS KCAS when flying at or below 25 feet AHO Between 25 feet and 80 feet AHO the P will not exceed 70 KIAS KCAS Above 80 feet AHO the P may use any airspeed up to Vye 2 Wires are difficult to detect with the NVG 3 Use proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance 4 During NVG terrain flight observe the NVG speed and altitude restrictions in TC 3 04 11 OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear flo
270. etermine if aircraft performance is sufficient to complete the mission 6 Determine if sufficient fuel exist to complete the mission 7 Ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission and will ensure that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded b The P will announce his or her intent to bring the aircraft to a stationary HVR for a HVR PWR check 1 During the ascent check for proper CG and control response 2 Remain focused outside the aircraft and announce when the aircraft is stabilized at the desired HVR altitude 3 Use a 10 foot stationary HVR near the takeoff point and in direction of takeoff when performing a HVR PWR check unless mission or terrain constraints dictate otherwise 4 If different HVR height is required use that height during performance planning to compute GO NO GO TQ validation factor TQ and predicted HVR TQ During the ascent the P will monitor the TQ 1 If validation factor is approached before reaching desired HVR height the P will announce this in enough time so the P can take appropriate action 2 The P will monitor the aircraft instruments note ENG gas producer speed N engine speed No PTITs ENG oil TEMPs ENG oil pressures PRESS and determine if sufficient fuel is available to complete the mission and verify the PWR check 3 The P will compare the actual HVR pe
271. ets restraint criteria DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC with FE assistance will formulate a load plan ensure that a DD Form 365 4 is verified if required and ensure that the aircraft will be within GWT and CG limits The PC will ensure that the crew loads the cargo uses proper tie down procedures and complete a passengers briefing as required The PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission and will ensure that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded b The P will perform a HVR PWR check before takeoff and ensure the MAX allowable GWT of the aircraft is not exceeded c The NCM will complete a passenger briefing as directed and ensure that passengers are seated and wearing seatbelts prior to takeoff IAW AR 95 1 The NCM will monitor passengers cargo during the flight for security 2 Procedures a Load cargo IAW the cargo plan or DD Form 365 4 as appropriate Properly secure and restrain all cargo to meet restraint criteria IAW the appropriate manuals For additional information refer to Task 1012 b Brief passengers for the flight and seat them IAW the load plan or DD Form 365 4 as appropriate Conduct the briefing IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL unit SOP and information about the mission Ensure that the passengers understand each element of the briefing 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 35 Chapter 4 Note If the aircraft is not shutdown for loading a passenger briefin
272. euver in this ATM may be conducted with the AFCS DAFCS OFF except for those items listed in paragraph 4 1c 2 h The standards for the maneuvers are the same as with the AFCS DAFCS ON When conducting training flights with AFCS DAFCS OFF the flight should be restricted to essential personnel only RCM proficiency must be considered when tasks are selected for performance with the AFCS DAFCS OFF NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS To aid in preventing spatial disorientation do not make large or abrupt attitude changes TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 91 Chapter 4 TASK 1162 Perform Emergency Egress WARNING Removing an injured crewmember or passenger may increase the severity of the injuries Analyze the risk of additional injury versus the risk of leaving the crewmember or passenger in the aircraft until assistance arrives CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards plus the following additions modifications 1 Perform or describe using EMERG exits on the aircraft IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 3 Perform or describe the EMERG egress of a PI NCM or passenger from his or her seat Perform or describe the EMERG ENG shutdown of the aircraft AW the appropriate a
273. euvers a E A170 Performinstrument Takeoff h ara PerformHolding Procedures Th l St TaS i R E Perform an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedures A R ES 1104 respon to advert strument Netopia conditons x x x fs ne 1186 Operate Arcra Survvabiiy Eime O o Js 1190 Perormidentiy Hand andar Sos o oo oo 1194 Perform Refusing operos o J ae Common Avionics Architecture System Central Display Unit Multi function Display Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review OOo xo S 7 NG Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning Pp Ss 1404 Perform Electronic Countermeasures Electronic Counter S NG Countermeasures Procedures pet ron in Ta 1406 PertormTerrain Fight l x SN att Pevorn Tarin Fight Dessontion Tx Tana 413 Perform Actions on Contact dt x S TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Training Table 2 7 Nonrated crewmember 15U task list Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight These tasks do not need to be evaluated during the standardization evaluation If tasks are evaluated at night it will suffice for tasks required in day conditions NVG Tasks that must be performed during NVG flight Tasks evaluated while using NVG will suffice for tasks required in day conditions S or NG in the EVAL column Tasks that are mandatory for standardization or annual NVG flight evaluations respect
274. evaluation in the aircraft while occupying a station with access to the flight controls These EPs can be performed concurrently e SE failure at altitude e ENG or fuselage fire inflight p ENG XMSN hot e JENG 1 or ENG 2 XMSN warning Note During instrument training and instrument flight evaluations the aviator s vision may be restricted to the aircraft instruments at the discretion of the evaluator when the aircraft is not under actual IMC The appropriate flight symbol will be logged on DA Form 2408 12 Army Aviator s Flight Record 4 ENG shutdown and after landing tasks The evaluator will evaluate the examinee s use of TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 240 MTF TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL TM 1 1520 271 MTF and IETM related maintenance publications as appropriate Phase 4 Debriefing During this phase of the evaluation the evaluator will 1 Advise the examinee whether they passed or failed the evaluation and discuss any tasks not performed to standards 2 Discuss the examinee s strengths and weaknesses 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 3 7 Chpater 3 3 Offer recommendations for improvement 4 Inform the examinee of any restrictions limitations or revocations the evaluator will recommend to the commander following an unsatisfactory evaluation 5 Complete the applicable forms and ensure the examinee reviews and initials the appropriate forms Note A training plan will be approved by
275. f 20 KTS and 20 feet may cause injury f The P will provide the P with information regarding ground speed and altitude The P will also monitor the cockpit indications g The Pand NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside h The NCM will assist the cast master as necessary 4 178 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Procedures a Helocast operations 1 HVR checks will be made before beginning helocast operations to verify PWR AVAIL aircraft controllability and accuracy of the RAD ALTs 2 The PC will give the cast master TEN MINUTE OUT FIVE MINUTE OUT and ONE MINUTE OUT alert calls The PC at one minute out will announce AT THE READY LINE The cast master will relay these alert calls to the swimmers On receiving the command AT THE READY LINE the cast master will announce AT THE READY LINE at which time all participants will remove the restraint devices and be prepared to reposition to the door or ramp area for the jump 3 The approach should be made into the wind Approach speed is 80 KIAS KCAS MAX from the release point to the area of cast operations The approach is situation dependent and may be either a VMC or a terrain flight approach After arrival at the cast location slow to the briefed airspeed and altitude 4 When the aircraft has established the proper position airspeed and altitu
276. f attention is inside the cockpit for longer than 5 seconds Command for the emergency or unexpected release of an external sling Jettison load s or stores when followed by the word DOOR will indicate the requirement to perform emergency door removal LASER On Start acknowledge LASER designation Lasing The speaker is firing the LASER Maintain Command to continue or keep the same To conceal aircraft by using available terrain features and to position the Mask unmask aircraft above terrain features Mickey A HaveQuick time synchronized signal Monitor Command to maintain constant watch or observation Move aft Command to HOVER AFT followed by distance in feet Move forward Command to HOVER FORWARD followed by distance in feet Negative Negative contact Incorrect or permission not granted Unable to establish communication with followed by name of element Negative LASER No joy Now Aircraft has not acquired LASER energy Aircrew does not have positive visual contact with the target bandit traffic obstruction landmark Opposite of TALLY Indicates that an immediate action is required Offset direction Outside Maneuver in a specified direction with reference to a target PRI focus of attention is outside the aircraft Command to place the P radio transmit selector switch to a designated position will be followed by radio position numbers on the inter Put m
277. f flight or any deviation from instructions given by the P During terrain flight the P is primarily concerned with threat and obstacle avoidance b The P will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path or identified on the map The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles unusual attitudes altitude changes or threat The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and when attention is re established outside c During contour flight the P will advise the P whenever an unannounced descent is detected If the descent continues without acknowledgement or corrective action the P will again advise the P and be prepared to make a thrust control input The P will raise the thrust control when it is apparent that the aircraft will descend below 25 feet AHO d During NOE flight the P will advise the P whenever an unannounced descent is detected The P will immediately raise the thrust control when it is apparent that the P is not taking corrective action and the aircraft will descend below 10 feet AHO Procedures a Terrain flight is close to the earth s surface The modes of terrain flight are NOE contour and low level b Crewmembers will seldom perform pure NOE or contour flight Instead crewmembers will alternate techniques while maneuvering over the desired route The crew must look far enough ahead of the aircraft at all tim
278. f the cabin center rescue hatch with seat belts fastened 6 Ensure sufficient autorotational RRPM Ng exists prior to performing PAC DESCRIPTION 5 18 ik Crew actions a The MP will compute PAC values based upon current PA and OAT or verify pre planned values as required b Before beginning maneuver the MP will re brief the RCM on the maneuver especially the possible EPs The MP may call out the N Ng PTIT TQ and fuel flow to the NCM who can record them as directed required by the MP c Throughout the maneuver the MP will MAN the ECL and the thrust control but the RCM has control of all the flight controls The MP will inform the RCM when making any inputs to the thrust control The RCM will make flight control inputs as directed by the MP d Ifan EMERG situation occurs the MP will announce the EMERG and take appropriate corrective action Procedures Perform as AW the applicable MTF manual and as follows a Stabilize aircraft in straight and level flight at the desired PA and chart verify target TQ N No and PTIT values for MAX CONT PWR check MAX PWR check or both as required b Begin the maneuver by slowly moving the ECL of the ENG not being PACed towards ground until the target TQ is achieved on the ENG being PACed Monitor the N Ng and PTIT while establishing target TQ If N Ne or PTIT values are exceeded before reaching target TQ during the maximum continuous power check MCPC the maximum pow
279. ff EMERG fluid shutoff access door after APU is off Engine Ground Operation Aft CE ensures LH and right hand RH FUEL CONTR switches Set XFEED s closed lights out crossfeed valves close and transition lights come on then go out FADEC System REV System CE is positioned forward of the ramp hinge check and clear of ENGs RAD ALTs Check and set Aft RAD ALT Operational If the MWO is installed or as required M 130 or AN ALE 47 safety pin Removed and stowed or remaining If AN ALE 47 is not installed the M 130 Remove and stow installed safety pin must be removed and stowed Ensure chocks are secured by some means Chocks Removed and secured Removed and secured y in the cabin area Ramp should be up for taxi takeoff hover Ramp and cabin door As Ramp is up cabin door secured flight and landings unless there is a load s required Refer to Note 4 on it that prevents placing the ramp in the UP position Crew passengers and mission Aft ready forward ready equipment Check ready for taxi Refer to Note 5 ARCE wilalways Call aol Taxi director and blade watchers Positioned 1 or 2 Clear to towards ground testing 1 or 2 Read the last PAT Check Perform first flight hexadecimal digit series displayed of the day and apply the temp bias Announce the adjusted PAC and trigger value 1 or 2 Clear to flight Hover Check Verify that both ground contact indicating lights are extinguished I
280. ffective Considering the fleeting moments of time in a busy aviation environment only one opportunity may exist to convey critical and supporting information before tragedy strikes That information must be clearly understood not confusing and said at the earliest opportunity possible It must be applicable to the events at hand to support the needs and security of the mission The information must include all elements needed to make the best decision based on its urgency and the communication must come with ability of proven confirmation and without redundancy It must also include the crew s use of standard terminology and feedback techniques that accurately validate information transfer Emphasis is on the quality of statements associated with navigation obstacle clearance instrument readouts and emergencies Specific goals include the following TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination a Crewmembers consistently make the required callouts Their statements and directives are always timely Their response to unexpected events is made in a composed professional manner b Crewmembers actively seek feedback when they do not receive acknowledgment from another crewmember Crewmembers should always acknowledge the understanding of intent and request clarification when necessary 3 Be explicit Crewmembers should use clear concise terms standard terminology and phrases that accurately convey critical information Crewmembers must
281. fication An SI must be an FI and it is recommended the SI have a minimum of 1 year experience as a CH 47D F FI The SI must be able to supervise and implement the commander s ATP for NCMs and assist the unit SP with the supervision and maintenance of the standardization program 4 Documentation Upon completion of the SI FI qualification training and evaluation the SP IP SI FI as appropriate will enter the evaluation results on the NCM s IATF DA Form 7122 R Upon completion of a satisfactory evaluation the DA Form 7120 R will be changed to reflect the new flight duty position and obtain the commander s approval initial and date on the DA Form 7120 R At the NCM s next closeout training will be documented on the crewmember s DA Form 759 Part V Remarks Section b NCM UT qualification training The NCM UT was created to lessen the training burden on the FIs SIs The UT can instruct RL 2 RL 1 crewmembers on certain tasks for which they show an expert knowledge It was not created to make additional FIs SIs Once designated as a UT he or she may conduct FE duties or conduct training in the mission additional tasks that he or she is designated to instruct UTs will not conduct training on RL 3 crewmembers nor will they perform evaluations Note The goal should not be to make all FEs into UTs in all mission additional tasks but rather to give the FEs the ability to instruct tasks in which they are subject matter experts 1 Prerequ
282. fications 1 Determine when a go around is required 2 Immediately apply appropriate PWR to initiate go around 3 Immediately adjust to appropriate climb airspeed for conditions 4 F If utilized immediately depress the GO AROUND button on the thrust control and couple the FD if required DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will announce his or her intent to perform a go around and will remain primarily focused outside to avoid obstacles b The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles The P will also monitor system instruments to ensure aircraft limits are not exceeded 2 Procedures a When it becomes doubtful that a safe landing can be done announce GO AROUND Immediately apply PWR if AVAIL and simultaneously adjust pitch attitude to stop the descent and clear any obstacles Maintain aircraft in trim and adjust to the appropriate climb speed for conditions Maintain the appropriate ground track b F The P may engage the GO AROUND mode by pressing the GO AROUND button on the thrust control or engage the GO AROUND mode by pressing the GO AROUND button on the respective FD display control panel Note The decision to go around may be made at any time but in limited PWR situations should be determined before descending below the barriers or decelerating below ETL CAUTION fg Selecting the coupled GO AROUND mode during limited PWR conditi
283. final approach course 45 is recommended Determine ee obstacle from 1 nm before IAF to the IF w 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 145 Chapter 4 Minimum Descent Altitude MDA Final Approach Segment 2 4 a 2nm on either side of centerline J A Highest obstacle within this area Determine highest obstacle from 3 nm before FAF to 3 nm past MAP A EE E E e e e EENE E E EE E EEEE NS ERE E E EEE p ae Solution A rounded up nearest 20 ft B _250ft_ C MDA Missed Approach Obstacle Clearance Missed Approach Segment Obstacles cannot penetrate the surface area See NOTE A Distance fromthe obstacle to the 3 NM point and multiply by 304 20 1 Example tower 3nm away 2 7 7 2 nm m 3 x 304 912 Note This computation must be completed for all obstacles within the above area If the obstacles penetrate the surface area establish a higher climb gradient a higher MDA move the MAP or turn the missed approach Solution A B MDA 250 C max allowable obstacle height 4 146 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks peubls 3ed p ufig aeq peubis aad Y4351d00 Aq paaoiddy Aq payed Jld Aq padojaneq VaN AYNI AYO9JLVO lt uu 4 wu Olo azal O Ads GaYINOAY Sdd Sd9 adxg yoeosddy passil l Ti A hee SD A anan N i 0 L0 00L M OL Z60N ZVIdM 2dVI 0 L0 00
284. fires The rotor wash fans the flames which may cause more hazards to ground crews When performing this task with cabin doors open ensure that any personnel in the cabin area are wearing a safety harness secured to a 5 000 Ib or 10 000 Ib tie down ring static line or sitting in a seat with seat belt fastened Note The water bucket when loaded is a high density load with favorable flight characteristics Reduced velocity Vne and bank angle limits must be kept in mind Much of the mission profile is flown at high GWT and low airspeed In addition density altitude is greatly increased in the vicinity of a major fire Performance planning must receive special emphasis CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an operational center cargo hook water bucket required briefings checks completed and an AWR STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications RCM 1 4 148 a Conduct pre mission planning to determine fuel and bucket cinching requirements Verify the aircraft will remain within GWT and CG limitations for the duration of the flight b In conjunction with the NCMs complete the required checks to ensure proper system operation before mission departure c he e Operate the water bucket system IAW manufacturer specifications Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction Use proper dipping procedures for the water bucket type Demonstrate knowledge of fire b
285. flight should validate the following 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 143 Chapter 4 Locations IAF IF FAF MAP and MAHF Obstacles Approach course Obstacle clearance Altitudes MDA FAF IF IAF and MSA holding pattern altitude eae fF Note All waypoints IAF IF FAF MAP and MAHF will be verified by two separate GPS NAV systems for example Doppler GPS navigation system embedded GPS inertial navigation system or precision lightweight GPS receiver At least one will have PPS If unable to complete a suitability flyability check due to the operational environment the commander should consider an elevated risk when using this recovery procedure TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FAA handbook 8260 3 FAA Order 8460 42A and FAA Order 7130 3 4 144 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Final Approach Fix FAF Altitude Intermediate Approach Segment FAF _ lt chat 3 nm past MAP 3 10 nm oo 5 nm rt nm gt MAP FRE ar q n FAF IF 4 nm 2nm on either side A Highest bstace wins wea Determine a hionas obstacle from 1nm before IF to FAF and 2nm oy tere A Solution A pa up nearest 100 Of 8 5 500ft_ C FAF Initial Approach Fix IAF Initial Approach Segment NOTE IAF will not exceed 90 from
286. for conditions and stay within ground control limitations b Maintain the desired ground track 2 NCM a Perform applicable checks IAW TM 1 1520 240 CL or TM 1 1520 271 CL and the unit s SOP when read by the P b Immediately inform the RCMs of any observed discrepancies or malfunctions c Clear the aircraft d Use hand and arm signals if required IAW FM 21 60 e Visually ensure swivels are locked for two wheel taxi DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions Two wheel taxi a The P will ensure that the parking brake is released The P will announce their intent to begin the two wheel taxi operations the taxi plan and the intended direction of any turns and that the aircraft is clear of all traffic and obstacles The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft The P and NCM will assist the P in clearing the aircraft b The P will call for the before taxi check or the taxi check as appropriate c The P will read the appropriate taxi check The P will ensure the aft wheel swivel switch is locked and the AFCS DAFCS select SEL switch is at BOTH or OFF The P will have the NCM in the ramp area visually confirm that swivel lock actuators are locked d The P will advise the P to monitor ground control limitations and LCT operation Initially the P will position the cyclic as necessary not to exceed two inches 2 aft The P will release the brakes as required and raise the thrust control until the forward landing gear
287. for each crewmember The individual s commander s task list CTL must clearly indicate all crew station designations Training and proficiency sustainment for rated crewmembers RCMs are required in each designated crew station with access to the flight controls Standardization instructor pilots SPs instructor pilots IPs instrument examiners IEs and maintenance test pilot evaluators MEs must maintain proficiency in both seats Nonrated crewmember NCM training and proficiency sustainment are required in each designated crew station Except for flight activity category FAC 3 aviators designated to fly from both pilots PIs seats will be evaluated in each seat during each phase of readiness level RL progression and annual proficiency and readiness test APART evaluations This does not mean that both standardization and instrument flight evaluation need to be completed in both seats As long as both seats have been evaluated during some portion of the above evaluations the requirements for both seat evaluation have been met Maintenance test pilots MPs MEs will follow chapter 5 for crew station requirements and evaluations However not all tasks must be evaluated in each seat Sustainment training for NCMs is required in each designated crew station NCMs are required to be evaluated from the cabin door position and the left ramp position in the aircraft during the APART but are not required to be evaluated in all tasks fr
288. ft Anytime a NCM is inside the aircraft with the ENGs operating and the LH escape panel is REMOVED or the upper cabin door is OPEN or the ramp cargo door is IN the NCMs visor will be down unless using NVGs Note When two or more NCMs are assigned to the flight the FE will outline their specific duties during the mission briefing The ramp and cabin checks may be divided between the NCMs NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 If performing ramp and cabin checks during the hours of darkness a flashlight with an unfiltered lens should be used to supplement available lighting HYD leaks oil leaks and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens 2 NCMs must use caution while performing ramp checks with the white lights when the NVG curtain is not in use When wearing NVG flip the goggles up and slide the clear visor down When finished slide the clear visor up flip the goggles down and inform PIs the status of the ramp and cabin check TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 65 Chapter 4 TASK 1044 Navigate by Pilotage and Dead Reckoning CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the appropriate navigational maps plotter and flight computer STANDARDS Appropriate common st
289. g 55 sq feet e In this configuration the load s will fly exposing the top and front of the load s to the wind thus resulting in the flat plate drag explained above e Using the drag chart the drag area change of the external sling load s the forecast cruise conditions and the cruise airspeed in item 63 and item 65 record the additional TQ required for cruise with an external sling load s Item 50 PA Record the planned cruise or highest PA along the route Item 51 FAT Record the forecast FAT at cruise or at the highest PA Item 52 MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN Refer to item 9 for definition Using the MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN chart and the forecast cruise conditions record the MAX 10 MIN TQ limit AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Refer to item 9 Item 53 MAX TQ AVAIL SE Refer to item 10 for definition Using the SE TQ AVAIL or contingency TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast cruise conditions record the MAX TQ AVAIL for SE operation Refer to item 10 Item 54 CONT TQ AVAIL DUAL ENG Refer to item 12 for definition Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast cruise conditions record CONT TQ AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Refer to item 12 Item 55 CONT TQ AVAIL SE Refer to item 13 for definition Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast cruise conditions record CONT TQ AVAIL for SE operation Refer to item 13 Note By trading off airspeed for GWT and vice versa PWR required for cruise flight will remain at or left of the CONT
290. g Calculate aircraft GWT and density altitude to determine if autorotation RRPM Nk is within limits and apply corrections as required IAW the applicable IETM h Note OAT from the FAT gauge in the cockpit for DA calculations CAAS values may be used for GWT calculations as long as it is verified to be accurate when compared to the aircraft weight and balance record i Verify all required steps are completed 3 Crew stations The MP will be in the left seat for this maneuver TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 17 Chapter 5 TASK 4259 Perform Maximum Continuous Power Check Perform Maximum Power Check CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the applicable MTF manual CL with all required inflight checks complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications l 2 3 Select a suitable flight track that will permit a safe descent and EMERG landing Re brief RCM and NCM on their duties and possible EPs prior to performing the maneuver Perform the PAC at a minimum altitude of 1 500 feet AGL 4 Maintain at or below any one of the following limits 899 degrees C PTIT Ni Ng 110 percent q 111 percent TQ of 123 percent or 140 KIAS KCAS 5 Throughout this maneuver the NCMs will be seated forward o
291. g The IP may evaluate an IP SP during proficiency flight evaluation PFE resulting from a lapse in aircraft or NVD currency 6 IE The IE trains and evaluates instrument tasks as directed by AR 95 1 and local requirements 7 SP The SP trains and evaluates RCMs and NCMs and supervises and maintains the standardization program 8 MP The MP conducts maintenance test flight MTF procedures IAW chapter 5 9 ME The ME trains and evaluates MPs and MEs IAW chapter 5 10 NCM The NCM is a non aviator who performs operation essential duties aboard an aircraft 11 Crew chief CE The CE assists the flight engineer FE with maintaining his or her assigned aircraft and performs NCM duties 12 Flight engineer FE The FE maintains his or her assigned aircraft and performs NCM duties The FE is the supervisor and primary trainer for the CE and mechanics assigned to that aircraft They will also maintain their assigned aircraft and perform NCM duties The commander selects NCMs to perform FE duties based on proficiency and experience Note Unless otherwise specified the abbreviation CE or NCM in the task description refers to either the CE or the FE 13 NCM flight engineer instructor FI The NCM FI trains and evaluates NCMs in aircraft tasks AW this ATM and unit METL To qualify as an FI the crewmember must meet the requirements of AR 95 1 14 NCM standardization instructor SI The SI trains and evaluates NCMs FIs and other SI
292. g may be impractical Passengers may be pre briefed or passenger briefing cards may be used IAW local directives or the unit SOP Note If the cargo rescue winch is used the NCM must ensure it is correctly operated IAW the appropriate operator s manual Note Hazardous cargo will be handled loaded and transported IAW AR 95 27 and the appropriate operator s manual CL TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 95 27 DA Pam 738 751 FM 4 20 197 FM 55 450 2 TM 38 250 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and TM 55 1500 342 23 4 36 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1019 Perform Preventive Maintenance Service Checks CONDITIONS Given a CH 47D F helicopter and TM 1 1520 PMS3 TM 1 1520 240 PMS or TM 1 1520 271 PMS Note This task applies to NCMs only STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Correctly check all items AW TM 1 1520 PMS3 or TM 1 1520 271 PMS 2 Enter appropriate information on the appropriate forms IAW DA Pam 738 751 DESCRIPTION 1 Using TM 1 1520 PMS3 TM 1 1520 240 PMS or TM 1 1520 271 PMS conduct a PMS inspection When conducting the inspection with another NCM both NCMs will use the appropriate reference 2 Take a fuel sample from each fuel tank and determine if the samp
293. ge 2 7 and must be NVG current in the CH 47D F helicopter a Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the subject areas listed in paragraphs 3 4b 7 through 10 and additional subject areas selected by the commander in this ATM b Flight training The crewmember will receive flight training and demonstrate proficiency in the mission additional NVG tasks as specified by the commander on the individual s DA Form 7120 1 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements DA Form 7120 2 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Continuation Sheet for the crewmember s position Table 2 5 Mission training task list rated nonrated crewmember 2056 2058 2050 2064 2066 2068 2074 2 6 2076 2078 2079 2081 2086 2112 2125 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Training Table 2 5 Mission training task list rated nonrated crewmember 2127 Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight 3 MP and ME mission training Due to the complexity of the CH 47F MPs and Mes should be limited to duties in one primary and one alternate or additional aircraft The MP ME will be required to complete tasks outlined in table 2 9 page 2 14 and should be required to complete those mission additional tasks selected by the commander Crewmembers undergoing training in the aircraft must fly with an ME for maintenance training Commanders are not authorized to delete any MP tasks
294. ggage EMERG equipment and extra equipment that the crew might have put on the aircraft Record the operating WT of the aircraft This is used for reference only 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 19 Chapter 4 4 20 Item 2 TAKEOFF T O Block FUEL WT Takeoff fuel WT consists of the total amount of fuel in the tanks of the aircraft If ERFS II is used that fuel will be added to the aircraft total Record the takeoff fuel WT If ERFS is used add to aircraft total This is used for reference only Item 3 LOAD A load consists of internal cargo external cargo or a combination of both this may include passengers that will be dropped off during the mission Record the MAX anticipated WT of the load s during the mission profile This is used for reference only Item 4 PA Record the PA forecast for the time of departure Item 5 FAT Record the FAT forecast for the time of departure Item 6 TAKEOFF GWT no LOAD The takeoff GWT No Load s is referenced from block 12 of the Department of Defense DD Form 365 4 Weight and Balance Clearance Form F Transport Tactical and is total aircraft WT Record the takeoff GWT Item 7 TAKEOFF GWT with a LOAD The takeoff GWT With a load s is referenced from block 16 of the DD Form 365 4 and is takeoff condition uncorrected Record the takeoff GWT Item 8 FUEL MANAGEMENT Use this space to record the inflight fuel consumption check to include time rate quantity fuel burnout and reserve Item 9 MAX TQ
295. ghest obstacle AHO at 25 feet 50 feet 75 feet and 100 feet 3 Hover a Maintain heading 10 degrees b Maintain altitude 3 feet c Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet d Maintain a constant rate of movement appropriate for existing conditions e Maintain ground track with minimum drift f NCM s will announce all drift altitude changes 4 Inflight a Maintain heading 10 degrees b Maintain altitude 100 feet c Maintain airspeed 10 knots indicated airspeed KIAS CH 47D knots calibrated airspeed KCAS CH 47F d Maintain ground track with minimum drift d Maintain rate of climb R C or descent 200 feet per minute FPM e Maintain the aircraft in trim f F Ensure the flight direct cues are continuously updated and displayed appropriately when utilized 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 3 Chapter 4 4 4 5 Approach a Approaching unimproved surfaces the P will call the aircraft altitude AHO at 100 feet 75 feet 50 feet 25 feet and 10 feet b Landing to unimproved surfaces the NCM will call the aircraft altitude from 10 feet to the ground in 1 foot increments 6 All tasks with the APU ENGs operating RCMs and NCMs a Maintain airspace surveillance Task 1026 b Apply appropriate environmental considerations c Perform crew coordination actions IAW chapter 6 e Description The description explains the preferred method for accomplishing th
296. gulation nautical mile nap of the earth notice to airmen night vision device night vision goggles night vision system outside air temperature out of ground effect original equipment manufacture observer pressure third stage pilot not on the controls pilot on the controls pressure altitude power assurance check precision approach radar power assurance test pilot in command personal computer memory card international association power distribution panel proficiency flight evaluation position hold pilot preventive maintenance daily program of instruction petroleum oil and lubricants performance planning card TC 3 04 34 Glossary 5 Glossary psi PPS PTIT PTU PZ RC R C RCM RL ROE RP RPG RPM RRPM SA SACLOS SAFIRE SAR SE SESC SFD SFTS SI SM SOCOM SOI SOP SP SSG TACAN TACOPS TAMMS A TAS TC TDH TEAC TERPS TFPS TM TOF TQ Glossary 6 pounds per square inch precise positioning service power turbine inlet temperature power transfer unit pickup zone Reserve component rate of climb rated crewmember readiness level rules of engagement rally point rocket propelled grenade revolutions per minute rotor revolutions per minute situational awareness semi automatic command to line of sight surface to air fire search and rescue single engine single engine service ceiling standby flight display synthetic flight training system standardization instructor
297. h the rescue hoist cable This may result in exceeding the 600 pounds structural limitation of the overhead pulley support CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter equipped with an operational rescue hoist winch system STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger safety briefing b Perform rescue hoist procedures AW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL or TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL c Perform rescue hoist winch procedures IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 CL FM 8 10 6 and the unit s SOP d Maintain appropriate HVR altitude 5 feet e Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended HVR point f Perform post flight procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL 2 NCM a Perform a preflight inspection of the rescue hoist winch IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL and the unit SOP b Ensure that the crew passengers cargo and mission equipment are secured c Operate the rescue hoist winch IAW the appropriate TM d Perform post flight procedures IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Rescue hoist operations 1 The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with rescue hoist operations EPs communication procedures lowering the flight medic and 5 April 201
298. he required reserve h Initiate an appropriate course of action if the NCM detects a maintenance related fault NCM a Perform the initial ramp and cabin check when called for by either RCM b Perform ramp and cabin check at least every 30 minutes during the flight as mission permits c The NCM will remain secured to the aircraft by a safety harness connected to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or static line if installed in the cabin area during the ramp and cabin check d Immediately notify the PC of any malfunctions or discrepancies noted during the check e During these checks the helmet clear visor must be down f The NCM will check the following items Note The maintenance panel has indicators that the PI cannot see Although a cruise check is conducted every 30 minutes the FE should constantly be aware of the status of indications on the maintenance panel by placing themselves in a position to monitor it 1 Forward XMSN area Check for leaks unusual vibrations and soundproofing security 2 Flight control closet Check for leaks extended jam indicators loose hardware and soundproofing security 3 Heater compartment Check for component condition leaks and if used proper heater operation 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 63 Chapter 4 4 64 4 Avionics compartment Check for proper cooling fan operation and component and soundproofing security 5 Transformer XFMR RECTs Check air intakes for
299. he suitability of the area If possible make the decision for a go around before descending below the barriers or going below ETL 4 The parking brake should be set before landing on unimproved areas where the surface slopes Task 1062 5 After touchdown check aircraft stability as the thrust control is lowered 4 72 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks MOUTAIN PINNACLE RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS 1 Before commencing the approach the crew will determine and brief an escape route in case a go around is necessary During the approach continue to determine the suitability of the intended landing point 2 Select a shallow to steep approach angle depending on the wind line of demarcation density altitude GWT and obstacles During the approach continue to determine the suitability of the intended landing point 3 The rate of closure may be difficult to determine until the aircraft is close to the landing point 4 Reduce airspeed to slightly above ETL until the rate of closure can be determined and decide whether to continue the approach or make a go around If a go around is required it should be performed before decelerating below ETL If the approach is continued terminate to a HVR or to the surface 5 After touching down check aircraft stability as the thrust control is lowered Task 2125 Note To successfully operate in small areas it may be necessary to place the nose of the aircraft over the edge of the landi
300. ictive The jinking maneuver is accomplished with positive flight control inputs but should not be a violent maneuver Jinking will be ineffective if the helicopter does not displace over the ground and cause the enemy to shift his aiming point Therefore excessively tight turns should normally be avoided as they result in the helicopter failing to displace out of the enemy s weapon s field of view Note Prolonged jinking may dissipate the aircraft s kinetic energy and may make the aircraft an easier target 4 130 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Countering barrage fire If engaged by accurate barrage fire depart the area of fire as quickly as possible via the most direct path Since barrage fire is being aimed into a box turn only to avoid areas of concentrated fire Do not jink as this will delay departure from the barrage 3 Countering curtain fire Turn to avoid flying into curtain fire when possible When engaged by accurate curtain fire depart the area of fire as quickly as possible via the most direct path 4 Tanks Generally the unguided weapons countermeasures listed above are appropriate defenses against tank fire Additionally tank fire control systems and turret slew rates in azimuth and elevation combined with the limited field of view on the tank gunner s weapon sight make it very difficult to track aircraft with high relative velocity Tank gunners are particularly vulnerable to aircraf
301. iding craft combat search and rescue commander s task list Department of the Army Department of the Army pamphlet Department of the Army civilian digital advance flight control system digital aeronautical flight information file differential airspeed hold direct current data concentrator system digital engine control unit Directorate of Evaluation and Standardization door gunner decision height data loader unit Department of Defense Department of Transportation defense switched network data transfer system data transfer unit Eastern Army Aviation Training Site engine air particle separator external air transportability engine condition lever electronic control unit embedded global positioning system inertial navigation unit en route low altitude electronic manual emergency procedure extended range fuel system estimated time of arrival estimated time en route effective translational lift exportable training package Federal Aviation Administration flight activity category TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Glossary FADEC FAF FAR FARE FARP FAT FD FE FI FIH FLIP FM FOD FOV FPM FLPN FRIES FRM FS GPS GMTF GWT HAATS HF HIT HQDA HSD HSDH HSI HUD IAF IAS IATF IAW ICS IDM IE IETM IF IFF 5 April 2013 full authority digital engine control final approach fix Federal Aviation Regulations forward area refueling equipment forward arming and refueling point free air tempera
302. ight In the event an aircraft in the flight loses visual contact with the formation the crew will immediately make a radio call to the formation and lead will announce and maintain heading altitude and airspeed If sufficient altitude exists a descent may allow the crew to re establish visual contact with the formation If sufficient altitude does not exist the P should initiate a climb to provide vertical separation from the flight 3 Approach Immediately make a radio call to the formation and execute a go around unless an alternate course of action has been briefed The lead aircraft must maintain a constant approach angle so other aircraft in the formation will not have to execute excessively steep shallow or slow approaches Aircraft should not descend below the aircraft ahead of them in the formation and entering their rotor wash This could result in an over TQ loss of aircraft control or entering a settling with PWR condition In the event an aircraft in the flight loses visual contact with the formation the crew will immediately make a radio call to the formation and execute a go around in the briefed direction c Reorientation procedures 1 After announcing the aircraft has a loss of visual contact with the formation lead will announce and maintain heading altitude and airspeed turning only to avoid known obstacles or enemy threat Lead will also announce his or her position relative to the next waypoint or rally point The r
303. ight forward or backward and those for takeoff landing external sling load s hooked and release sling load s as appropriate IAW FM 21 60 DESCRIPTION Identify or perform the hand and arm signals required to move an aircraft from one point to another TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 21 60 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 111 Chapter 4 TASK 1194 Perform Refueling Operations CONDITIONS With a CH 47D F helicopter with refueling equipment or academically STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Ensure that safety procedures are complied with and all individuals are wearing the appropriate protective clothing AW FM 10 67 1 the appropriate operator s manual CL and FM 3 04 113 2 Ensure that the aircraft is refueled IAW FM 10 67 1 the appropriate operator s manual CL FM 3 04 113 and the unit s SOP 3 Enter the appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Cold refueling 1 A crewmember will guide the refueling vehicle to the aircraft Ensure that the driver parks the vehicle the proper distance from the aircraft IAW FM 10 67 1 Verify that all personnel not involved with the refueling operation are a safe distance away 2 Ground and refuel the aircraft IAW FM 10 67 1 the appropriate opera
304. in the IATF on DA Form 7122 R before flight training The academic classes are mandatory but the hour requirements are based on crewmember retention Commanders will develop written examinations covering the subject areas listed in this appendix Each of the following subject areas requires a 50 question open book examination 1 Operators manual systems subjects to include EPs 2 Maintenance manuals 3 Academic subjects 4 Flight training subjects Note Crewmembers must pass the examinations with a grade of at least 70 percent The required examinations for each subject area are identified in table A 1 Table A 1 Training and qualification subjects System subjects Aircraft system structure and airframe Maintenance forms and records Avionics and mission equipment Weight and balance Flight control hydraulic systems Electrical system Power plant and related systems Flight control system Auxiliary power unit Rotor system Transmission and drive systems Fuel and oil systems Landing gear wheels and brake systems Environmental systems Utility systems Prepare aircraft for preflight Inspection requirements Cargo winching and loading Aircraft limitations Cargo tie down and storage Advanced flight control system digital advance flight control system Armaments subsystems Aircraft mooring Refueling operations 5 April 2013 TC
305. increments of the height of the aircraft above the water Advise the PIs if any debris or submerged objects are near the landing site At 10 feet advise the PIs in 1 foot increments of the height of the aircraft until the AFT wheels contact the water During descent for ramp down operations the crewmember positioned at the forward cabin door will report altitudes from 100 feet to 25 feet to 10 feet in 5 foot increments 10 feet to 1 foot in 1 foot increments followed by a report of ramp contact with the water 4 While in the water the NCM will advise the PIs of any unusual water accumulation in the cargo area During ramp down operations the NCM will advise the PIs of the water level before it reaches fuselage station 400 5 During takeoff the NCM will advise the PIs when the wheels are clear of the water ramp clear during ramp down operations 6 At the completion of the mission enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408 13 Ensure that all required inspections and service are performed OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions
306. indications n ENG shutdown ENG condition lever failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D F Initiated on the ground with the ECL in the ground position and the required ENG cool down met b Not to be performed while ground taxiing Verbally state failure of ECL s pull appropriate fire pull handle s 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications o ENG shutdown with APU or APU GEN inoperative 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 C 3 Appendix C C 4 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications N ENG oil low quantity high TEMP low PRESS 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D or in the FS 2 CH 47D Verbally describe the indications or pull CB A 14 No 1 PDP or CB A 19 No 2 PDP to fail the ENG OIL PRESS gauge 3 FS Initiate at IOS of the FS or verbally describe the indications Note If failed using the CB after ENG start the ENG oil PRESS indication on the oil PRESS gauge will remain static frozen at the indication present when the CB was pulled ENG chip DET caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications D No 1 or No 2 ENG XSMN HOT caution 1
307. ine arrival at intersections IAW procedures in FM 3 04 240 Identify station passage by observing the first complete reversal of the bearing pointer and or the TO FROM indicator on the HSI or HSD NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS To aid in preventing spatial disorientation do not make large or abrupt attitude changes TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 95 Chapter 4 TASK 1167 7 Perform Instrument Maneuvers using Standby Flight Display CONDITIONS In a CH 47F helicopter with an operational standby flight display SFD STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and maintain the aircraft in trim above 40 KIAS KCAS DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will initiate DUAL MFD failure by selecting NVG on both of his or her MFDs and dimming to unreadable level b The P will configure his or her MFDs so that primary flight instruments are displayed The P will be prepared to take control of the aircraft at any time c The P will recover from the MFD failure by selecting NORM or increasing the brightness on the MFDs Procedures a The P will fly the aircraft utilizing the SFD and will not exceed any of the operator s manual limitations b The P and NCM will clear the aircraft whi
308. information not monitored by the P c During simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles The NCM will take a position on the P side of the aircraft 2 Procedures a Upon arrival at the holding fix turn if required to the predetermined outbound heading Maintain the outbound heading IAW DOD FLIP or as directed by ATC After the appropriate time or distance outbound turn to the inbound heading and apply normal tracking procedures to maintain the inbound course Note the time or distance as appropriate required to fly the inbound leg When holding at a NAVAID begin timing the outbound leg when abeam the station b When holding at an intersection begin timing the outbound leg upon establishing the outbound heading Note GPS IFR navigation must be certified by the FAA or host country regulations prior to GPS IFR use With an IFR certified GPS ensure the DAFIF data is current and loaded prior to IFR use If a certified GPS or current DAFIF data is not available then crews will not use the GPS for IFR navigation However they should consider and plan for its use as an EMERG backup system only TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 99 Chapter 4 TASK 1176 P
309. ining will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 120 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1402 Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning CONDITIONS Prior to flight in a CH 47D F helicopter and given a mission briefing navigational maps a navigational computer Army approved mission planning station and software if available and other flight planning materials as required STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Analyze the mission using the factors of METT TC 2 Operate the Army approved mission planning station and software if available 3 Perform a map photo reconnaissance using the available map media photos and Army approved mission planning station and software Ensure that all known hazards to terrain flight are plotted 4 Select the appropriate flight altitudes 5 Develop load plan and verify aircraft weight and balance Task 1012 6 Select appropriate primary and alternate routes and enter all of them on a map route sketch or into the Army approved mission planning station and software if available 7 Determine the distance 1 kilometer ground speed 5 knots and ETE 1 minute for each leg of the flight 8 Determine the fuel required and reserve IAW AR 95 1 100 pounds 9 Obtain and analyze Wx briefing to determine that Wx and environmental conditions are a
310. intain a constant rate of turn not to exceed 90 degrees within 4 seconds DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will select the HVR page on his or her MFD and will remain focused inside on the HVR symbology The HVR FD cue will be selected to view the velocity vector and acceleration cue Select the appropriate HVR Mode b Prior to hovering flight the P will select HVR hold and the appropriate RAD hold RAD ALT or inertial ALT hold c P may select HVR functions if directed by P The P and NCMs will maintain airspace surveillance and clear the aircraft as needed d P and NCMs will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when their attention is re established outside 2 Procedures a The P correctly configures their MFDs for HVR operations and announces their intent to use HVR symbology b Ifthe P loses visual reference with the ground he or she should announce it and instantly transition to a HEAD DOWN condition using the HVR symbology page to maintain aircraft control with no drift c IfP becomes spatially disorientated while hovering utilizing symbology the P will take the flight controls and fly utilizing symbology or outside references NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 Movement over areas of limited contrast such as tall grass water or desert tends to cause spatial disorientation Seek HVR areas that provide adequate contrast and use proper scanning techniques
311. into the GPS Army approved mission planning station and software if available Consider such overlay items as hazards checkpoints observation posts and friendly and enemy positions Review contingency procedures 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 121 Chapter 4 Note Evaluate Wx impact on the mission Considerations should include aircraft performance and limitations NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS More detailed flight planning is required when the flight is conducted in reduced visibility at night or in the NVG environment FM 3 04 203 contains details about night navigation NVG navigation with standard maps can be difficult because of map colors symbology and colored markers used during map preparation TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluations will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 122 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1404 Perform Electronic Countermeasures Electronic Counter Countermeasures Procedures CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given an appropriate data fill transfer device STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Test and operate aircraft avionics and voice security equipment IAW the appropriate operator s manual 2 Maintain radio discipline 3 Use the SOI section of the automated NET control device 4 Recognize and respond to enemy elec
312. ion the wind the long axis of the takeoff area and the lowest obstacles and will confirm that required PWR is AVAIL by comparing the information from the PPC J HVR override to the HVR PWR check b The P will remain focused outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will monitor altitude and avoid obstacles c The P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P in clearing the aircraft The P will set cargo hook switches as required and should make all radio calls When directed by the P the P will ARM the cargo hook d The P and NCM not calling the load s will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles e The NCM calling the load s will remain primarily focused on the load s The NCM may place the radio switches on the ICS OFF The cargo hook switch on the hoist operator s panel will be ARMED and the hoist operator s grip must be secured and within easy reach to be able to jettison the load s in the event of an EMERG or if it will endanger the crew or aircraft The NCM will guide the P during the load s pickup advise of the load s condition inflight and direct the P when setting down the load s f The NCM will attach his or her restraining harness to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring and assume a position at the right aft corner of the rescue hatch g Table 4 3 page 4 79 for an example of an external sling load s briefing CL 4 78
313. ion review alternating current automatic direction finding advanced flight control system assistant fast rope master above ground level above highest obstacle aeronautical information manual Army knowledge online aviation life support equipment air mission commander Army aviation and missile life cycle management command automated net control device aviator s night vision imaging system annual proficiency and readiness test auxiliary power unit Army regulation Army National Guard aircraft survivability equipment aircraft survivability equipment trainer air traffic control antitank guided missiles aircrew training manual aircrew training program Army tactics techniques and procedures aviation vibration analysis airworthiness release built in test Celsius common avionics architecture system chemical biological radiological nuclear and high explosives cockpit control driver actuator course deviation indicator central display unit crew chief center of gravity cruise guide indicator cargo helicopter checklist TC 3 04 34 Glossary 1 Glossary CMWS COMSEC CONUS CPU CRRC CSAR CTL DA DA PAM DAC DAFCS DAFIF DASH DC DCS DECU DES DG DH DLU DOD DOT DSN DTS DTU EAATS EAPS EAT ECL ECU EGI ELA EM EP ERFS ETA ETE ETL ETP FAA FAC Glossary 2 common missile warning system communication security continental United States central processing unit combat rubber ra
314. ions 1 Establish communication with followed by the name of the element 2 Sensor contact at the stated position Contact 3 Acknowledges sighting of a specified reference point either visually or via sensor 4 Individual radar return within a GROUP or ARM Controls Refers to aircraft flight controls Deadeye LASER designator system inoperative An alert of the unintentional or undirected movement of the aircraft will be followed by the word RIGHT LEFT BACKWARD or FORWARD Command to make an emergency exit from the aircraft will be repeated three times in a row Drifting Egress Execute Initiate an action Expect Anticipate further instructions or guidance Firing Announcement that a specific weapon is to be fired Command to fly an assigned compass heading This term generally used in low level or contour flight operations Go ahead Proceed with your message Go AJ Directive to activate anti jam communications Fly heading Go plain red Directive to discontinue secure operations Go secure green Directive to activate secure communications Hold Command to maintain present position 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 5 Chapter 6 Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Horizontal movement of aircraft perpendicular to its heading will be followed Hover by the word LEFT or RIGHT Inside PRI focus o
315. ions if a malfunction occurs Ensure aircraft is re trimmed before starting each AFCS DAFCS check During the PHOLD and TRC beep trim checks descending to a 10 foot HVR may assist the NCM in estimating aircraft movement Ensure all steps are completed e TQ differential check Prior to performing the TQ differential check ensure the RCM is briefed on SE hovering flight characteristics Once the aircraft is established at a trimmed stabilized hover direct the RCM not to make further inputs to the thrust control If inputs are inadvertently made to the thrust control the maneuver must be aborted and started over Hovering flight at a constant thrust control position will result un commanded climbs and descents due to environmental effects such as gusting or variable winds These climbs and descents are to be considered normal and no adjustment of the thrust control should be made unless aircraft begins a decent that appears will terminate in abrupt ground contact The thrust may be increased to soften the touchdown as required The PAT may be completed during the TQ differential check IAW the MTF manual f Verify all required steps are completed Crew stations The MP must be in the left seat for mechanical rig controls positions and the TQ differential checks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropri
316. ircraft operator s manual 4 Assist in marshalling passengers to designated assembly area 5 Perform or describe duties as briefed in the crew mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will direct an EMERG egress The PC will determine if the egress will be done before the rotor blades have stopped If the PC is incapacitated the next ranking RCM NCM will perform this function The PC will also determine and announce if an EMERG ENG shutdown will be performed b The P and P will egress their respective positions and assist with passenger egress c The NCM will direct passenger egress d All crewmembers will perform duties as briefed during the crew briefing and assist with the egress of incapacitated crewmembers and passengers if required Procedures a Ifan EMERG egress occurs use the cabin cockpit doors If the cabin cockpit doors are jammed use the EMERG release If the EMERG release does not work break out the Plexiglas windows with the crash axe boot or other suitable object Once out guide yourself and passengers to clear the aircraft in a safe direction and meet at the assembly point Account for all personnel b Perform the EMERG egress of a PI from his or her seat IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual c Perform EMERG ENG shutdown procedures IAW the appropriate aircraft operator s manual OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS If egress must be made from an aircraft that has gone in
317. is to be performed The evaluator will complete an evaluation using role reversal as one tool in order to demonstrate knowledge of the procedures in the ATM 2 The evaluator will conduct an evaluation IAW this ATM and determine the pilot s level of knowledge in the appropriate subject areas and ATM tasks During the evaluation the evaluator will apply the principles of flight instruction in chapter 3 3 Once the training is completed the evaluator as a minimum will debrief the pilot on those maneuver procedures which were performed unsatisfactory The evaluator will then determine recommendations for the commander on the aviator s status in the ATP and formulate a training plan as required The evaluated trainer will determine appropriate entries for the DA Form 7122 R as required TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 10 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1002 Conduct a Passenger Briefing CONDITIONS Given the applicable operator s manual or unit approved passenger briefing and information about the mission STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Without omissions conduct the briefing as directed by the PC using an approved CL DESCRIPTION When directed by the PC conduct app
318. isites for UT qualification The unit commander is responsible for conducting UT qualification IAW this ATM Recommended active Army NG and RC personnel in grade of specialist through SSG must be a current CH 47D F RL 1 FE possess a current flight physical and on crewmember orders 2 Academic training Academic training will be conducted at the unit level The NCM must receive sufficient instruction to demonstrate proper method of instruction MOT and be knowledgeable in the 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 A 3 Appendix A A 3 mission additional task s the NCM is designated to instruct The NCM must be able to effectively impart that knowledge to an RL 2 crewmember 3 Flight training The UT will be evaluated on his or her ability to perform train and provide MOI for the specific mission additional tasks in which he or she is designated to instruct The UT will be required to demonstrate MOI proficiency in designated task s and must be able to instruct crew coordination and airspace surveillance in those tasks All flight tasks will be performed to proficiency 4 Documentation Upon completion of the UT qualification training and evaluation the SP IP SI FI as appropriate will enter the evaluation results on the NCMs IATF DA Form 7122 R Upon completion of a satisfactory evaluation the DA Form 7120 R will be changed to reflect the new flight duty position and obtain the commander s approval initial and date on the DA Form 7120 R
319. itations for the duration of the flight IAW the appropriate operator s manual 9 Verify aircraft performance data and ensure that PWR is AVAIL to complete the mission IAW the appropriate operator s manual 10 Complete and file the FLPN IAW AR 95 1 and the DOD FLIP 11 Perform mission risk assessment IAW unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will ensure that all crewmembers are current and qualified to perform the mission The PC will also determine if the aircraft is equipped to accomplish the assigned mission The PC may direct the other RCM to complete some elements of the IFR flight planning b The other RCM will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC c The PC will ensure all crewmembers are current qualified and the aircraft is properly equipped to accomplish the assigned mission 2 Procedures a Obtain Wx information using appropriate military FAA or host country Wx facilities b Compare destination forecast and approach minimums and determine if an alternate airfield is required c Ensure the flight can be completed IAW AR 95 1 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 15 Chapter 4 d Check NOTAMs and other appropriate sources for any restrictions applying to the flight e Obtain navigation charts covering the entire flight area and allowing for routing or destination changes that may be required due to Wx conditions f Select the route s course s and altitudes that will be
320. ively Task Task Title D N NVG EVAL 1024 eee Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter ix x x sno 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance XxX 1063_ Perform External Sling Load s Operations x x snc 1194 Perform Refueling Operations 1200 Perform Non Rated Crewmember Duties during a Maintenance Test a oe i Flight 1202 Perform Auxiliary Power Unit Operations 1262 Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review 1406 Perform Terrain Flight Navigation x x sne 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 11 Chapter 2 Table 2 7 Nonrated crewmember 15U task list Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight These tasks do not need to be evaluated during the standardization evaluation If tasks are evaluated at night it will suffice for tasks required in day conditions NVG Tasks that must be performed during NVG flight Tasks evaluated while using NVG will suffice for tasks required in day conditions S or NG in the EVAL column Tasks that are mandatory for standardization or annual NVG flight evaluations respectively Task Title Table 2 8 Door gunner non crewmember task list Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight The tasks selected under the N column do not need to be evaluated during the
321. iven a suitable landing area with the before landing check complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Select a suitable landing area 2 Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of touchdown 3 Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction as appropriate 4 Initiate a deceleration no less than 100 feet AHO 5 Perform a smooth controlled touchdown at above ETL but below 60 KTS ground speed 6 Touchdown with a MAX of 20 degree nose high pitch attitude aligned with the landing direction 5 degrees DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft throughout the approach and landing The P will announce his or her intent to perform a roll on landing when beginning the approach the intended point of landing and any deviations from the approach b The P will verify that the brakes are released and that the swivels are locked before starting the approach The P and NCM will confirm the suitability of the landing area and will provide adequate warning of hazards or obstacles The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside c Airspeed should be adjusted to maintain the optimum airspeed for existing conditions If a SE EMERG condition exists adjust airspeed for best SE flight MAX END 2 Procedures
322. k installation preflight inflight set up tear down and storage of the FARP system will be conducted IAW FM 3 04 111 and TM 1 1560 312 10 EPs will be conducted IAW the references mentioned above 2 Procedures a Standard FARP operation crew 1 The crew consists of two RCMs two qualified NCMs and two POL handlers The number of crewmembers may be increased as the mission or the commander dictates 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 173 Chapter 4 e 2 Commanders will ensure that crewmembers and POL handlers are trained on crew duties before they conduct refueling operations Each crewmember will complete all required inspections pertaining to his or her section of FM 3 04 111 TM 1 1560 312 10 and the unit s SOP 3 NCMs will ensure that no fuel leaks are evident during servicing preflight and during inflight operation of the ERFS If leaks are evident stop servicing immediately and fix the problem 4 After the ERFS tank system is serviced a fuel sample will be taken from the appropriate sample area If contamination is found conduct contamination inspection procedures IAW TM 1 1560 312 10 FM 3 04 111 and FM 10 67 1 Ensure that a fuel sample has been taken after 30 MINs of servicing the ERFS tanks to allow sediment water and other contaminants to settle 5 Each crewmember will ensure that all safety and operational procedures are conducted AW FM 3 04 111 or TM 1 1560 312 10 6 The FE will ensure that all mission
323. ks NCMs will meet the minimum flight hour requirements outlined in appendix A d Additional qualifications Heads up display HUD system appendix B 2 2 REFRESHER TRAINING a Aircraft refresher training 1 RCM The RCM completes RL 3 requirements when the criteria in TC 3 04 11 are met Although DACs do not have RLs refresher training will be conducted in the same manner a Academic training The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed in paragraphs 3 4b 1 through 7 and complete an operator s manual written examination All academic training should be completed prior to flight training b Flight training The RCM will receive training from all designated crew station s with access to the flight controls A task that may be performed from either crew station does not need to be evaluated from both stations Table 2 1 and table 2 2 page 2 3 are guides for developing refresher flight training Proficiency must be demonstrated in all modes marked with an X in the D day flight T instruments flights and N night unaided columns of table 2 3 or table 2 4 pages 2 3 to 2 6 as applicable Actual hours will be based on individual crewmember proficiency The evaluation may be continuous At a minimum under Task 1070 the following emergency procedures EP must be conducted during this training in the aircraft while occupying a station with access to the flight co
324. l EMERG b The most important action when encountering IMC is to immediately begin climbing while establishing aircraft control via the instruments Once this is accomplished the transponder should be set to EMERG to alert ATC 1 Tuning navigational radios or making radio calls will be determined by local procedures The crew should contact ATC on guard and allow ATC to assign an appropriate altitude and heading course and if necessary a frequency 2 If radio contact cannot be established first the crew must ensure navigational radios are tuned as quickly as possible to determine the aircraft s position and appropriate course for recovery NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS When using NVGs it may be possible to 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 107 Chapter 4 see through a thin obscuration such as fog and drizzle with little or no degradation The NVGs may be removed or flipped up once flight is stabilized Note If IMC conditions are entered with the IR searchlight or landing light on spatial disorientation may occur Low level ambient light may induce visual illusions and spatial disorientation During NVG operations video noise may contribute to loss of visual cues SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Obscurants other than Wx can induce loss of visual contact At low altitudes where these conditions would be encountered it is extremely important that these procedures be initiated immediately to prevent ground conta
325. l assistance is easily found and promptly provided b Establish and maintain efficient workloads Manage and coordinate priorities and execute the mission workload in an effective and efficient manner with the redistribution of task responsibilities as the mission situation changes Flight duty responsibilities are performed in a timely manner where mission needs are always anticipated c Exchange mission information Establish all levels of crew and mission communications using effective patterns and techniques that allow for the flow of essential data and mission advisories among all crewmembers in a timely and accurate manner d Cross monitor performance Cross monitor each other s actions and decisions to ensure workloads and crew actions are performed in a coordinated manner and to standard Cross monitoring crewmember performance keeps a crew ready to provide aircraft and mission advisories to each other and helps reduce the likelihood of errors affecting mission performance and safety 6 4 STANDARD CREW TERMINOLOGY To enhance communication and aircrew coordination crews should use words or phrases that are understood by all participants The crew must use clear concise terms that can be easily understood and complied with in an environment full of distractions Multiple terms with the same meaning should be avoided DOD FLIP contains standard terminology for radio communications The appropriate operator s manuals contain standard termino
326. l start moving forward and stabilize at approximately 4 to 5 KTS This speed will be attained with the controls in neutral and the thrust control at the ground detent The water level will not vary significantly because of GWT or CG As observed from the cockpit the water level will appear to intersect the fuselage below the lower nose enclosure Note Aft landing gear ground proximity switches are not actuated during a water landing Therefore longitudinal cyclic pitch actuators must be manually set to ground position CAUTION If contact is made with floating debris return to HVR and assess damage TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 57 Chapter 4 TASK 1039 fa Perform Hovering Flight Utilizing Symbology CONDITIONS In a CH 47F helicopter with the HSDH or vertical situation display hover displayed at both PI stations the before hover or before landing check completed and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Correctly configure HVR symbology and modes for hovering operations 2 Perform a smooth controlled ascent to HVR 3 Perform a smooth controlled descent with minimal drift at touchdown 4 Maintain ground track 5 feet during HVR taxi 5 Ma
327. lanning System x Joe 1014 operate Aviation Lie Suppor Equpment x Js 1016 Pertorm internal Load Operations M xo Js es ee a EC Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving ha eS Checks 1025 perform Flight Mission Management Flight Mission Management a_i se Sti T 1027 Perion Heath incicatorTesvPower Assurance Ghee x s ee perom meoweciek a 1052 Perform Radio Communicators Procedures x Jer 1089 ertorm Digtal Communicatonsy Proceres x J ma penoa O De fT 1038 Porton Hoveri xl x x snc 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 9 Chapter 2 2 10 1039 erorm Hovering Fight Uilzing Symbotogy x x x sme 1040 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeo x x x s e 1042 Perform Cruise Check Procedures a ae S I NG 014 hovignte by Potage ana Deoa Reckoning fx Tx x fene 1046 Perform Electronically AidedNavgaton x fs 062 oane a X a a 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach x x _X_ S NG 1062 Perform Siope Operations h x SN 1063 Perform Externat Sting Load s Operations x x sme 1064 PerformRolLOntanding k xx sne 1068 PerformGo Around C CTC 1070 Responatoemergenies fk x x X sne 1077 Perform Procedures for Two Way Radio Failure Procedures for Two Way Radio Failure Perform Procedures for Two Way Radio Failure e bth Digital Advanced Flight Control System Off ares perform nen Manaen Perform Instrument Man
328. le by comparing the information from the PPC to the HVR PWR check b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will monitor altitude and avoid obstacles c The P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P in clearing the aircraft The P will set cargo hook switches as required and should make all radio calls When directed by the P during the approach the P will place the cargo hook master switch to the ARMED position The NCM will release the water IAW the crew briefing d The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when attention is re established outside e The NCM will remain focused primarily on the bucket The NCM will guide the P during the bucket pickup advise of the bucket condition inflight provide directions and assistance when the water is dumped and direct the P when setting down the bucket f The NCM will advise the P of any water bucket faults or failures g External sling load s procedures IAW Task 1063 will be used for normal external sling load techniques and load call outs The NCM will advise the P when the water bucket is in the water filling full water deploying and empty The NCM will instruct the P as necessary to keep the electrical attachment assembly from entering the water Procedures a Preflight
329. le contains any water or foreign matter Correctly enter appropriate information in the aircraft logbook NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS If time permits accomplish the maintenance inspection during daylight hours During the hours of darkness use a flashlight with an unfiltered lens to supplement available lighting HYD leaks oil leaks and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references aircraft logbook DA Pam 738 751 FM 3 04 7 FM 10 67 1 FM 3 04 203 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 23 series TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 240 PMD TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 23 series TM 1 1520 271 CL TM 1 1520 271 PMD and unit SOP 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 37 Chapter 4 TASK 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection CONDITIONS With a CH 47D F helicopter and given the appropriate operator s manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Perform the preflight inspection IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL b Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Status Information Record and DA Form 2408 13 1 Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record AW DA Pam 738 751 2 NCM Assist in all before preflight and preflight duties AW th
330. le from the bow 4 The ship can be used for an attitude reference during acceleration 5 During conditions of reduced visibility it may be necessary to transition to instruments for most of the takeoff Note HVR OGE PWR may be required for this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS At night and during periods of reduced visibility fly instruments or cross check the flight instruments while in the holding pattern The P will advise when he or she has the lineup line in sight The P will transition outside and make flight control adjustments as necessary to line up on final and to remain aligned with the lineup line The P will continue to assist by monitoring the flight instruments calling out airspeed and altitude as necessary 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 171 Chapter 4 OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to ch
331. le releasing water The bucket manufacturer does not recommend dumping at airspeeds above 50 KIAS KCAS Note There is a delay of appropriately 0 5 to 1 0 second between the activation of the dump switch and discharge of the water Note Avoid flight over populated areas Note A go around should also be initiated if visual contact with the water release area is lost or if a crewmember announces CLIMB CLIMB CLIMB This phrase will only be used when there is not enough time to give detailed instructions to avoid obstacle Note Refer to table 4 8 page 4 164 for a sample of a water bucket procedure guide for water bucket operations to include sample calls for dropping water Table 4 8 Water bucket procedure guide Water bucket preflight check Bottom of chain for tears in fabric Shackle and lockwire or tie wrap condition Sidewall battens Diagonal M straps connecting the suspension cables for wear Purse lines on the fabric dump valve Cinch strap belt The end opposite the D ring shall have a knot Suspension lines for frays kinks and conditions Ballast pouch in the bucket for rips or holes Control head for secure fittings 10 Tripline for kinks frays or loose swages 11 Perform operational check of control head Dumping water 1 Pl calls Altitude airspeed and monitors RAD ALT during pass 2 NCM Calls Prepare to open bucket doors approximately 10 seconds from target 3 NCM
332. le the P is flying the aircraft using the SFD Note The P should monitor the flight instruments and be prepared to accept a transfer of controls Note During an actual MFD failure under IMC change the flight controls during short intervals to minimize fatigue on a single PI TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 96 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1170 Perform Instrument Takeoff CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under IMC or simulated IMC with reference to instruments only with HVR PWR check and before takeoff checks completed and aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications l 2 3 Correctly determine instrument takeoff PWR HVR PWR plus 10 percent TQ Maintain PWR as required 2 percent TQ Maintain accelerative climb attitude 1 bar width not to exceed 10 degrees nose low until climb airspeed is attained 4 5 6 7 Maintain takeoff heading 10 degrees Maintain the aircraft in trim after 40 KIAS KCAS Maintain an appropriate R C 200 FPM Maintain desired climb airspeed 10 KIAS KCAS DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft during the VMC portion of the maneuver The P will ann
333. leted TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 22 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Chapter 6 Aircrew Coordination This chapter describes the background of aircrew coordination development It also describes the aircrew coordination principles and objectives as found in the aircrew coordination training enhancement ACT E program Note Digitization of the crew compartments has expanded and redefined the lines of responsibility for each crewmember The enhanced ability for either PI to perform most aircraft system functions from their crew station breaks down the standard delineation of duties and has added capabilities and potential distractions in training and in combat This could mean that during an unforeseen event one PI may attempt to resolve the situation rather than seeking assistance from or even communicating that action with the other crewmember It is essential for the PC to brief specific duties prior to stepping into the aircraft Effective sharing of tasks relies on good crew coordination and information management 6 1 AIRCREW COORDINATION BACKGROUND AND PLANNING STRATEGY An analysis of U S Army aviation accidents revealed that a significant percentage of aircraft accidents resulted from one or more aircrew coordination errors committed during and even before the flight mis
334. licable portions of the passenger briefing AW the CL and the unit SOPs Examples of briefing items are 1 2 3 4 5 Proper direction to approach and depart the aircraft Location of EMERG entrances exits and equipment Use of seat belts Location and general use of survival equipment Security of equipment Note Chapter 8 of the appropriate operator s manual contains a detailed passenger briefing CL TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 11 Chapter 4 TASK 1003 Conduct Flight Instruction CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an IP SI ME UT and training scenario given by the instructor STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine appropriate training plan 2 Conduct academic training as necessary 3 Conduct flight training utilizing fundamentals of instruction 4 Conducts review and critique 5 Determine appropriate entries are made on DA Form 7122 R as required DESCRIPTION 1 The trainer will brief the trainee on the training to be conducted The trainer will conduct academic training as necessary 2 Once the training is completed the trainer will conduct a debriefing on the maneuvers procedures trained The trainer will determine the appropria
335. ll assist in detecting traffic and obstacles and avoiding spatial disorientation Hazards such as wires are difficult to detect TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 44 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1027 Perform Power Assurance Check CAUTION Do not exceed the ENG TEMP Ne and TQ limits Use the appropriate charts in Section 5 of the Operators Manual to ascertain limits for current conditions CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to appropriate charts STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and complete the PAT check IAW the PAT log and TM 1 1520 240 10 or TM 1 1520 271 10 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The P will perform the checks in sequence The P should coordinate with and direct assistance from the P and NCM as necessary b The P will ensure the P is familiar with PAT check procedures c Ground procedures 1 The P briefs and coordinates with the P and NCM as necessary 2 Position the aircraft into the prevailing wind Set the brakes and direct assistance as necessary 3 Confirm the flight controls are neutral and the thrust control is in the ground detent Direct the P to monitor the flight controls and maintain aircraft control when the thrust control is not in the ground detent
336. ll and response terminology ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 6 8 Table 6 6 CH 47F NCM call and response terminology ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenteeeeeeaas 6 12 Table A 1 Training and qualification subjects 2000 eee ee enee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas A 1 Table A 2 Guide for flight training of nonrated crewmembers ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeentteeeeeaes A 2 Table A 3 Guide for flight training SEQUENCE o oo ee eeeee entre eeenteeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeetaneeeeenaas A 3 Table B 1 Heads up display training program ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas B 2 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 v Preface Training circular TC 3 04 34 standardizes aircrew training programs ATPs and flight evaluation procedures This aircrew training manual ATM provides specific guidelines for executing CH 47D F aircrew training It is based on training principles outlined at the Army Training Network located on the web at https atn army mil index aspx under the Training Management tab This ATM establishes crewmember qualification training refresher training mission training and continuation training and evaluation requirements It applies to all CH 47 crewmembers and their commanders in the active Army the Army National Guard Bureau United States Army National Guard ARNG and the United States Army Reserve USAR The CH 47D is a similar aircraft to the CH 47F the CH 47F i
337. logy for items of equipment a Table 6 1 is a list of other standard words and phrases crewmembers may use 6 4 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Standard word or phrase Abort Terminate a preplanned aircraft maneuver Affirmative Yes es No anti radiation missiles remaining Bandit An identified enemy aircraft Fuel state needed for recovery No visual contact of friendly aircraft ground position Opposite of VISUAL Immediate action command to perform an EMERG maneuver to deviate Break from the present ground track will be followed by the word RIGHT LEFT UP or DOWN Command by the P for a specified procedure to be read from the CL by the Call out other crewmember Target object Captured Specific surface target object has been acquired and is being tracked with an on board sensor Cease fire Command to stop firing but continue to track Meaning of standard word or phrase No obstacles present to impede aircraft movement along the intended ground track Will be preceded by the word nose tail or aircraft and followed by the direction for example LEFT RIGHT SLIDE LEFT or SLIDE RIGHT Also indicates that ground personnel are authorized to approach the aircraft Command to change altitude up or down normally used to control masking Come up down and unmasking operat
338. may be attempted Note If the TQ required maintaining a stationary HVR exceeds the GO NO GO TQ OGE but does not exceed the validation factor IGE all IGE maneuvers may be attempted Note If the TQ required maintaining a stationary HVR exceeds the computed validation factor the MAX GWT may have been exceeded for the environmental conditions present Anytime the GWT or environmental conditions change significantly the crew will perform additional HVR PWR checks and re compute all PPC values Significantly changed is defined as 1 000 feet PA and or 10 degrees Celcius or an increase of 1 000 pounds GWT from the departure data NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS The crew will use proper scanning techniques to avoid excessive drift when hovering at night or using NVG TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 48 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1032 Perform Radio Communication s Procedures CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given appropriate radio frequency s and applicable references STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCMs a Program check and operate aircraft avionics b Establish radio contact with the desired unit or ATC facility When communicating with ATC facilities
339. may be the AMC in a mission related situation Specific goals include the following 1 SA Crewmembers must anticipate the need to provide information or warnings to the PC or P during critical phases of the flight or mission The PC must encourage crewmembers to exercise the freedom to raise issues or offer information about safety or mission related matters In turn the crewmembers will provide the required information and warnings in a timely and professional manner None of this could be accomplished without cross monitoring performance and crew tasks 2 Mission changes and updates Crewmembers should routinely update each other while highlighting and acknowledging mission changes Crewmembers must take personal responsibility for scanning the entire flight environment considering their assigned workload and areas of scanning Each crewmember needs to appropriately adjust individual workload and task priorities with minimal verbal direction from the PC when responding to emergencies and unplanned changes of the mission 3 Offer assistance A crewmember will provide assistance information or feedback in response to another crewmember A crewmember will also offer assistance when he or she detects errors or sees that another crewmember needs help In the case where safety or mission performance is at risk immediate challenge and control measures must be assertively exercised A crewmember should quickly and professionally inform and assist
340. mber is an IP SP IE the IE will evaluate the ability of the IP SP IE to instruct instrument related areas or subjects 4 APART MP ME evaluation The ME will evaluate a minimum of two topics from the applicable subject areas in paragraph 3 4b emphasizing how they apply to MTFs 5 Other ATP evaluations The SP IP SI FI will evaluate appropriate subject areas in paragraph 3 4b EVALUATION SEQUENCE The evaluation sequence consists of four phases introduction academic evaluation topics flight evaluation and debriefing The evaluator will determine the amount of time devoted to each phase a Phase 1 Introduction In this phase the evaluator 1 Reviews the examinee s individual flight record folder and IATF records to verify that the examinee meets all prerequisites for the designation and has a current DA Form 4186 Medical Recommendation for Flying Duty 2 Confirms the purpose of the evaluation explains the evaluation procedure and discusses the evaluation standards and criteria to be used Phase 2 Academic oral evaluation topics 1 Regulations and publications AR 95 1 AR 95 2 Federal Aviation Regulations FARs DA Pamphlet DA Pam 738 751 Department of Defense Flight Information Publication DOD FLIP TC 3 04 11 TM 1 1500 328 23 TM 1 1520 240 23 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 23 TM 1 1520 271 10 chapters 5 8 and 9 and local and unit SOPs Topics in this subject area are ATP IATF CTL requirements Ai
341. ment Flight for Army Aviators 30 April 2007 FM 3 05 203 Special Forces Direct Action Operations U 30 January 2009 FM 3 05 212 Special Forces Waterborne Operations 30 September 2009 FM 3 21 38 Pathfinder Operations 25 April 2006 FM 3 21 220 Static Line Parachuting Techniques and Tactics MCWP 3 15 7 AFMAN 11 420 NAVSEA SS400 AF MMO 010 23 September 2003 FM 3 34 210 Explosive Hazards Operations 27 March 2007 FM 3 52 Army Airspace Command and Control in a Combat Zone 01 August 2002 FM 4 20 142 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment Rigging Loads for Special Operations 19 September 2007 FM 4 20 197 Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load Basic Operations and Equipment MCRP 4 11 3E VOL I NTTP 3 04 11 AFMAN 11 223 1 VOL I COMDINST M13482 2B 20 July 2006 FM 4 20 199 Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load Single Point Load Rigging Procedures COMDINST M13482 4B MCRP 4 11 3E VOL III NTTP 3 04 13 AFMAN 11 223 1 VOL II 20 February 2009 ADP 7 0 Training Units and Developing Leaders 23 August 2013 FM 8 10 6 Medical Evacuation in a Theater of Operations Tactics Techniques and Procedures 14 April 2000 FM 55 450 2 Army Helicopter Internal Load Operations 05 June 1992 TC 3 04 7 Army Aviation Maintenance 02 February 2010 TC 3 04 11 Commander s Aircrew Training Program for Individual Crew and Collective Training 19 November 2009 TC 3 04 93 Aeromedical Training for Flight Personnel 31
342. mission and for operating securing and ensures that the FE CE has serviced the helicopter The PC ensures a crew briefing is accomplished and the mission is performed IAW the mission briefing air traffic control ATC instructions Federal Aviation Administration FAA Order 7110 65R regulations and SOP requirements c PI FE CE The PI FE CE is responsible for completing tasks as assigned by the PC d P The P is responsible for aircraft control obstacle avoidance and the proper execution of EPs The P will announce any deviations and the reason from instruction issued The P will announce changes in altitude attitude airspeed or direction e P The P is the mission manager responsible for navigation inflight computations manipulating common avionics architecture system CAAS assisting the P as requested and the proper execution of EPs When duties permit he or she assists the P with obstacle clearance FE s CE s The FE s CE s are responsible for maintaining airspace surveillance traffic and obstacle avoidance safety security of passengers and equipment and properly executing EPs They also provide assistance to the P and P as required FE s CE s are responsible for the maintenance of their assigned aircraft g Trainer evaluator When acting as pilot during training and evaluations the trainer evaluator will act as a functioning crewmember and perform as required unless he or she is training or e
343. mplete airworthiness qualification for Army aircraft for which USAAMCOM has engineering cognizance will be forwarded to the Commander USAAMCOM ATTN AMSAM RD AE I Redstone Arsenal AL 35898 5000 Requests normally will come through the materiel developer such as the program executive office or the system s program project product manager or from the field through a major command Requests for airworthiness approval for major modifications installed on aircraft not under USAAMCOM engineering cognizance will be forwarded to the appropriate engineering cognizant agency such as the FAA National Aeronautics and Space Administration U S Air Force or U S Navy Refer to AR 70 62 paragraph 2 3 READINGS RECOMMENED These readings contain relevant supplemental information AR 385 10 Army Aviation Accident Prevention 23 August 2007 FM 3 11 3 Multiservice Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear Contamination Avoidance MCWP 3 37 2A NTTP 3 11 25 AFTT P 1 3 2 56 2 February 2006 FM 3 11 11 Flame Riot Control Agents and Herbicide Operations MCRP 3 3 7 2 19 August 1996 FM 3 22 68 CrewServed Weapons 21 July 2006 FM 17 95 Cavalry Operations 24 December 1996 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 References 5 References TM 10 1670 201 23 Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for General Maintenance of Parachutes and Other Airdrop Equipment TO 13C 1 41 NAVAIR 13 1 17 I
344. mplete the training outlined below 1 Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of 2 2 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Training the applicable topics in paragraphs 3 4b 7 and 10 Academic training should be completed prior to flight training 2 Flight training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate proficiency in all base tasks marked with an X in the NVG column of table 2 3 or table 2 4 pages 2 3 to 2 6 as applicable During NVG training base task training must be completed prior to performing mission tasks with the exception of Tasks 2081 and 2086 The commander may select additional base tasks 3 Minimum flight hours There are no minimum flight hour requirements The training is proficiency based determined by the crewmember s ability to accomplish the designated tasks satisfactorily Table 2 3 Rated crewmember base task list qualification refresher training Legend D Tasks that must be performed during day flight Tasks that must be performed during instrument flight N Tasks that must be performed during unaided night flight NVG Tasks that must be evaluated at night in the aircraft while the RCM is wearing the NVG Thesetasks apply to CH 47F only rat O om phh 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Brieing xx x 1004 Pian a Visual Fight Rules Fight l 71006 Plan an instrument Fight Rules Fight SS
345. n 20 ec eee eeeee ee eete eee e tte e eee taeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 4 12 Task 1004 Plan a visual flight rules flight 0 ec eee eceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeteaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 4 13 Task 1006 Plan an instrument flight rules flight 2 0 00 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeeaas 4 15 Task 1010 Prepare a performance planning Card c cccecceceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeseestcaeeneees 4 17 Task 1012 Verify aircraft weight and balance ee eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeetnaeeeeeeaas 4 31 Task 1013 Operate mission planning system c ccccceeceeeeeeee etnies ee tnneeeeetieeeeetnieeeeeeea 4 32 Task 1014 Operate aviation life support equipment cccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeesstnneeeees 4 34 Task 1016 Perform internal load operations cccceceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeseesnnaeeeeees 4 35 Task 1019 Perform preventive maintenance daily CHECKS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeenaas 4 37 Task 1022 Perform preflight INSPECTION cecececeeececeeeeeeeeeeceaeceee ceed seceaeeeeeeeseteensnaees 4 38 Task 1024 Perform before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks 4 39 Task 1025 g Perform flight mission ManageMent ce eeeceee eee eeeeeeteeeeeeteaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 4 41 Task 1026 Maintain airspace surveillance ccccceeeeeeeeceececeeeeeseceneaaeeeeeeeetsessnaeeeeess 4 43 Task 1027 Perform power assurance CheCK
346. n neutral pedal measurement Depress centering device release switch and center the directional pedals The pedals do not need to be perfectly centered Place a tape measure flat on the floor structure and measure distance between the aft face of each pedal assembly and the forward edge of the cyclic boot plate Noting each measurement mathematically compute the average The result of this computation is the neutral pedal measurement This measurement reference will allow the MP to measure only one pedal to determine pedal separation during the rest of the MTF If this measurement is not obtained both pedals will need to be measured in order to determine separation h Cyclic stick position indicator check Verify the rigging adjustment of the stick position indicator so that it may be used for future longitudinal stick position measurements during the MTF with the following procedures Reference longitudinal and lateral measurement labels in the cockpit and place the cyclic in position according to the labels The measurement will be made from placard target to the center of the FLARE DISP button on CH 47D and IAW the figure in Section 5 of the operator s manual for CH 47F MTF manual Once cyclic has been positioned to satisfy the measurements note the stick position indicator The indicator should read IAW the appropriate MTF manual If this procedure is not completed or the stick position indicator is found to be in error a tape measure must be use
347. n the wheels when attempting to acquire data with the thrust control set above the GROUND detent This light loading of the landing gear may cause cycling of the LCTs If cycling occurs the LCTs may be placed to MANUAL If MANUAL is selected ensure LCTs are programmed to the GROUND position Applying up to 2 inches of AFT cyclic may also be used to correct prevent cycling however this may cause the forward gear to leave the ground Once the data has been acquired and the thrust control is lowered back to the ground detent place LCTs back to AUTO and or neutralize flight controls as required b Direct sunlight will occasionally cause blade tracking camera acquisition errors and the aircraft may have to be repositioned before blade track data can be obtained c Apply power train vibration corrections as required IAW the applicable IETM d Verify all required steps are completed Crew stations The MP must be in the left seat for the GEN under frequency checks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 10 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4112 Perform Taxi Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given access to the applicable MTF manual CL with the before taxi check complete and aircraft cleared STANDARDS A
348. nce points to assist in maintaining the takeoff flight path c The P and NCM will announce when ready for takeoff and will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing and to provide adequate warning of obstacles d The P will monitor PWR requirements and advise the P if PWR limits are being approached The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside e The NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft advise the P when the forward and aft landing gear are off the ground and obstacle avoidance Procedures a From the ground 1 The P will announce his or her intent to takeoff from the ground The P will focus his or her attention primarily outside the aircraft but will occasionally cross check the flight instruments 2 All crewmembers will clear the aircraft 3 The P will select reference points to maintain ground track With the cyclic and pedals in the neutral position the P will release the brakes as required and raise the thrust control until the aircraft is airborne and accelerating 4 All landing gear should leave the ground at the same time As the aircraft leaves the ground the P will apply forward cyclic control as required to smoothly accelerate through effective translational lift ETL at an altitude appropriate for the terrain and obstacles 5 The P will adjust the cyclic as necessary to continue the acceleration appr
349. nces permit accomplish preflight inspection during daylight hours d The NCM will ensure that all cowlings and equipment are secured on completion of preflight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS If performing the preflight inspection during the hours of darkness a flashlight with an unfiltered lens should be used to supplement available lighting HYD leaks oil leaks and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens Ensure that internal and external lighting is operational FM 3 04 203 contains details regarding night time preflight inspection TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted at the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted at the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 04 203 and DA Pam 738 751 4 38 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks Note Anytime a NCM is outside the aircraft or inside the aircraft with the ENGs operating and the left hand LH escape panel REMOVED the upper cabin door OPEN or the ramp cargo door RET the NCM s visor will be down unless using NVG CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the applicable operator s manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform procedures and checks IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL 2 Both PI
350. ncludes C1 C7 30 October 1973 TM 11 5841 283 12 Aviation Unit Maintenance Manual for Radar Signal Detecting Set AN APR 39 V NSN 5841 01 023 7112 NAVAIR 16 30 APR 39 1 9 August 1983 TM 11 5855 238 10 Operator s Manual for Night Vision Goggles Ground Use AN PVS 5 and AN PVS 5A NSN 5855 00 150 1820 EIC IPD AN PVS 5B 5855 01 228 0938 EIC IPV AN PVS 5C 5855 01 228 0936 EIC IPU Aviation Use GM 6 V 1 Goggles GM 6 V 2 Goggles 15 May 1993 TM 11 5865 263 12 Operator s and Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM Manual for Countermeasures Sets AN ALQ 156 V 1 V 2 V3 V 1 NSN 5865 01 145 5197 EIC KDP V 2 NSN 5865 01 156 0460 EIC KD3 V3 NSN 5865 01 156 0459 EIC KD2 1 September 1996 References 6 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 A academic evaluation topics 3 4 after action reviews 6 6 B base tasks 2 9 c caution meaning of 1 1 checklist after action review 4 127 aircrew briefing 4 8 crew briefing for external sling load s 4 87 fast rope operations 4 162 nonrated crew briefing 4 9 crew coordination Refer to chapter 6 crew terminology 6 6 crewmember evaluation 3 2 academic criteria 3 3 performance criteria 3 2 cross monitoring 6 5 currency requirements 2 15 D decision making techniques 6 3 E engine peculiar tasks 5 4 evaluation debriefing 3 8 5 April 2013 Index evaluation principles 3 1 evaluation sequence 3 4 evaluators selection of 3 1
351. nd descend This maneuver will cause the fighter PI to increase the attack angle c Depending on the fighter s dive angle it may be advantageous to turn sharply and maneuver away once attacker is committed The fighter PI will then have to break off the attack to recover from the maneuver d Once the fighter breaks off the attack maneuver the helicopter to take advantage of terrain vegetation and shadow for concealment 4 Heat seeking missiles a M 130 As appropriate employ the ASE to counter heat seeking devices while maneuvering to avoid the threat If a missile is detected apply forward cyclic and turn the heat source away from the threat Attempt to mask the aircraft while orienting crew served weapons for suppressive fire b CMWS ALE 47 AAR 57 If a missile is detected initially maintain course altitude and allow the countermeasure system to defeat the threat Perform the appropriate combat maneuvering flight Task 2127 maneuver and turn to an oblique angle from the threat to minimizing the profile of the aircraft while evading Delay a descent momentarily after last flare launch to allow for IR missile decoy Attempt to mask the aircraft while orienting employing crew served weapons for suppressive fire 5 Radar guided missiles Perform the appropriate combat maneuvering flight Task 2127 maneuver to break the line of sight to the radar source while simultaneously activating chaff if available Maneuver away from th
352. nd ENG Start 2 or 1 Clear for start During two crewmember run up wait until the aft CE is posted on 1 before starting 2 Refer to Note 3 ENG COND Levers FLT 1 and 2 Clear to flight Visually scan entire aircraft for abnormal conditions Fluid drain lines Check Normal Verify any fluid draining from drain lines is not excessive 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 13 Chapter 6 Table 6 6 CH 47F NCM call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks EAPS ENG 1 and ENG 2 1 and 2 EAPS Fans clear Verify the No 1 and No 2 ENG EAPS fans FAN switches ON as are clear of any personnel required DECU Start BIT Perform 1 and 2 Clear towards ground 88 on Refer to Note 2 1 and 2 FADEC System REV System CE is positioned forward of the ramp hinge check first flight of day and clear of ENGs APU Switch OFF APU clear off Aft CE monitors APU for fire then closes EMERG fluid shutoff access door after APU is off Ground Operation FUEL PUMP and XFEED XFEEDs closed lights out After PI completes FUEL PUMP switches Check operation check aft CE ensures LH and RH crossfeed valves close and transition lights come on then go out when PI places XFEED switch to CLOSED Chocks Removed and Removed and secured Ensure chocks are secured by some means secured in the cabin area Flare chaff dispenser safety Removed and stowed Aft CE removes and secures the CMWS pin As required safety pin Ramp and c
353. nd HVR with no drift When stabilized note the stick position indicator A tape measure may be used if the stick position indicator was previously determined to be in error For lateral and directional pedal separation measurements maneuver the aircraft to a stabilized HVR into the wind with no drift Using a tape measure note the distance from the lateral placard target to the center of the FLARE DISP button on the cyclic for CH 47D and IAW the note in the MTF manual for CH 47F Determine pedal separation by placing the tape measure flat on the floor and note the distance between the aft face of one pedal assembly to the forward edge of the cyclic boot plate Note the difference of the measurement to the neutral pedal measurement The difference will need to be multiplied by two to determine separation If a neutral pedal measurement was not obtained previously both pedals will 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 13 Chapter 5 3 need to be measured to determine separation If cyclic placard values are suspected to be in error verify measurements with rigging fixtures as required AW with the appropriate IETM d AFCS DAFCS functional check Adverse engagement transients errors may be experienced during the engagement error check when the AFCS DAFCS system SEL switch is cycled from the BOTH position to No 1 No 2 and to OFF Prior to directing the RCM to cycle the AFCS DAFCS system SEL switch brief the possible malfunctions and corrective act
354. nd the aircraft Under certain conditions such as adverse winds it may be necessary to perform a traffic pattern to optimize conditions at the desired termination point Note Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO Task 1170 or unusual attitude recovery Task 1182 if ground reference is lost Note At night use of landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust 4 56 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS Select good references to avoid unanticipated drift All crewmembers must be focused primarily outside for obstacle avoidance LANDING FROM A HOVER TO WATER Prior to landing the PITOT HEAT switch must be ON The ramp lower half of the cabin door lower rescue door and drain plugs must be closed Landing searchlights shall be RET From a stabilized HVR decrease thrust control for a smooth rate of descent 1 A vertical descent rather than a descent with some forward movement will tend to disperse the swirling water spray under a no wind condition As the aft wheels and then the fuselage near the water continue to lower the thrust control to ground detent As more of the fuselage enters the water buoyancy will level the helicopter attitude 2 As the attitude approaches level the helicopter wil
355. nditions Note The values in items 79 and 80 are based on the MAX END R C airspeed at the MAX altitude attainable with the standard TEMP lapse rate applied c Arrival data Not required when manually computing the PPC if environmental data at destination or intermediate stops has not significantly changed 1 000 feet PA and or 10 degrees C or an increase of 1 000 pounds GWT from the departure data Item 81 LANDING GWT Record the estimated landing GWT Item 82 LANDING GWT with a LOAD Record the estimated landing GWT Item 83 PA Record the forecast PA at destination at estimated time of arrival ETA Item 84 FAT Record the forecast FAT at destination at ETA Item 85 MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN Refer to item 9 for definition Using the MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the MAX TQ AVAIL for DUAL ENG operation Refer to item 9 Item 86 MAX TQ AVAIL SE Refer to item 10 for definition Using the contingency SE TQ AVAIL or contingency TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the MAX TQ AVAIL for SE operation Refer to item 10 Item 87 MAX TQ AVAIL 30 MIN or INTERMEDIATE TQ AVAIL Refer to item 11 for definition Using the MAX TQ AVAIL 30 MIN chart and the forecast arrival conditions record the MAX TQ AVAIL 30 MIN for DUAL ENG operation Refer to item 11 Item 88 CONT TQ AVAIL DUAL ENG Refer to item 12 for definition Using the CONT TQ AVAIL chart and the forecast conditions at time of arrival
356. nducted IAW the appropriate CH 47D F MTF manual 3 Cargo ramp and door The NCM will ensure that the ramp area is clear of obstruction Check the APU start ACCUM for minimum PRESS IAW the appropriate operator s manual Ensure that the ramp control handle is at STOP and the ramp is level with the cabin floor Ensure that the ramp operational check is IAW appropriate CH 47D F MTF manual 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 113 Chapter 4 4 Lights The NCM will assist the P in checking and setting their searchlights and will notify the MP that the anti collision position and formation lights are operational 5 Swivel locks check The NCM will check the swivel lock actuators and inform the MP of their position locked or unlocked 6 Ramp isolation check The NCM will lower the ramp until it rests on the ground and will place the ramp control handle in the STOP position When the MP announces RAMP ISOLATION SWITCH OFF the NCM will attempt to raise the ramp and will give the MP the appropriate response 7 Fire pull handle and cross feed fuel valve checks The NCM will be positioned to observe the fuel and XFEED valves When the MP pulls the fire pull handle or places the XFEED valve switch to the OPEN position the NCM will check the fuel valves and appropriate lights for proper operation When the MP pushes in the fire pull handle or places the XFEED valve switch to the CLOSED position the NCM will check
357. ne ENG only Abort start ENG Start primary mode OVSPD ENG Start REV mode FADEC system SYS including REV mode beep Generator checks Ground instability AFCS DAFCS Function HVR and inflight No 1 No 2 or BOTH No 1 or No 2 only i Note DAFCS is not evaluated when the switch is in the BOTH position TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 5 2 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TQ differential Thrust control cockpit position transducer check Autorotation PAC including calculating a trigger value 3 Evaluator The evaluator may evaluate any additional maintenance tasks during the evaluation in addition to the minimum required maneuvers for APART For MP APART evaluation MP is RL 1 the MP will be in the left seat during the evaluation and the ME may occupy any other crew station if authorized on the DA Form 7120 R If the MP is in mission training for maintenance tasks MP is RL 2 the ME may perform training from the left or right seat During final evaluations intended on designating an MP RL 1 following the completion of mission training the ME will be in the right seat For ME APART evaluation the evaluator may be in the left seat or other crew station if authorized on DA Form 7120 R and there is a qualified MP in the left seat The ME will be evaluated on his or her ability to evaluate assist and recover from the minimum tasks and any additional task s as selected by the evaluator 4 Ifthe MP ME is required to perform
358. ne until the aircraft is close to the landing area Reduce airspeed to slightly above ETL until the rate of closure can be determined 3 Before reaching the edge of the landing area reconfirm performance planning and determine if sufficient PWR will be available TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 NIGHT Crewmember Tasks 4 Base on the performance data decide whether to continue the approach or make a go around If a go around is required it should be performed before decelerating below ETL If the approach is continued terminate in the landing area to a HVR or to the surface 5 After touching down check aircraft stability as the thrust control is lowered Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL Note A mountain environment is defined IAW the FAR Part 91 for the CONUS Areas not depicted in FAR Part 91 or host country publications will be identified as mountainous when in an area of steeply sloping terrain with more than 500 feet elevation relief and terrain elevation more than 5 000 feet above MSL Note To successfully operate in small areas it may be necessary to place the nose of the aircraft over the edge of the landing area This may cause a loss of important visual references on final approach In some locations it may not be possible to lower the forward or aft landing gear on the ground while on off loading The description
359. ng area This may cause a loss of important visual references when on final approach All crewmembers must assist in providing information on aircraft position in the landing area MUD MUSKEG TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS Select a suitable area and terminate the approach to a 10 foot HVR over the intended touchdown point Begin a vertical descent until the aircraft touches down Check aircraft stability while lowering the thrust control If the area is suitable lower the thrust control to the ground detent position and neutralize the cyclic and pedals TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 The evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 73 Chapter 4 TASK 1062 Perform Slope Operations CAUTION Landings to the ground will be accomplished with the ramp in the full up position unless internal cargo loading prohibits or if tactical situation dictates If landing with the ramp in other than the full up position caution must be exercised by the crew to avoid ramp contact with the ground CAUTION To prevent droop stop pounding do not exceed ground control limitations after all landing gear contact the ground CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with aircraft cleared and given a slope area STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RC
360. ng the flight why to build the flight s SA Always preface threat calls with the flight call sign to avoid potential confusion in situations where multiple flights are using the same frequency a Aircrew coordination throughout the EVM sequence is of paramount importance Crews should brief and practice actions during EVM to ensure efficiency and communication effectiveness In any case the person observing the enemy fire must communicate to the P in order for the P to be able to effectively execute EVM The aircrew must communicate the threat information to other aircraft in the flight and after the immediate danger is past to the appropriate outside agencies for battlefield SA 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 129 Chapter 4 b The first crewmember to realize enemy fire will announce the nature and direction of the threat by the most immediate means available c The P will announce the direction of threat to other aircraft and his intent The P will remain focused outside the aircraft during the event and should be aware that crewmembers involved in returning suppressive fire may be unavailable for assisting in obstacle avoidance or noting other threat sources The P is responsible for safe performance of EVM and aircraft control d The P will be alert for obstacles and new threat sources encountered during the event The P will remain oriented on threat location and assist clearing the aircraft and will announce warning to avoid obstacle
361. ngencySE TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVAIL for cruise conditions Move vertically to the first intersection of the actual GWT line If the intersection is below the MAX R C and END airspeed line record the airspeed that will allow continued SE operation If the TQ line is to the left of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line enter N A for the minimum airspeed When the TQ line is to the right of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line below the MAX R C and END airspeed line enter OGE for the MIN airspeed that will allow continued SE operation Note The effect of external drag is not accounted for in item 75 Item 76 MAX SE AIRSPEED no LOAD MAX SE IAS CAS is used to determine the MAX airspeed that can be maintained while operating SE Using the appropriate cruise chart enter the chart at 50 percent of the computed contingency SE TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVAIL for cruise conditions Move vertically to the intersection of the actual GWT line above the MAX R C and END airspeed line Record the MAX airspeed that will allow continued SE operation If the 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 27 Chapter 4 TQ line is to the left of the actual GWT line and does not intersect the actual GWT line enter N A for the MAX airspeed Item 77 MAX SE AIRSPEED with a LOAD Refer to item 76 for definition Using the appropriate cruise chart enter the chart at 50 percent of the computed contingency SE TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVA
362. nnually I FAC 3 18 hours semi annually regardless of distance from a CH 47F TFPS Note FS requirements are based on the individual s primary aircraft designation d Annual task and iteration requirements The minimum requirements are as follows 1 FAC 1 and FAC 2 Each crewmember must perform at least one task iteration annually in each required flight mode as indicated in table 2 6 or table 2 7 pages 2 10 to 2 13 the tasks selected from table 2 5 page 2 7 and additional tasks on the CTL One iteration of each task must be performed in the aircraft Tasks performed at night or while using NVG may be counted for day iterations The crewmember is responsible for maintaining proficiency in each task The commander may require additional iterations of specific tasks ATP commanders will designate DAC annual task and iteration requirements on DA Form 7120 1 R DA Form 7120 2 R and DA Form 7120 3 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Remarks and Certification 2 FAC 3 Each crewmember must perform annually at least one iteration of each task annotated on the CTL in the FS or TFPS The crewmember is responsible for maintaining proficiency in each task The commander may require additional iterations of specific tasks 3 MPs and Mes In addition to the required minimum annual tasks and iterations MPs and Mes will perform a minimum of four iterations of MTF tasks listed in table 2 9 page 2 14 annually Mes will perf
363. nother altitude 3 Release the brakes as necessary b Hovering flight 1 Adjust the cyclic to maintain a stationary HVR or to HVR in the desired direction 2 Control heading with the pedals and maintain altitude with the thrust control Maintain a constant HVR speed appropriate for the conditions 3 To return to a stationary HVR apply cyclic in the opposite direction while maintaining heading with the pedals and altitude with the thrust control c Hovering turns 1 Around the nose With the aircraft stationary pick a point slightly forward of the nose Control the direction and rate of turn with the cyclic pedals and maintain altitude with the thrust control Cross control of the cyclic and pedals is required to pivot around the nose 2 Around the center cargo hook With the aircraft at a stationary HVR and the cargo hook over the pivot point apply pedal in the desired direction of turn Maintain a stationary position over the pivot point with the cyclic Control the rate of turn with the pedals and maintain altitude with the thrust control 3 Around the tail With the aircraft at a stationary HVR and the pivot point under the tail apply cyclic and pedal in the direction of the intended turn Use cyclic and pedal s to control the rate of turn and movement Maintain HVR altitude with the thrust control d Landing from a HVR 1 Lower the thrust control to affect a smooth rate of descent until the aft gear contacts the ground
364. nsertion c The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles The P and NCM will also assist the P in maintaining a stable HVR The NCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for fast rope operations Procedures a To perform a FRIES assault execute a VMC approach to the insertion point On final approach adjust airspeed and altitude during the approach to stop over the insertion point at a predetermined TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks HVR height not to exceed rope length At a stabilized HVR the FRIES operation begins Remain over the area at a stabilized HVR until all ropers and ropes are clear b After ropers are clear crewmembers will pull the ropes back inside the aircraft or release them by pulling the locking device and detaching the rope Keep the aircraft stationary until the ROPES CLEAR signal is given Note Tasks 1038 and 1411 contain procedures that may be used in performing this task Note A high HVR especially if a 90 foot rope is used may cause the loss of all visual HVR cues Note Refer to table 4 9 for a sample FRIES CL NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Due to loss of forward references during decelerations recommend MAX pitch attitude of 15 degrees Use IR bypass band filter searchlight as necessary to maintain position and HVR altitude for NVG operations Proper scanning techniques are necessar
365. nternal or outside Call made as appropriate for the conditions For example OA24 on 1 or 2 Ground contact Indicating lights Check both off Before Takeoff Both off out 6 10 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 5 CH 47D call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks Crew passengers and mission Aft ready forward ready equipment Check Refer to Note 5 Cruise Check Ramp check in progress Ramp is inside Ramp is outside Cabin door If single crewmember combine the calls inside Ramp and cabin check For example ramp and cabin check in complete Ibs of fuel internal progress Ramp is inside Ramp and cabin or system normal if the ERFS check complete system normal lbs of tanks are not installed Cabin door fuel internal Ramp is outside is outside Before Landing Crew passengers and mission Aft ready forward ready equipment Check Refer to Note 5 Aft CE will always call first Ramp area Check every 30 MINs Aft CE always calls first After Landing Ground contact lights Check i Engine Shutdown Ramp is not on the ground but Aft CE can Ramps required Ramp Islevel exit the aircraft via the ramp Mission equipment Safe as Safe in the rear or not installed Once the M 130 or AN ALE 47 safety pin is required installed Ramp CE monitors the APU for any abnormal condition or fire positioned
366. ntrol pallet rigging centering spring and magnetic brake operation with the following procedures 1 Depress the centering device release switch and move the cyclic to the mechanical stop in any axis Release the centering device release switch and verify the cyclic remains within inch of where it was released Without pressing the centering device release switch move the cyclic to the opposite stop in the same axis checking for binding in the centering spring and ability to override magnetic brake control centering Relax pressure on cyclic and allow it to slowly return to the original trimmed position in the same axis Verify the cyclic returns to the approximate original position Check the remaining three axis with the cyclic using the same procedures 2 Check the yaw axis by pressing the centering device release switch and setting either pedal full forward and release the centering device release switch Verify the pedals maintain the trimmed position within 2 inch Without pressing the centering device release move the other pedal to the full forward position and then allow it to return to its original trimmed position Verify that it returns to the approximate original position The RCM may ride along on the pedals TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks to ensure the pedals are not inadvertently released while displacing them against the center springs which may cause damage to the flight controls 3 Ifthe flight
367. ntrols These EPs can be performed concurrently Single engine SE failure at altitude ENG or fuselage fire inflight p ENG transmission XMSN hot IJ ENG 1 or ENG 2 XMSN warning 2 Refresher training as a result of a training or evaluation deficiency Academic and flight training required as a result of a training deficiency or an unsatisfactory evaluation will consist of the academic training flight training and evaluation required to regain proficiency At a minimum the evaluation will consist of the deficient task s and any other tasks selected by the commander or the evaluator There is no requirement to complete the entire refresher training program outlined in this ATM as a result of a training or evaluation deficiency The evaluation may be continuous Table 2 1 Refresher flight training guide rated crewmember Flight Instruction Hours Day and night base task training 6 0 Flight evaluation 2 0 Instrument base task training aircraft flight simulator 8 0 Instrument evaluation 2 0 Total hours 18 0 Recommend a minimum of 2 hours of instrument base task training be in the aircraft Table 2 2 Refresher flight training guide nonrated crewmember Flight Instruction Hours Day and night base task training 6 0 Flight evaluation 2 0 Total hours 8 0 b NVG refresher training NVG considerations for each task when applicable are covered in chapter 4 The crewmember must co
368. ny ropes are released If the roper s equipment becomes fouled on the ramp or probe ensure that the roper is locked in on the rope before freeing the equipment Maintain visual contact with the roper until equipment is freed CAUTION Weight bags must remain attached to any rope that is retrieved into the aircraft CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F properly configured and HVR OGE PWR is AVAIL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger briefing b Maintain appropriate HVR altitude 5 feet c Maintain ropes in continuous contact with the ground d Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended HVR point e HVR symbology selected at P station 2 NCM general duties a Properly clear aircraft and make rope calls informing PIs of status of ropes and passengers b Check that all equipment is installed properly c Ensure that load s passengers weight does not exceed aircraft limitations d Ensure that equipment is rigged properly when performing equipment drops e Ensure that ropes are on the ground before releasing ropers f Use proper terminology DESCRIPTION Note The PC will ensure that the intended P for the maneuver is assigned the seat position that will afford the greatest visibility for conducting the maneuver 1 Crew actions a PC conducts or directs a crewmember to conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensur
369. o ensure that the aircraft is clear and ready for the ENG start h The NCM performing crew duties from the ramp station and the NCM performing crew duties from the cabin door station will have an aircraft portable fire extinguisher in hand during aircraft ENG start and shutdown procedures i The NCM PIs will complete the post flight AW the appropriate operator s manual CL j On completion of required maintenance and inspection the NCM will verify the aircraft is properly moored and protective covers and security devices are properly installed AW the appropriate operators manual CL k Perform additional security duties as directed by the PC NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Prior to starting the ENGs ensure that all internal and external lights are operational and set Internal lighting levels must be high enough to easily see the instruments and to start the ENGs without exceeding operating limitations SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Ensure that all rotating components and inlets exhausts are clear of ice snow prior to starting APU ENGs TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Pam 738 751 and PAC log 4 40 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1025 fa Perform Flight Mission Management CONDITIONS In a CH 47F helicopter with a
370. o the actions of an ineffective crewmember 1 In such cases a realistic meaningful and planned method should be developed to effectively pass this task back to the examinee In all other situations the evaluator must perform as outlined in the task description or as directed by the examinee to determine the examinee s level of proficiency the evaluator may intentionally perform as an ineffective crewmember In such cases a realistic meaningful and planned method should be developed to pass this task back to the examinee effectively and avoid compromise of crew safety 2 During the flight evaluation the evaluator will normally perform as outlined in the task description or as directed by the examinee At some point the evaluator may perform a role reversal with the examinee The examinee must be informed of the initiation and termination of role reversals The examinee must know when he or she is supported by a fully functioning crewmember Note When evaluating a PC SP IP IE ME UT or IE the evaluator must advise the examinee that during role reversal the evaluator may deliberately perform some tasks or crew coordination outside the standards to check the examinee s diagnostic and corrective action skills 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 3 1 Chpater 3 3 2 3 3 a GRADING CONSIDERATIONS Academic evaluation The examinee must demonstrate a working knowledge and understanding of the appropriate subject areas in paragra
371. obstruction the crewmember will visually check behind the seat and soundproofing for obstructions 6 Passengers and individual equipment a Passengers Ensure passengers are seated with seatbelts secured Monitor passengers for symptoms of airsickness b Individual equipment All individual equipment not secured to a person or held in the hands will be secured Equipment will not be stored secured under or behind seats that are occupied 7 Area outside aircraft Check both sides check fuel cells ENG area and aft pylon area for leaks damage or loose cowlings 8 Internal cargo a Check for proper security and condition during flight Ensure equipment boxes tool boxes and so forth are secured during flight b Cargo containing fuel for example vehicles or internal tanks ERFS Check for fumes or leaks during flight Inform the PI immediately if fuel is leaking inside the cabin area or if fuel fumes exist 9 Main formers in cabin roof Check for unusual vibration 10 No 1 and No 2 ENGs Visually check for leaks 11 Combining XMSN area Check for leaks and unusual vibration 12 ENG mount and drive shaft areas Check for unusual vibrations 13 Maintenance panel Check for system malfunction a HYD PRESS Check the FLT CONT and UTIL HYD PRESS gauges for normal PRESS Ensure there is no more than 50 pounds per square inch psi fluctuation in any HYD gauge e FLT PRESS Normal PRESS between 2 500
372. ollowing additions modifications 1 Confirm minimum ENG coast down time IAW the appropriate MTF manual 2 Complete or update applicable forms and records as required 3 Brief NCM to go no higher than the lower ENG work platform if visually checking compressor blades for coast down time DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The MP will direct assistance from the RCM and NCM They will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform IAW the appropriate MTF manual a ENG coast down time Start ENG coast down timing when the ECL is placed to STOP Reference for coast down will be the N Ng indications in the cockpit If minimum coast down time is not met based upon N Ng indications an alternate method will need to be used The primary alternate method is verifying N Ng indications electronically through the DECU ECU by use of a SPORT or MSD computer If a computer is not available the NCM may be directed to view the compressor blades and announce when they stop rotating after the ENG is shut down If this method is used place the ECL of the ENG being checked to STOP and start a timer Once a normal ENG shutdown is verified from the cockpit and by the NCM the NCM may inspect the compressor blades through the all weather FOD screen This visual inspection method will not be used if operating with EAPS If operating with EAPS coast down time will be confirmed electronically through the DECUs ECUs b Verify all required steps are comp
373. om both positions Commanders will develop a program to meet this requirement 1 2 SYMBOL USAGE AND WORD DISTINCTIONS a Symbol usage 1 The diagonal is used to indicate and or or which means one or the other or both For example IP SP may mean IP or SP or it may mean IP and SP For NCMs SI flight instructor FI may mean SI or FI or it may mean SI and FI 2 P indicates pilot on the controls P indicates pilot not on the controls The symbol KD indicates a CH 47D model specific item or task to be completed or briefed The symbol J with an F indicates a CH 47F model specific item or task to be completed or briefed b Word distinctions 1 Warnings cautions and notes These words emphasize important and critical instructions a Warning A warning is an operating procedure or a practice that if not correctly followed could result in personal injury or loss of life b Caution A caution is an operating procedure or a practice that if not strictly observed could result in damage to or destruction of equipment c Note A note highlights essential information of a non threatening nature 2 Will shall must should may and can These words distinguish between mandatory preferred and acceptable methods of accomplishment a Will shall or must indicate a mandatory requirement b Should is used to indicate a non mandatory but preferred method of accomplishment
374. on to terminate to the surface with zero speed or with forward movement will depend on the aircraft s loading environmental conditions Touchdown with minimum lateral movement After surface contact ensure that the aircraft remains stable until all movement stops Smoothly lower the thrust control to the full down position and neutralize the pedals and cyclic Apply brakes if required c Go around The P should perform a go around if a successful landing is doubtful or if visual reference with the intended termination point is lost Once climb is established re assess the situation and develop a new course of action Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL Note If wind conditions may be a factor a wind evaluation should be performed Techniques for evaluating wind conditions are found in FM 3 04 203 Note Steep approaches can place the aircraft in potential settling with PWR conditions NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 2 Altitude apparent ground speed and rate of closure are difficult to estimate at night a The rate of descent during the final 100 feet should be slightly less than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes b After establishing the descent during unaided flights slightly reduce airspeed until apparent ground speed and rate of closure appear to be increasing Progressivel
375. ons or operating at high GWT may exceed aircraft limitations SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS If during the go around visual references are lost initiate an ITO immediately MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS Perform one of the following 1 Where escape routes exist turn the aircraft away from the terrain apply forward cyclic and lower the thrust control if possible Accelerate the aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go around 2 Where escape routes do not exist adjust aircraft for MAX R C to ensure obstacle clearance Upon clearing obstacles accelerate aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go around TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 4 86 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 87 Chapter 4 TASK 1070 Respond to Emergencies CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with a trainer or academically and given a specific EMERG condition or the indications of a specific malfunction and given a suitable landing area STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications X RCM a Recognize announce and analyze indications of an EMERG Perform or describe all immediate action EMERG checks IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 TM
376. ontrols during the maneuver and will make flight control inputs as directed by the MP b The MP will MAN the thrust control throughout the maneuver to ensure it is placed in the appropriate positions until power recovery is confirmed The MP will MAN and operate the FADEC RPM switch as required throughout the maneuver During the autorotation the MP will note and call out the RRPM Np and PA The NCM may record the RRPM and PA as directed by the MP c Ifan EMERG situation occurs the MP will announce the EMERG and take appropriate corrective action Procedures a Determine wind azimuth using wind recognition cues Wx reporting facility or ATS b Establish straight and level flight at 80 KTS into the prevailing wind at an altitude that will allow for an autorotational decent and power recovery prior to descending below 1 000 feet AGL c Identify and select a suitable forced landing area ahead of the aircraft in the current ground track Ensure the RCM has visual contact with the selected forced landing area d Once the aircraft is within glide distance of the selected forced landing area clear the aircraft and direct the RCM to place the thrust control to the ground detent Do not hesitate in placing the thrust to the appropriate position at any time during the maneuver As the aircraft begins a decent note RRPM Ng readings Environmental factors such as wind turbulence or aircraft airspeed changes may affect RRPM Ng readings
377. op to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 172 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 2074 Perform Forward Arming and Refueling Point Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with ERFS installed fuel handlers security team as required based on METT TC a forward area refueling equipment FARE system or academically STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Conduct pre mission planning to include required load s configuration as briefed Verify the aircraft will remain within GWT and CG limitations for the duration of the flight b Conduct a thorough crew and support personnel safety briefing c Ensure that the aircraft is configured and fueled for the mission d Ensure that the passengers and cargo are properly restrained e Ensure that the FARP is certified IAW appropriate publications f Be familiar with EPs for FARP operation and tactical shutdown procedures IAW appropriate publications 2 NCM a Load the aircraft IAW th
378. or may throughout the text of a task standard is crucial The description explains one or more recommended techniques for accomplishing the task to meet the standards b Critical task The following numbered tasks are CH 47 MP critical tasks 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 5 3 Chapter 5 TASK 4000 Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given the applicable MTF manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications l 2 3 Perform the preflight inspection IAW the appropriate aircraft MTF manual CL Determine the suitability of the aircraft for flight and the mission to be performed Ensure that all follow on maintenance checks or inspections are completed and or entered in the logbook and entries made IAW DA PAM 738 751 and applicable TMs 4 Determine the maneuvers checks and tasks required during the TF 5 Verify rotor track and balance vibration analysis equipment is secure installed IAW the applicable TM as required DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The MP will contact maintenance quality control personnel to determine the maintenance activity that has been performed on the aircraft b The MP will ensure a thorough preflight is conducted The MP will personally preflight areas involved in the maintenance activity s with the appropriate aircraft MTF manual He or she may direct the RCM to complete other elements of th
379. or pilot integrated performance and aircraft configuration infrared instrument takeoff joint publication knots calibrated airspeed knots indicated airspeed knots true airspeed knots light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation longitudinal cyclic trim landing signal enlisted limited maintenance test flight missed approach holding fix missed approach point maximum continuous power check minimum descent altitude maintenance test flight evaluator maximum elevation figures mission essential task list mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations multi function display meaconing interference jamming and intrusion medical officer maintenance operational check method of instruction mission oriented protective posture 4 military occupational specialty maintenance test pilot maximum power check TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Glossary MPS MSA MSL MTF MTP MWO Ni N Nc Nr NAVAID NCM NDB NGR NM NOE NOTAM NVD NVG NVS OAT OGE OEM OR P3 P P PA PAC PAR PAT PC PCMCIA PDP PFE PHOLD PI PMD POI POL PPC 5 April 2013 mission planning software system minimum safe altitude mean sea level maintenance test flight maintenance test pilot maintenance work order gas producer power turbine engine speed rotor speed navigational aid nonrated crewmember non directional beacon National Guard re
380. orm a minimum of two of the four iterations mentioned above from each flight crew station with access to the flight controls e Hood weather requirements All aviators will complete hood or weather requirements as determined by the commander This requirement may be completed in the aircraft or FS TFPS TASK LIST a Performance tasks For the purpose of clarifying mode and conditions a performance task is differentiated from a technical task An ATM performance task is a task that is significantly affected by the conditions and mode of flight The mode and condition under which the task must be performed is specified for example a visual meteorological conditions VMC takeoff EP flight or perform external sling load s operations These tasks are bolded throughout this ATM but are listed in upper case on DA Form 7120 1 R b Technical tasks Technical tasks are those tasks that measure the crewmember s ability to plan a flight preflight participate in crew mission briefing perform hover HVR power PWR check and so forth These tasks are not significantly affected by the mode of flight and may be performed or evaluated in any mode These tasks are plain text throughout this ATM Note The requirement to perform instrument tasks in additional aircraft in category will be at the discretion of the commander Note RCMs required to perform MP or ME duties in the CH 47D F as an additional or alternate aircraft will perform fo
381. orm and standard objectives In addition it must be consistent with the unit s mission and strictly adhere to the appropriate SOPs and regulations The evaluator must ensure a complete evaluation is given in all areas c Participant understanding All participants must completely understand the purpose of the evaluation d Participant cooperation All participants must cooperate to guarantee the accomplishment of the evaluation objectives The emphasis is on all the participants not just the examinee e Identification ID of training needs The evaluation must produce specific findings to identify training needs Any crewmember affected by the evaluation needs to know what is being performed correctly and incorrectly and how improvements can be made f Purpose of evaluation The evaluation determines the examinee s ability to perform essential hands on academic tasks to prescribed standards The flight evaluation will also determine the examinee s ability to exercise crew coordination in completing these tasks g Aircrew coordination The guidelines for evaluating crew coordination are based on a subjective analysis of how effectively a crew performs collectively to accomplish a series of tasks The evaluator must determine how effectively the examinee employs aircrew coordination as outlined in chapter 6 h Evaluator role as crewmember An evaluator will act as an effective crewmember unless evaluating the examinee on how to respond t
382. ost restrictive GWT value between MAX structural and ENG limited values Item 16 17 MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN IGE OGE with a LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at an IGE OGE HVR with load s using the MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart Using the MAX GWT to HVR 10 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at departure enter the top chart structural limit at the FAT and read down to PA Move horizontally to the left to the MAX structural GWT and note the WT Record the most restrictive GWT value between MAX structural and ENG limited values To calculate OGE value re enter the top chart at the FAT and read down to PA on the bottom chart ENG PWR AVAIL Move horizontally to the left to read MAX OGE GWT for the desired wheel height Record the most restrictive GWT value between MAX structural and ENG limited values Item 18 19 MAX GWT to HVR IGE SE MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE no LOAD SE This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at a desired IGE OGE wheel height using the SE contingency TQ AVAIL charts Using the HVR chart the SE contingency TQ AVAIL item 10 and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the MAX allowable GWT to HVR SE at the desired wheel height IGE To calculate enter the bottom left portion of the HVR chart using the MAX SE contingency TQ AVAIL TEMP and move right horizon
383. ould prevent operation of the APU APU GEN or PTUs 2 Perform preflight inspection of the APU and check APU exhaust cover rotor blade tie downs and fluid levels Check APU start ACCUM and signal ACCUM for proper PRESS prior to starting APU IAW the appropriate operator s manual 3 Ensure that the EMERG UTIL PRESS valve and UTIL reservoir depressurization valve handles are in the NORMAL position Ensure that EMERG fuel shut off valve is OPEN 4 Connect aircraft battery BATT and BATT charger and ensure that all cockpit switches are OFF b Starting procedures 1 With fireguard posted place BATT switch in the ON position and check master caution panel for UTIL HYD PRESS caution light ON and APU ON caution or advisory light extinguished 2 Set APU switch to RUN position for 3 to 5 seconds then to the START position for 2 seconds and release the switch Check master caution panel for APU ON caution or advisory light to be illuminated and the UTIL HYD PRESS caution light to be extinguished 3 Set the APU GEN switch to ON and check master caution panel to ensure that No 1 and No 2 XFR RECT lights go OUT If PWR transfer units are required set PTU No 1 and No 2 switches to the ON position while checking the master caution panel to ensure that the HYD FLT control No 1 and HYD FLT control No 2 caution lights are OUT 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 115 Chapter 4
384. ounce when he or she initiates the maneuver and any intentions to alter or abort the takeoff Before the aircraft enters actual IMC the P will make the transition to the flight instruments b The P will announce when ready for takeoff and will focus primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing during the VMC portion of the maneuver and to provide adequate warning of obstacles The P will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft As the aircraft enters actual IMC the P will announce when IMC and will monitor the flight instruments to assist in establishing coordinated flight within aircraft operating limits c The NCM will maintain airspace surveillance during the VMC portion of the maneuver During IMC or simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles The P NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside Procedures a From the ground 1 Align the aircraft with the desired takeoff heading Ensure the attitude indicator is set for takeoff 2 Initiate the takeoff by increasing the thrust control smoothly and steadily while maintaining a level attitude until instrument takeoff PWR is reached When instrument take off PWR is established and the altimeter and VSI show a positive climb adjust pitch attitude below the horizon as required for the initial acceleration no
385. own the ropes 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft a Pl evaluations do not require ropers b NCM evaluations require personnel gear to go down the ropes REFERENCES Appropriate common references ATTP 3 18 12 and TC 21 24 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 159 Chapter 4 TASK 2058 Perform Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration Operations WARNING Ensure that the special patrol infiltration exfiltration SPIES master and crew chief wear a safety harness secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or static line anytime the door or ramp is opened CAUTION Ensure that SPIES rope remains secured to the cargo floor until the aircraft has landed If recovery of SPIES rope is impossible execute a roll on landing to avoid entanglement in the rotor system CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with SPIES equipment installed and SPIES crew assigned STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger safety briefing b Maintain obstacle clearance between team members obstacles and the ground c Maintain airspeed 5 KTS MAX airspeed with team members attached is 70 KIAS KCAS in moderate climates and 50 KIAS KCAS in cold climates d Bank angle not to exceed 30 degrees NCM Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for SPIES operations IAW TC 21 24 and the unit s SOP DESCRIPTION 1 4 160 Crew actions a
386. oximately 5 degrees nose down obtain the desired climb airspeed and maintain ground track The P will position the thrust control as necessary to clear obstacles in the flight path and obtain the desired TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks R C The P will use the pedals to maintain heading when below 50 feet AGL and in trim when above 50 feet AGL 6 When the P obtains the desired climb airspeed the P will adjust the cyclic as necessary to stop the acceleration The P will adjust the thrust control to continue or to stop the R C The P will confirm LCT operation b From a HVR 1 The P will announce his or her intent to takeoff from a HVR The P will focus attention primarily outside the aircraft 2 All crewmembers will clear the aircraft 3 The P will select reference points to maintain ground track The P will apply forward cyclic to smoothly accelerate the aircraft through ETL while adjusting the thrust control as required to maintain the appropriate HVR height The P will perform the rest of the maneuver as for a takeoff from the ground Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL such as terrain flight takeoff Note The P must avoid excessive and unnecessary nose low accelerative attitudes Note The NCMs should remain seated during this maneuver unless METT TC requires deviation NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES
387. ph 3 4b b Flight evaluation 1 Academic Some training and evaluation requirements may be evaluated academically For these tasks the examinee must demonstrate a working knowledge of the tasks Evaluators may use computer based instruction mock ups or other approved devices to include the aircraft or FS TFPS to determine the examinee s knowledge of the tasks 2 Aircraft FS or TFPS These tasks require evaluation in the aircraft CH 47D FS or CH 47F TFPS Task standards are based on an ideal situation Grading is based on meeting the minimum standards The evaluator must consider deviations high wind turbulence or poor visibility from the ideal during the evaluation If other than ideal conditions exist the evaluator must make appropriate adjustments to the standards while grading the maneuvers CREWMEMBER EVALUATION Evaluations are conducted to determine the crewmember s ability to perform the tasks on the CTL and check the understanding of required academic subjects The evaluator will determine the time devoted to each phase When the examinee is an evaluator trainer or a UT the recommended procedure is for the evaluator to reverse roles with the examinee When the evaluator uses this technique the examinee must understand how the role reversal will be conducted and when it will be in effect 3 2 Note Following an additional skill identifier producing course of flight instruction school such as the CH 47D F IP M
388. ple the P becomes fixated confused task overloaded or otherwise allows the aircraft to enter an unsafe position or attitude The P first asks the P if he or she is aware of the aircraft position or attitude If the P does not acknowledge this challenge the P issues a second challenge If the P fails to acknowledge the second challenge the P assumes control of the aircraft c Effectively manage coordinate and prioritize planned actions unexpected events and workload distribution The crew performing as a team should avoid distractions from essential activities while distributing and managing the workloads equally Both the technical and managerial aspects of coping with normal and unusual situations are important Proper sequencing and timing guarantees that the actions of one crewmember support and mesh with the actions of the other crewmembers Responsible effort must be used to ensure that actions and directives are clear timely relevant complete verified and coordinated with minimal direction from the PC 1 Direct assistance A crewmember will direct or request assistance when he cannot maintain aircraft control position or clearance A crewmember will also direct assistance when being overloaded with tasks or unable to properly operate or troubleshoot aircraft systems without help from the other crewmembers The PC ensures that all crew duties and mission responsibilities are clearly assigned and efficiently distributed to preven
389. pproach path Around the center of the X is a white circle with a centered amber light The landing gear will normally be in the forward portion of this circle but landing will be as directed by the LSE controller Most ships have floodlights to illuminate the landing area for unaided operations but the lights can be turned down or off for NVG operations 4 170 a Before approach 1 When cleared to land adjust airspeed as necessary descend to 200 feet AGL and enter the landing pattern During landing the LSE will expect the PI in the seat nearest the bow of the ship to be at the flight controls for the first landing 2 Make a standard rate turn or less in the appropriate direction and cross perpendicular to the ship s wake and then begin the turn to final TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 3 When the ship is underway it will be necessary to make lateral corrections to maintain alignment with the landing deck lineup lines An alternate technique is to lead the ship by initiating the approach to a point forward of the flight deck b During the approach 1 Cross the deck edge no faster than a brisk walk at an altitude of 5 to 10 feet above the landing surface Higher altitudes make it difficult to maintain good visual references Keep the LSE in sight 2 Stop all aircraft movement over the center of the deck and ensure that the wheels are within the landing circle Note The LSE will assist during
390. ppropriate common standards and the following additions modifications DESCRIPTION 1 Properly clear the aircraft for ground taxi 2 Do not exceed ground control limitations DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The MP will brief the RCM and NCM on the taxi plan and required wheel brake inputs during brake system checks The MP will ensure the directional pedals are blocked as required while independently checking brake pedals so ground control limitations will not be exceeded 2 Procedures Perform IAW with applicable MTF manual and as follows a Wheel brakes With the parking brake released and the aircraft cleared for taxi increase thrust control as required to begin a forward roll Apply both brake pedals on the pilot s side and check for the ability to bring the aircraft to a full stop Release the brakes and allow aircraft to roll forward again Blocking the left directional pedal with the foot independently apply foot pressure to the right brake pedal only as required to bring the aircraft to a full stop Release the right brake pedal and allow the aircraft to roll forward again Blocking the right directional pedal independently apply pressure to the left brake pedal only as required to bring the aircraft to a full stop Check right and left brake systems for equal stopping performance Repeat steps in the same sequence for the co pilots brake pedals b Uneven landing gear struts tire pressures and terrain may influence taxi checks an
391. pril 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 33 Chapter 4 TASK 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment WARNING When performing a combat mission or overwater mission aviator worn gear can restrict head and torso movement Users should conduct ground familiarity drills blind switch control ID and crew coordination exercises before flight since the field of regard can be restricted by aviator worn mission equipment The user must strictly adhere to proper crew coordination procedures during switch ID CONDITIONS Given the appropriate ALSE for the mission STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Inspect perform operational checks on ALSE 2 Use personal and mission ALSE IAW the appropriate operator s manual instructions for each piece of equipment 3 Brief assist passengers in the use of ALSE DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The PC will verify that all required ALSE equipment is onboard the aircraft and meets all serviceability criteria prior to takeoff 2 Procedures Based on mission requirements obtain the required ALSE Inspect equipment for serviceability and perform required operational checks The NCM will secure the required ALSE in the aircraft IAW AR 95 1 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 240 CL TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1520 271 CL and the unit s SOP The NCM will brief passengers in the use of ALSE TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically 2
392. provide warning to the P of obstacles or hazards during the entire operation 4 152 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the PI may opt to approach and HVR the aircraft so it is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable HVR during the water pickup TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 70 62 FM 4 20 197 and water bucket AWR 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 153 Chapter 4 TASK 2054 Perform Fast Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations Note Headquarters Department of the Army HQDA policy specifies the fast rope insertion and extraction system FRIES is not approved for Army wide use and names the Commanding General U S Army Special Operations Command USASOC as the executive agent for FRIES doctrine The use of FRIES is restricted to special operations forces pathfinders long range surveillance units and HQDA approved schools with a USASOC approved FRIES program of instruction Approval for FRIES operation is only required for ground forces and should be verifie
393. r fuel transfer external sling load s and cargo loading operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted orally or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references TM 55 1500 342 23 and DD Form 365 4 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 31 Chapter 4 TASK 1013 Operate Mission Planning System CONDITIONS Given an approved computer with MPS a mission briefing signal operation instructions SOI information weather information navigational maps DOD FLIP intelligence data and other materials as required STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications SO TOO St ON os G I Perform flight mission planning Tasks 1004 1006 and 1402 Configure and operate the mission planning system software MPS Evaluate and enter performance planning data and Wx data as appropriate Select appropriate map types and scales Select and enter appropriate primary and alternate routes if required Select appropriate overlays and database Select and enter appropriate communication and improved data modem NET data Update MPS for example DAFIF electronic chart update manual Enter aircraft WT and CG data 10 J Load mission data to PCMCIA cards 11 Print out maps time distance heading cards waypoint lists crew cards communication cards and other kneeboard products as required DESCRIPTION 1 Crew action
394. r or ramp is open CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with helocast equipment installed a helocast team cast master combat swimmers combat divers and combat rubber raiding crafts CRRC soft duck hard duck or rolled duck STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 RCM a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger briefing b Maintain altitude 3 feet c Maintain ground speed 3 KTS 2 NCM a Ensure that aircraft is configured for helocast or soft duck operations b Perform crew coordination actions DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure that personnel are familiar with EPs The PC will also ensure that all participants in the helocast soft duck operations are briefed AW the unit s SOP b The P should make the approach into the wind if possible The P will slow to the desired airspeed and altitude not to exceed 20 KTS and 20 feet recommend 10 KTS at 10 feet c The P will provide the P with information regarding airspeed and altitude The P will also monitor the cockpit indicators d The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside e The NCM will assist the cast member as necessary CAUTION The PI cannot rely on the airspeed indicator below 40 KIAS KCAS the ground speed should not exceed that of a brisk walk Ground speeds in excess o
395. ransmit a tactical report IAW the SOI unit SOP or mission briefing 2 Procedures a The specific maneuver required will depend on the type of hostile fire encountered The guidance below may assist with developing actions on contact for the given threat system A thorough intelligence briefing will help to identify actions on contact the crew can expect to take for the most probable threat system employment 1 Tanks RPG and small arms a If concealment is available deploy toward the area of concealment b If concealment is not readily available immediately turn to an oblique angle while applying forward cyclic Turn to an oblique angle from the hostile fire to minimize the aircraft s profile and to make it a more difficult target Apply forward cyclic to accelerate 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 133 Chapter 4 b 4 134 while descending in an attempt to mask the aircraft Make turns of unequal magnitude at unequal intervals and small altitude changes to provide the best protection until beyond the effective range of hostile weapons c Ifthe situation permits employ immediate suppressive fire 2 Na Large caliber anti aircraft fire radar controlled a Refer to classified procedures b To reduce the danger descend immediately to NOE altitude 3 Fighters Na a On sighting a fighter try to mask the helicopter b Ifthe fighter is alone and executes a dive turn the helicopter toward the attacker a
396. ration b Employ describe using installed ASE DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will ensure crewmembers understand the employment of installed ASE during the conduct of the mission The PC will also ensure all ASE payload s and settings are AW the mission briefing b When the crew encounters a radar directed threat the P will remain primarily focused outside to avoid obstacles perform the required evasive maneuver reposition the aircraft as necessary to break lock deploy to cover and then avoid the threat The P will dispense chaff prior to performing break lock evasive maneuvers for break lock The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles c The P or P will begin dispensing chaff by pressing the chaff dispense button or ensuring that the mode switch is in PROGRAM as required The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles d When the crew encounters an IR directed threat the P will remain primarily focused outside to avoid obstacles employ evasive maneuvers after defeating the threat with CMWS deploy to cover and then avoid the threat Allow CMWS and variant ASE systems to automatically launch flares If reliability of equipment is questionable or system has not reacted to observed threat then P P and NCM will launch flares manually e The NCM will remove and install safety pin s IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL
397. rcrew coordination Airspace regulations and usage Flight plan FLPN preparation and filing Performance planning Inadvertent instrument meteorological conditions IIMC procedures Forms records and publications required in the aircraft 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 3 3 Chpater 3 Unit SOP and local requirements DOD FLIPs and maps Visual flight rules VFR IFR minimums and procedures Risk management Fuel requirements Crew endurance END Weight and balance requirements Maintenance forms and records Aviation life support equipment ALSE 2 Aircraft systems avionics mission equipment description and operation TM 1 1520 240 10 chapters 2 3 and 4 and TM 1 1520 271 10 chapters 2 3 and 4 Topics in this subject are Engines ENGs and related systems Emergency EMERG equipment Transponder Fuel system PWR train system Flight control hydraulic FLT CONTR HYD system Utility UTIL hydraulic system Rotor system Flight instruments Auxiliary power unit APU Lighting Aircraft survivability equipment ASE Servicing parking and mooring Cargo handling systems Mission equipment Armament Avionics Advanced flight control system AFCS j digital advanced flight control system DAFCS Heating ventilation cooling and environmental control unit Electrical PWR supply and distribution system 3 Operating limitations and restrictions TM 1 1520 240 10 chapters 4 5 6
398. re has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during nighttime overwater operations If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the PI may opt to approach the cast area so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits Proper scanning techniques are necessary TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 21 38 FM 3 21 220 FM 10 542 FM 20 11 FM 31 20 4 Helocast soft duck air worthiness release SOCOM Regulation 350 6 and TC 3 05 212 4 180 TC
399. re addressed within the available planning time Crewmembers must then mentally rehearse the entire mission by visualizing and discussing potential problems contingencies and assigned responsibilities The PC ensures that crewmembers take advantage of periods of low workload to review or rehearse upcoming flight segments Crewmembers should continuously review remaining flight segments to identify required adjustments making certain their planning is consistently ahead of critical lead times c After a mission or mission segment the crew should debrief review and critique major decisions their actions and task performance This should include identifying options and factors that were omitted from earlier discussion and outline ways to improve crew performance in future missions Remember this discussion and critique of crew decisions and actions must remain professional Finger pointing is not the intent and shall be avoided the emphasis should remain on education with the singular purpose of improving crew and mission performance 6 2 AIRCREW COORDINATION PRINCIPLES Broadly defined aircrew coordination is the cooperative interaction between crewmembers necessary for the safe efficient and effective performance of flight tasks The essential principles and qualities of aircrew coordination are described in figure 6 1 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 1 Chapter 6 Crew Coordination Principles Combine to Produce Coordinated Objectives 6 2
400. re the aircraft after completion of the flight AW the appropriate operator s manual TM 1 1520 240 23 series TM 1 1520 271 23 series TM 1 1500 250 23 and the unit SOP Procedures a Perform the before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL The call and response method will be used as appropriate b The crewmember reading the CL will read the complete CL item c The crewmember performing the check will answer with the appropriate response For example for the call SWIVEL SWITCH AS REQUIRED the response might be SWIVEL SWITCH STEER AS REQUIRED is not an appropriate response Responses that do not clearly communicate action or information should not be used For example when responding to the call SYSTEMS CHECK replying with CHECK doesn t clearly indicate that the system is within the normal operating range A response of ALL IN THE NORMAL OPERATING RANGE communicates more accurate information d Perform the PAC check and when complete record data on the PAC log e After flight correctly enter all information required on the appropriate DA Forms 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 39 Chapter 4 f During APU start the NCM will be outside of the aircraft to ensure that the area is clear and to perform fireguard duties g During ENG start the NCM will assume a position 45 degrees from the front of the ENG at the rotor blade tip t
401. rections as to the aircraft alignment with the drop area 4 The P will call out the aircraft altitude and airspeed starting at 100 feet in 10 feet and 10 KIAS intervals The PC will give the cast master TEN MINUTE OUT FIVE MINUTE OUT and ONE MINUTE OUT alert calls The PC at one minute out will announce AT THE READY LINE The cast master will relay these alert calls to the raid team members On receiving the command AT THE READY LINE the cast master will announce AT THE READY LINE At this time all participants will remove the restraint devices and be ready to reposition to the door or ramp area for the jump 5 After arrival at the drop site slow to the desired airspeed 5 KTS 5 feet 10 KTS 10 feet or 20 KTS 20 feet When launching the soft duck 5 KTS and 5 feet will be used The P s visibility may become limited due to the spray from the water The P will turn on the wipers if required 6 When the aircraft has established the proper position airspeed and altitude and has arrived at the drop site the PC will give the cast master the command AT THE START LINE 7 The cast master will confirm the position airspeed and altitude are safe The cast master will give the command DROP at which time the NCM will release the equipment CRRC soft duck hard duck or rolled duck The NCM will announce RAFT AWAY The cast master will announce RAFT AWAY at which time the te
402. required b The P and NCM will confirm the suitability of the area assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles The P will acknowledge any deviations during the approach D The P will confirm that the LCTs RET during the approach The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is re established outside 2 Procedures Evaluate winds Select an approach angle that allows obstacle clearance while descending to the desired point of termination Once the termination point is sighted and the approach angle is intercepted adjust thrust control as necessary to establish and maintain a constant angle Maintain entry airspeed until the rate of closure appears to be increasing Above 50 feet AGL maintain ground track alignment and the aircraft in trim Below 50 feet AGL align the aircraft with the landing direction TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of closure until reaching the termination point HVR touchdown or until a decision is made to perform a go around a To a hover The approach to a HVR may terminate with a full stop over the planned termination point or continue movement to transition to hovering flight Progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of closure until an appropriate HVR is established over the intended termination point b To the surface The decisi
403. requirements and administration of the ATP 5 SP IE The SP IE must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 and 4 The SP IE must be able to train and evaluate SPs IPs IEs UTs PCs PIs SIs and FIs using role reversal as appropriate The SP must also be able to develop and implement a unit training plan and administer the commander s ATP 6 ME The ME must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 The ME must be able to train and evaluate other MEs and MPs using role reversal as appropriate The ME must possess a thorough knowledge of the fundamentals of instruction and evaluation 7 CE The CE must demonstrate an understanding of conditions standards descriptions and appropriate considerations on the CTL The CE must perform selected tasks to ATM standards while applying aircrew coordination The CE must also demonstrate a basic understanding of the appropriate academic subjects listed in paragraph 3 4b be familiar with the IATF and understand the requirements of the CTL 8 FE The FE must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 7 In addition the FE must demonstrate TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 3 4 Evaluations sound judgment and technical tactical proficiency in the employment of the aircraft unit mission crew and assets 9 FI The FI must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 8 In addition the FI must be able to objectively train evaluate and document the performance of the NCM UTs FEs CEs and observers
404. rference jamming and intrusion MIJI procedures Keep accurate and detailed records of MIJI incidents Report an incident as soon as possible when a secure communications capability exists 3 Visual methods Use other visual communication methods IAW FM 21 60 such as flags lights panels pyrotechnics hand and arm signals and aircraft maneuvers 4 AN APX 100 118 IFF Turn on test and operate the IFF IAW the appropriate operator s manual Operate the IFF IAW the tactical situation During shutdown hold or zeroize the code as required TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l Z Training may be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references DOD AIM 86 100 FM 4 04 120 TM 11 5810 262 10 and TM 11 5895 1199 12 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 123 Chapter 4 TASK 1406 Perform Terrain Flight Navigation CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given a mission briefing and required navigational maps and materials STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Li RCM a During nap of the earth NOE flight surface to 25 feet AHO know the en route location within 200 meters b During contour flight 25 to 80 feet AHO or low level flight 80 to 200 know the en route location within 500 meters c Locate each objective within 100 meters
405. rformance data to the computed data on the PPC and announce the results to the P If GO NO GO TQ for the desired HVR height is indicated before reaching the planned HVR height used during performance planning the P will inform the P that OGE maneuvers cannot be conducted The PC will confirm the GO NO GO TQ and adjust the mission as required d The NCM will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing and to provide adequate warning of obstacles Note If an adjusted zero fuel WT is required the data should be recorded when time permits and for accuracy conducted into the wind 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 47 Chapter 4 2 Procedures a Use the HVR height computed during performance planning when performing this task unless the mission or terrain constraints dictate otherwise If another HVR height is required use that height to compute GO NO GO and validation factor TQ Refer to Task 1038 in this ATM b At desired HVR height monitor the aircraft instruments and verify the PWR check The P will determine if SE capability exists and will compare actual TQ to predicted TQ GO NO GO TQ and the validation factor The P will ensure that aircraft limitations are not exceeded c The PC will ensure that aircraft performance and fuel are sufficient to complete the mission Note If the TQ required maintaining a stationary HVR does not exceed the GO NO GO TQ OGE any maneuver requiring OGE IGE PWR or less
406. rms that the position of the rotor blades is not within 30 degrees of aircraft centerline Standing in a position to view the maintenance panel and both rotor heads the Aft CE observes the operation of the system PRESS rotor heads and flight controls for each system Do not read the DECU s digital displays until the ECLs are in ground or until requested by the PI NCM will post 45 degrees off the nose of the ENG A good location is even with the position lights outside the rotor disk NCM confirms that the ENG areas are clear before clearing the Pls to start ENGs If installed Foreign object damage FOD may blow out during the purge so be sure the area is clear prior to turning them on If performing a two crewmember run up the other CE will post on the opposite side prior to the start sequence Refer to Note 3 6 9 Chapter 6 Table 6 5 CH 47D call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks During two crewmember run up wait until Second ENG Start 2 or 1 Clear for start the Aft CE is posted on 1 before starting 2 Refer to Note 3 ENG COND levers FLT 1 and 2 Clear to flight Visually Scan entire alreralt torapnormal conditions Fluid drain lines Check Verify any fluid draining from drain lines is not excessive DECU START BIT Perform 1 and 2 Clear towards ground 88 Refer to Note 2 Aft CE monitors APU for fire then closes APU Switch OFF APU Clear o
407. rol and apply a slight amount of forward cyclic control until the Bambi bucket contacts the water Follow the NCM s verbal guidance to remain centered over the bucket as it fills applying cyclic thrust and pedals control as necessary c The PI can vary the bucket s capacity by varying the speed at which it is pulled from the water A slow lift gives minimum fill A fast lift gives MAX fill d When the NCM indicates the bucket is ready or full increase the thrust control until all slack is removed from the suspension cable and the lip of the bucket is clear of the water maintain heading with pedals e Apply additional thrust control to raise the filled bucket clear of the water s surface to a height of 10 feet Ensure that the bucket is holding the water and monitor aircraft instruments to ensure that aircraft limitations are not exceeded 2 Na Sims and simplex water pickup a Arrive over water source with no forward ground speed and a bucket height of 10 feet above water level b Ensure that bucket doors are open c Slowly reduce the thrust control until the bucket makes contact with the water Once the bucket has submerged in the water follow the NCM s verbal guidance to remain centered over the bucket as it fills applying cyclic thrust and pedals control as necessary d When the NCM indicates the bucket is full the NCM will close the bucket doors and ensure that the bucket is ready e Then the P c
408. rting Engines Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given access to the applicable MTF manual CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications l 2 Visually verify first stage mixing unit stops during control interference check as required D Brief RCM on adjusted cyclic longitudinal neutral position 3 4 inches aft if DASH actuator has been set to 36 0 inches and electrically disconnected in CH 47D 3 D During the cyclic stick position indicator check determine if measurement is to the bottom of the ball or the bottom of the red marking on the stick position indicator for CH 47D F Verify stick position indicator is IAW the note in the MTF manual for CH 47F 4 Ensure personnel and equipment are clear of the cargo ramp and cargo ramp control valve prior to performing cargo ramp operational checks 5 Confirm proper GPS INU EGI operation alignment 6 F Ensure WT is entered accurately into the CAAS IAW the aircraft s current configuration DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The MP will personally perform the control interference check obtain neutral pedal measurement control break out forces check flight control and travel checks in BOTH No 1 and No 2 flight control HYD system b The MP will direct assistance from RCM NCM and ground crew if applicable and they will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform IAW the appropriate MTF manual and as follows
409. rucker army mil usaace nvd html 1 Initial NVG qualification Initial qualification will be conducted at USAACE or a DA approved training site IAW the USAACE approved POI or locally using the USAACE NVG exportable training package ETP Submit written requests for USAACE NVG ETP to Commander USAACE ATTN ATZQ TDS O Fort Rucker AL 36362 5000 2 Aircraft NVD qualification a Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics outlined in paragraph 3 4b 7 and 10 All academic training must be completed prior to flight training b Flight training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate proficiency from the designated crew station in all base tasks marked with an X in the NVG column of table 2 3 or table 2 4 pages 2 3 to 2 6 as appropriate The crewmember will also receive training and demonstrate proficiency in any other base tasks specified for NVG on the task list for the crewmember s position If designated to perform NVG duties Task 2081 becomes a mandatory training and evaluation task and will be added to the aviator s commanders task list CTL The commander may select additional base tasks 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 1 Chapter 2 c Minimum flight hours RCMs There are no minimum flight hour requirements The qualification is proficiency based determined by the crewmember s ability to satisfactorily accomplish the designated tas
410. s TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft and CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 12 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4156 Perform Hover Checks CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter given access to the applicable MTF manual CL and HVR check complete and aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following addition modification l 2 Properly clear the aircraft before making flight control inputs Brief the RCM on possible malfunctions and required actions prior to performing AFCS DAFCS engagement error check 3 Brief RCM on required flight control inputs and expected hovering flight characteristics during the TQ differential check 4 F Ensure WT is entered accurately into the CAAS IAW the aircraft s current configuration 5 Perform rotor track and balance IAW the applicable TM DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The MP will perform the AFCS DAFCS function check and direct assistance as required from the RCM during AFCS DAFCS TRIM beep switch checks made from the RCM s flight controls The MP will maintain the flight controls while the RCM operates the AFCS DAFCS TRIM switch on their flight controls b The RCM will maneuver the aircraft as directed by the MP during the mechanical rig controls positions and TQ differential
411. s External sling load s operations High intensity radio transmission area 9 Weapon system operation and deployment FM 3 04 126 FM 3 04 140 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 and unit SOP Topics in this subject area are Weapons initialization arming and safety Operation and function of the M60D M240 Visual search and target detection Duties of the door gunner DG Range estimation Fire and employment techniques Weapons employment during night and NVD operations 10 NVG operations FM 3 04 140 FM 3 04 203 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 11 5855 263 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 NVG TSP and unit SOP Topics in this subject area are Nomenclature characteristics limitations and operations NVG aircraft modifications Mission planning Effects on distance estimation and depth perception ANVIS HUD operations NVG ground and air safety Tactical operations to include lighting Use of internal and external lights Terrain interpretation map preparation and navigation 11 ME and MP systems topics aircraft systems avionics mission equipment description and operation systems malfunctions analysis and troubleshooting TM 1 1520 240 10 integrated electronic technical manual IETM 1 1520 240 23 amp P TM 1 1520 240 MTF TM 1 1520 271 10 IETM 1 1520 271 23 amp P TM 1 1520 271 MTF TM 1 2840 248 23 TM 11 1520 240 23 TM 11 1520 240 23P IETM 11 1520 271 23 amp P AR 750 1 AR 700 138 TC 3 04 7 DA PAM 738 751 an
412. s a The PC will assign tasks b The crew receives the mission briefing c Mission data from higher headquarters may be received digitally in the form of an overlay a fragmentary order or operation order d One or more crew members may enter data into the portable flight planning software Procedures a Plan the flight by conducting a map reconnaissance and terrain analysis using the available map database A detailed terrain analysis may be accomplished by using topographic elevation profiles and intervisibility plots b Enter threat data and ensure appropriate values are set for detection and lethality range c Enter waypoints hazards control measures primary and alternate routes engagement areas lines and other information as needed d Enter or select SOI information from the appropriate database e Determine communications requirements and build radio presets NET information f Enter aircraft WT CG and performance data for a specific aircraft tail number g Upon completion of mission planning and data entry load the selected mission and aircraft specific data on to the data transfer card TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 De 4 32 Training will be conducted academically or CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluation will be conducted academically TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the following Task 1004 Task 1006 Task 1012 Task 1010 and Task 1402 5 A
413. s The SI assists the unit SP with supervising and maintaining the standardization program To qualify as an SI the crewmember must meet the requirements of AR 95 1 15 Non crewmember These individuals perform duties directly related to the inflight mission of the aircraft but not essential to the operation of the aircraft AR 600 106 lists the categories for non crewmember positions and the number authorized in each unit Non crewmembers may perform CE FE UT FI SI duties while on non crewmember flight status if they are military occupational specialty MOS qualified and fully integrated into the commander s ATP Additionally non crewmembers are trained and designated to perform those duties for NCMs who are unable to fly 1 2 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 2 1 Chapter 2 Training This chapter describes requirements for qualification RL progression refresher mission and continuation training Crewmember qualification requirements will be IAW AR 95 1 TC 3 04 11 and this ATM Training will follow a logical progression sequence Aviators crewmembers will demonstrate proficiency in all base tasks in all appropriate modes as noted and be properly progressed prior to being trained on mission tasks QUALIFICATION TRAINING Crewmembers complete qualification training by demonstrating proficiency in all tasks required to an SP IP ME SI or FI as appropriate Crewmembers undergoing qualification training in the aircraft must fly with a SP
414. s This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Ensure airspeed is at or below 100 KIAS KCAS prior to turning AFCS DAFCS OFF 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications xx Vertical gyro malfunction 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Pull the pilot s or co pilot s vertical gyro indicator VGI CB B 16 No 1 PDP or C 15 No 2 PDP 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 C 7 Appendix C ZZ Note If altitude hold is engaged and the co pilot s VGI CB is pulled a thrust cockpit control driver actuator CCDA runaway will occur DASH failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications CCDA failure 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D Pull the CLTV DRIVER ACTR CB B 12 on the No 1 PDP causes ALT HOLD feature to become inoperative and the thrust brake to remain released Pull the THRUST BRAKE CB D 6 on the No 1 PDP causes the thrust brake to fail locked b CH 47F Verbally describe the indications 2 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications QEGI 1 or EGI 2 failure
415. s and estimated time en route ETE 1 minute MIN for each leg of the flight Compute magnetic headings 5 degrees 6 Determine the fuel required for the mission IAW AR 95 1 100 pounds 7 Verify that the aircraft will remain within weight WT and center of gravity CG limitations for the duration of the flight IAW the appropriate operator s manual 8 Verify aircraft performance data and ensure that PWR is AVAIL to complete the mission IAW the appropriate operator s manual 9 Complete and file the FLPN IAW AR 95 1 and DOD FLIP 10 Perform mission risk assessment IAW unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC may direct other RCM to complete some elements of the VFR flight planning b The other RCM will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC c The PC will ensure all crewmembers are current qualified and the aircraft is properly equipped to accomplish the assigned mission 2 Procedures a Using appropriate military FAA or host country weather facilities obtain required flight Wx information After ensuring that the flight can be completed under VFR IAW AR 95 1 check NOTAMs chart s update manual and other appropriate sources for any restrictions or uncharted obstacles that apply to the flight Obtain navigational charts that cover the entire flight area and allow for routing changes due to the Wx terrain b Select the course s and altitude s that will best facilitate mission
416. s and when attention is focused inside the aircraft The P should note location of the threat quickly and as accurately as the situation allows It is imperative that all applicable crewmembers are able to quickly and accurately locate and transmit threat data in order to maintain individual and collective SA during quickly changing situations Not storing reporting an enemy location may be more detrimental than the risk of taking time to note the location when contact occurs The crew will transmit a report as required to other aircraft within the flight higher HQ and the owning ground unit tactical commander e Other crewmembers will remain oriented on the threat location and employ appropriate countermeasures or suppressive fire as appropriate They will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit for example when firing the weapons Note Crewmembers will not use friendly affiliated graphic control measures icons symbols to mark enemy locations and vice versa to avoid fratricide and other unnecessary confusion 5 Maneuvers a Unguided weapons Unguided weapons such as small arms unguided rockets and tanks require the enemy gunner to predict an intercept point by estimating where the target aircraft will be at the TOF of the projectiles Once fired the rounds cannot be corrected The two basic strategies of defeating unguided weapons are to present the most difficult targeting ballistic solution possible and then to
417. s landing direction This will ensure lateral separation during periods of degraded visibility For example lead lands heading 360 degrees chalk 2 lands 350 degrees chalk 3 lands 010 degrees chalk 4 lands 350 degrees and chalk 5 lands 010 degrees TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and ATTP 3 18 12 4 138 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 2050 Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure WARNING This procedure is designed strictly for recovery under VMC for training and for IIMC use only and will not be used for a planned IFR flight unless approved by the U S Army aeronautical services agency This emergency recovery procedure is only authorized to be flown when the situation prevents the use of an approved navigational aid CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and given a tactical or aeronautical map with current obstruction information A MPS with digital maps and recent chart updating manual may be used to aid in developing this procedure STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Select a suitable recovery landing area and coordinate if required airspace de confliction 2 Select an approach course degrees magnetic a missed approach course FAF MAP IF IAF and MAHF 3 Determine obstacle clear
418. s operating in a position over a suitable landing area to abort or operating above minimum SE airspeed and 100 feet AGL in a position to continue the SE takeoff This EMERG condition will not be simulated during external sling load s operations unless SE HVR OGE capability exists b FS TFPS Same as paragraph C 2e 1 b 3 Cruise May be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS a CH 47D F Performed any time the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL in a cruise profile When conducting external sling load s operations the cargo hook master switch shall be OFF b FS TFPS Same as paragraph C 2e 1 b TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Instructor Pilot Supplemental Information Note When operating with only one ENG online that ENG must remain in the primary FADEC mode of operation f ENG Re start s during flight 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 FS TFPS After a SE failure the crewmember should determine if it is feasible to perform an ENG re start g FADEC 1 or FADEC 2 caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Place the appropriate PRI REV switch to the REV position It is important to ensure TQ indications are matched and operating RRPM is obtained before placing the switch again to the PRI position 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or place the appropriate PRI REV switch to the REV position h FADEC
419. s outside Cabin door example ramp and cabin check in progress inside Ramp and cabin check Ramp is inside Ramp and cabin check complete Ibs of fuel internal or complete SYSs normal Ibs of fuel SYSs normal if the ERFS tanks are internal Ramp is outside not installed Cabin door is outside 6 14 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 6 CH 47F NCM call and response terminology Checklist Steps NCM Response Check NCM Procedure Remarks Before Landing Crew passengers and Aft ready forward ready Aft CE always calls first mission equipment Check Refer to Note 5 After Landing Ground CONTACT indicating Both on off cycling lights Check ON Engine Shutdown Ramp As required Ramp is level Ramp is not on the ground but aft CE can exit the aircraft via the ramp Wheels Chocked Wheels are chocked Le a Mission equipment OFF or Safe in the rear or not installed Once the CMWS safety pin is installed SAFE as required Fire guard Posted Posted at the APU Ramp CE monitors the APU for any abnormal condition or fire positioned by the EMERG fluid shut off valve with access door open during the entire APU start sequence APU Start APU clear to start After APU is started NCMs post for ENG shutdown END COND levers Ground 1 and 2 Clear to ground start 2 minute cool down if not previously started DECU SHUTDOWN BIT 88 on 1 and 2 Or other code as displayed on the DECU Check Refer to Not
420. s questions to the briefer and acknowledge understanding of the assigned actions duties and responsibilities Lessons learned from previous debriefings should be addressed during the crew briefing as applicable If two or more NCMs will perform flight duties the PC will brief them on their individual responsibilities Procedures Brief the mission using a unit approved crew mission briefing CL At the minimum brief the NCM crew briefing CL using the items shown in table 4 2 page 4 9 Other items may be added as necessary as outlined by unit SOP Identify mission and flight requirements that will demand effective communication and proper sequencing and timing of actions by the crewmembers 4 8 Note The FE is responsible for ensuring all NCMs performing crew duties are briefed on their duties Note A safety harness will be worn by all NCM and secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down or static line when performing crew duties A seat belt will be worn at all times when seated unless it interferes with crew duties TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Table 4 2 Sample nonrated crewmember briefing checklist 1 Power assurance test PAT check procedures 2 Aircraft run up responsibilities a Aft NCM responsibilities b Forward NCM responsibilities 3 Required items mission equipment and personnel 4 Mission task special considerations 5 Crew actions duties and responsibilities a Sectors of responsibility
421. s series grouped with the MH 47G This manual is not a stand alone document all requirements of Army regulation AR 600 105 AR 600 106 National Guard Regulation NGR AR 95 210 and TC 3 04 11 to the ATP must be met The operator s manual is the authority for operation of the aircraft If differences exist between the maneuver descriptions in Technical Manual TM 1 1520 240 10 or TM 1 1520 271 10 and this publication this publication is the governing authority for training and flight evaluation purposes Implementation of this publication conforms to AR 95 1 and TC 3 04 11 If a conflict exists between this publication and TC 3 04 11 the ATP commander determines the method of accomplishment based upon the requirement and the unit s mission as to which manual takes precedence This manual in conjunction with the ARs and TC 3 04 11 will help develop a comprehensive ATP Using this ATM ensures that individual crewmember and aircrew proficiency is commensurate with the unit s mission and aircrews routinely employ standard techniques and procedures Crewmembers will use this manual as a how to source for performing crewmember duties It provides performance standards and evaluation guidelines so that crewmembers know the level of performance expected Each task has a description of the proper procedures to meet the standard Standardization officers evaluators and unit trainers UTs will use this manual and TC 3 04 11 as the primary
422. s will be completed sequentially on separate nights Note Training Day I includes 1 hour of static aircraft HUD training concentrating on programming The 1 hour of static aircraft training in programming and operations must be completed before the first flight Training days 1 and 2 may be completed in the aircraft or CH 47D F FS TFPS Hours included in table B 1 page B 2 denote the minimum hours per flight training period flight training periods will not be reduced The program in table B 1 page B 2 gives the minimum required flight training for qualification Note Training can be conducted D N or NVG however a minimum of 2 hours will be completed during NVG flight 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 B 1 Appendix B Table B 1 Heads up display training program Training Day 1 2 3 4 Aircraft hours 1 0 1 0 1 0 Static training hours 1 0 Cumulative hours 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 B 5 TRAINING DOCUMENTATION After crewmembers complete AN AVS 7 initial qualification units will ensure an entry is made on the crewmember s DA Form 7122 R and transcribed to the DA Form 759 B 2 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Appendix C Instructor Pilot Supplemental Information C 1 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES TRAINING a b C EPs The following procedures will only be performed in the aircraft in an actual EMERG 1 Touchdown autorotation 2 Roll on landing to water 3 SE takeoff from the ground 4 Act
423. sed to determine wind direction and velocity Terminate the approach at a 100 foot HVR 20 feet before reaching the patient Deploy the recovery device and allow it to contact the water before reaching the patient 2 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake or ship versus small boat sea state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks Note The NCM will advise the P when the person equipment is in position on the jungle penetrator The NCM will perform hoist operations IAW the standard words and phrases AW unit SOP The NCM will secure jungle penetrator or stokes litter upon completion of the hoisting operation Should difficulty in maintaining a stable HVR occur the NCM will extend additional cable as slack to preclude inadvertent jerking OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and b
424. selected VOR TACAN for navigation tune and identify the VOR TACAN After identifying the desired station and the position of the aircraft in relation to the desired course turn to an appropriate intercept heading e Maintain the intercept heading until approaching an on course indication Depending on the rate of closure start a turn to intercept the desired course On course indication is within one dot CDI deflection for VOR TACAN and LOC and 5 degrees for non directional beacon NDB f F Before using the inertial navigation systems for direct routing ensure that the systems are properly aligned IAW the OEM Verify the FLPN is loaded and reflects the intended route of flight to be flown g F Properly engage the FD as desired and backup the inertial navigations systems by using land based NAVAID facilities h During flight maintain heading to track the desired course If the navigational instruments show an off course condition turn as necessary toward the course to re intercept If navigational instruments TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks do not indicate movement toward the course within a reasonable time increase the intercept angle When re intercepting the course turn toward the course and apply the appropriate drift correction normally one half 4 of the intercept angle Continue to bracket the course by decreasing corrections until obtaining a heading that will maintain the aircraft on course i Determ
425. sion Often an accident was the result of a sequence of undetected crew errors that combined to produce a catastrophic result Additional research showed that even when crews actually avoided potential accidents these same errors could result in degraded performance that jeopardized mission success A systematic analysis of these error patterns identified specific areas where crew level training could reduce the occurrence of such faults and break the chain of errors leading to accidents and poor mission performance a Aircrew coordination patterns begin with the accomplishment of crew level pre mission planning rehearsal and AARs Pre mission planning includes all preparatory tasks associated with accomplishing the mission This would include assigning crewmember responsibilities and conducting all required briefings and brief backs Pre mission rehearsal involves the crew collectively visualizing and discussing expected and potential unexpected events for the entire mission Through this process all crewmembers discuss and think through contingencies and actions for difficult segments equipment limitations and failures or unusual events associated with the mission and develop strategies to cope with possible contingencies METT TC b Each crewmember must actively participate in the mission planning process to ensure a common understanding of mission intent and operational sequence The PC prioritizes planning activities so that critical items a
426. sion proof flashlight with an unfiltered lens to check for leaks and fuel venting and for signaling as necessary TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Pam 738 751 FM 3 04 113 FM 10 67 1 and FM 21 60 4 112 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1200 Perform NonRated Crewmember Duties during a Maintenance Test Flight WARNING When standing on the engine work platform with the engine operating the NCM must keep all clothing tools and body parts away from the engine inlet and bleed band areas CONDITIONS In a CH 47DFF helicopter or academically in a classroom environment and given the applicable CH 47D F MTF manual STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform or describe appropriate maintenance procedures and checks IAW CH 47D F MTF manual 2 Perform or describe maintenance procedures and checks directed by the MP 3 Immediately inform the MP of any malfunction or discrepancy detected during the maintenance procedures or checks DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a If two or more NCMs are performing crew duties during the test flight TF the FE will ensure they are briefed on their duties and responsibilities b NCMs will perform duties and responsibilities IAW CH 47D F MTF manual and
427. sks aircraft back From FE CE to Pls Indicates all ropers are clear from the aircraft Aft ready forward ready Forward CE Will be the only one to say this Clear for flight Indicates a problem at a station all roping ceases Krom PEGE ns until problem is rectified Stop stick From FE CE to Pls Indicates aircraft is over the target Over the target Aft forward from CE to Pls will preclude calls to indicate appropriate station ADVERSE WEATHER TERRAIN CONDITIONS Rappel operations will not be conducted under the following conditions 1 Lightning strikes within 1 NM of rappelling operations 2 Water or ice on the rope inhibiting the ability of the rappellers to control their descent 3 The rope is exposed to the elements for a sufficient length of time to freeze thereby reducing its tensile strength 4 Blowing particles produced by rotor wash causing the aircrew or the rappel master to lose visual contact with the ground NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation One chemlight will be attached to the end of the rope and one to the attachment point of the rope NVG lighting will be IAW the unit SOP or the tactical environment TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft a PI training does not require ropers b NCM training requires personnel gear to go d
428. small arms and air defense artillery or to employ weapons 1 At cruise altitudes apply directional cyclic to the initiate turn The P will focus his or her attention outside using the horizon as the primary reference for this maneuver As roll rate and angle increases the nose may begin to drop Allow this to occur while maintaining aircraft in trim Recovery is affected by applying opposite cyclic roll when reaching the desired heading Once the aircraft is wings level adjust thrust and cyclic control to obtain the desired airspeed and altitude 2 At terrain flight altitudes consider desired direction of turn before initiating Initiate with aft cyclic to ensure adequate obstacle clearance followed immediately by directional cyclic to initiate turn Angles of bank are much lower than those utilized during cruise flight since sufficient recovery altitude may not be available 3 Maintain trim with pedals Adjust cyclic as necessary to maintain the pitch attitude as necessary to prevent excessive nose low attitude to prevent sink rate build up 4 To recover apply opposite and forward cyclic Note Maneuver is typically initiated at airspeeds of 60 to 120 KIAS KCAS For initial training enter the maneuver at 50 KIAS KCAS at terrain flight altitudes and 100 KIAS KCAS at cruise altitudes Also do not exceed cruise TQ setting throughout the maneuver to simulate operating at MAX TQ AVAIL CAUTION Excessive bank angles at terrain flight
429. st conduct the evaluation Note Once qualified the RCM has no currency requirements for HUD operations unless specified by the commander One RCM may fly with the HUD and the other without There is no requirement for both RCMs to fly with the HUD unless specified by the commander Academic training must be completed before flight training begins B 3 ACADEMIC TRAINING a CH 47D Using the NVG TSP that incorporates HUD academic training or the HUD computer based trainer and the HUD operator s manual the trainee will receive instruction in the subjects listed below b CH 47F Using the interactive multimedia instruction IMI and referencing the HUD operator s manual the trainee will receive instruction in the subjects listed below 1 AN AVS 7 HUD system components 2 HUD symbology 3 HUD system operations programming adjusting and operating B 4 FLIGHT TRAINING This program outlines the minimum flight hour requirements for HUD qualification Some RCMs may require additional flight periods to achieve a satisfactory level of proficiency with the ANVIS HUD Because initial HUD training can cause the aviator to be distracted NCM should be stationed on the same side of the aircraft as the trainee HUD training requires the RCM to develop new scanning habits Time must be allowed to absorb this new information and develop new scan patterns therefore training days will not be combined Each training day involving aircraft flight
430. st facilitating mission accomplishment g When possible select preferred routing h Determine the magnetic heading ground speed and ETE for each leg to include flight to the alternate airfield if required i Compute the total distance flight time and calculate the required fuel using a CPU 26A P computer Weems plotter or equivalent or approved MPS j Determine if the weight and balance forms in the aircraft logbook apply to the mission IAW AR 95 1 k Verify aircraft WT and CG will remain within allowable limits for the entire flight 1 Complete the appropriate FLPN and file with the appropriate agency Note GPS IFR navigation must be certified by the FAA or host country regulations prior to use With an IFR certified GPS ensure the digital aeronautical flight information file DAFIF data is current and loaded prior to IFR use If a certified GPS or current DAFIF data is not available then crews will not use the GPS for IFR navigation However they should consider and plan for its use as an EMERG backup system only TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS Training will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft CH 47 FS TFPS or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 16 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card CONDITIONS Given the aircraft takeoff gross weight GWT environmental con
431. stem setup will be IAW FM 3 04 111 FM 3 04 113 and unit SOP Communications The primary aircraft s flight crew will monitor all calls into the FARP and brief incoming aircraft on pertinent information for the FARP on request such as landing direction active refuel point and so forth Note Task 1016 may be used in performing this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 Aircraft lighting During night or NVG operations the CH 47 will maintain lighting as METT TC and unit SOP dictates 2 Area lighting During refueling operations artificial lights may be needed because of the low natural light level Color coded low intensity light sources may be used to indicate direction takeoff and landing areas and pad sites Only red lights should be used to mark obstacles If NVGs are used ensure that artificial lighting does not cause any undue reflections toward the cockpit TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 4 174 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 04 111 FM 10 67 1 and TM 1 1560 312 10 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 175 Chapter 4 TASK 2076 Perform Caving Ladder Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47DFF helicopter with caving ladder equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications
432. successfully suppress neutralize or destroy the threat as applicable Consideration must be given to the visibility of friendly and enemy positions and trying to preclude any undesirable collateral damage or fratricide incidents g Perform any firing malfunctions EPs as required for misfire hang fire cook off runaway gun or double feeding of cartridges Firing malfunctions and corrective actions must be committed to memory h After target engagement clear and safe the weapon Ensure that the safety button is in the S position i After completing the mission record any information as required on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 Refer to FM 3 04 140 for details on helicopter gunnery qualification MULTI HELICOPTER DOOR GUNNER EMPLOYMENT 1 Aircrews and DGs in the formation must use effective crew coordination procedures to visually acquire identify and engage targets Both aircraft and passengers are vulnerable to attack during air movement operations and throughout all phases of air assault operations 2 Therefore it is imperative that DGs respond by delivering direct and indirect fire on these targets The unit must develop SOPs covering the employment of DGs during formation flights NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 During night or NVG operations range estimations will be more difficult which will require using proper scanning techniques Correct firing techniques an
433. such as computations and frequency changes Visual barriers so difficult to view that a determination cannot be made whether or not they contain barriers or obstacles will be treated as physical obstacles Altitude and ground speed are difficult to detect therefore artificial illumination may be necessary Determine the need for artificial lighting before descending below barriers Adjust search landing light for best illumination angle without causing excessive reflection into the cockpit Entering IMC with artificial illumination may induce spatial disorientation Cockpit controls will be more difficult to locate and identify take special precautions to identify and confirm the switches and levers 2 Night unaided Use of white light or weapons flash will impair night vision The P should not directly view white lights weapons flash or impact Allow time for adapting to dark or if necessary adjust altitude and airspeed until adapted Exercise added caution if performing flight tasks before reaching full dark adaptation Dimly visible objects may be more easily detected using peripheral vision off center viewing and may tend to disappear when viewed directly 3 NVD Use of NVDs degrades distance estimation and depth perception Aircraft inflight may appear closer than they actually are due to the amplification of external lights and the lack of background objects to assist in distance estimation and depth perception If possible confirm th
434. switch to AUTO Note Before conducting slope operations RCMs must understand droop stop characteristics Note If at any time successful completion of the landing is doubtful the P must abort the maneuver Note If the slope landing cannot be conducted without droop stop pounding reposition the aircraft NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 When conducting slope operations select reference points to determine slope angles 2 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight is in the desired position Use of the white light may impair night vision therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 75 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 76 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 TASK 1063 Crewmember Tasks Perform External Sling Load s Operations WARNING Crewmembers must remain clear of the MID cargo hook If jettisoning becomes necessary the hook may spring back when the load is released resulting in injury WARNING At no time will the push to talk button on the hoist winch control grip be used during external sling load s operations Inadvertent hook release could occur if NCM does not visually locate release button before releasing load s
435. t Model M144 P N 12011812 NSN 1005 01 193 4878 29 December 1986 TM 11 5810 262 10 Operator s Manual for Speech Security Equipment KY 58 NSN 58 10 00 449 0154 31 May 1990 TM 11 5855 263 10 Operator s Manual for Aviator s Night Vision Imaging System ANVIS AN AVS 6 V 1 NSN 5855 01 138 4749 EIC IPR AN AVS 6 V 2 NSN 5855 01 138 4748 EIC IPQ AN AVS 6 V IA NSN 5855 01 439 1745 EIC IPW TO 12S10 2AVS6 1 01 February 2004 TM 55 1500 342 23 Joint Service Technical Manual for Aircraft Weight and Balance NAVAIR 01 1B 50 USAF TO 1 1B 50 USCG TO 1 1B 50 30 September 2011 DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE PUBLICATIONS DOD AIM 86 100 Operation and Maintenance Overview General Tri Service Mode 4 Handbook May 1987 FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION PUBLICATIONS FAA H 8083 15 Instrument Flying Handbook 2008 FAA Order 7110 65R Air Traffic Control 16 February 2006 FAA Order 7130 3 Holding Pattern Criteria 18 March 1998 FAA Order 8460 Helicopter Global Positioning System Nonprecision Approach Criteria DOT FAA Order 7110 65 P CG Air Traffic Control 16 February 2006 FAR Part 91 General Operating and Flight Rules March 1974 Flight Information Handbook These publications are available from Director U S Army Aeronautical Services Agency ATTN MOAS AI Cameron Station Alexandria VA 22304 5050 or the FAA webstite at www faa gov DOCUMENTS NEEDED These documents must be available to the intended users of this
436. t PWR is unavailable or turbulent conditions or wind shift create an unsafe condition immediately perform a go around If required releasing the water reduces the GWT of the aircraft and minimizes PWR demand OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS 1 All crewmembers will wear floatation devices IAW AR 95 1 2 Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions To minimize spatial disorientation the crew should use RAD ALT hold during overwater flight 3 Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The RAD ALT low bug should be set to assist in altitude control 4 Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny mid day versus twilight 5 Hazards to flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Not recommended 1 During water bucket operations the P s attention will be divided between the aircraft instruments altitude and ground speed and the outside It is critical during NVG operations that the crewmembers focus be primarily outside to
437. t SE airspeed in a SE configuration Using the applicable cruise chart record the MAX R C and END AIRSPEED for the aircraft WT Item 59 MAX R C and END AIRSPEED DUAL ENG with a LOAD Refer to item 58 for definition Using the applicable cruise chart record the MAX R C and END AIRSPEED for the aircraft weight Note The effect of external drag is not accounted for in item 58 Item 60 MAX RANGE AIRSPEED DUAL ENG no LOAD The MAX range computes at what airspeed the aircraft can achieve the greatest distance out of the usable fuel load This speed should be considered when a low fuel situation exists and a longer distance needs to be traveled Using the applicable cruise chart record the MAX range airspeed for the aircraft WT If the Vne line is intercepted before the MAX range line enter the Vne airspeed limit Item 61 MAX RANGE AIRSPEED DUAL ENG with a LOAD Refer to item 59 for definition Using the applicable cruise chart record the MAX range AIRSPEED for the aircraft WT If the Vxe line is intercepted before the MAX range line enter the Vye airspeed limit Note The effect of external drag is not accounted for in item 61 Item 62 CRUISE SPEED AIRSPEED DUAL ENG no LOAD Cruise speed should be selected based on operating within CONT PWR with consideration of operating GWT and environmental conditions Ensure cruise speed selected is not in excess of the airspeed limit item 44 without a load s or the Vyg line IND on the cruise ch
438. t displacing in the vertical plane If engaged with a semi automatic command to line of sight SACLOS missile fired from a tank refer to the procedure listed in paragraph 5c 5 Artillery countermeasures procedure Artillery can pose a threat to slow speed helicopters particularly operating at a readily identifiable firing position Artillery takes time to shift fires this time interval can be used by helicopters to stay ahead of the enemy s ability to target shift fires onto them If two or more unexplained explosions occur within 500 meters of the aircraft suspect enemy artillery and proceed as follows a Depart the impact area by 500 meters b Reposition every 20 seconds to avoid enemy adjusting shifting fire onto your new location c Report receiving enemy artillery mortar fire to facilitate timely counter battery fire from friendly field artillery b Automatic antiaircraft guns The crew should use the unguided weapons countermeasures above to defeat the guns projectiles themselves For radar aided directed AAA systems use the radar countermeasures listed below c SACLOS missiles SACLOS weapon systems includes ATGM and certain antiaircraft missiles These systems can vary from slow speed ATGMs 100 meters per second to very high speed antiaircraft missiles 700 meters per second and may use wires radio or light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation LASER for the command link These systems are countered b
439. t navigation 0 00 0 eee ee entee ee tteeee ee ttteeeeetaeeeeeetneeeeees 4 124 Task 1408 Perform terrain flight 0 cccceeeeee etter ee eene nese ttieeeeeseeeeeesieeeeetieeeeetiaeeeee 4 126 Task 1411 Perform terrain flight deceleration cececeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeetnieeeeeetneeeeee 4 128 Task 1412 Perform evasive MANeCUVETS 00 0 cceeceeeeeteeeeeeneeeeetnieeeeee teaser tieeeeetieeeeees 4 129 Task 1413 Perform actions ON coma teesiga ainak eaa ANNEER 4 133 Task 2010 Perform multi aircraft operations c ccceceeeeeeseceeceeeeeeeseceeaecaeeeeeeetetennaees 4 136 Task 2050 Develop an emergency global positioning system recovery procedure 4 139 Task 2052 Perform water bucket operations cccccccseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeenseesnaeees 4 148 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 iii Contents Task 2054 Task 2056 Task 2058 Task 2059 Task 2064 Task 2066 Task 2068 Task 2074 Task 2076 Task 2078 Task 2079 Task 2081 Task 2086 Task 2112 Task 2125 Task 2127 Task 4000 Task 4081 Task 4088 Task 4110 Task 4112 Task 4113 Task 4156 Task 4193 Task 4236 Task 4259 Task 4262 Task 4276 Task 4284 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 6 1 Perform fast rope insertion and extraction operations ccceeeeeeees 4 154 Perform rappelling Operations 2 eccccecccceceeeeeeeenecceeeeeeeeeesecnueaeeeeeeeeetenaees 4
440. t the overloading of any crewmember especially during critical phases of flight Crewmembers should also watch for workload build up on others and react quickly to adjust the distribution of task responsibilities 2 Prioritize actions and equitably distribute workload Crewmembers are always able to identify and prioritize competing mission tasks Crewmembers should never ignore flight safety and other high priority tasks Crewmembers appropriately delay low priority tasks until those tasks do not compete with tasks that are more critical Crewmembers consistently avoid nonessential distractions so that these distractions do not affect task performance for example a sterile cockpit or ability to help another crewmember Crew actions should reflect extensive review of procedures in prior training and pre mission planning and rehearsal d Provide situational aircraft control obstacle avoidance and mission advisories Although the P is responsible for aircraft control the other crewmembers may need to provide aircraft control information regarding aircraft position for example airspeed or altitude orientation obstacle avoidance equipment and personnel status environmental and battlefield conditions and changes to mission objectives or 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 6 3 Chapter 6 evolving situations of the mission SA Crewmembers must anticipate and offer supporting information and actions to the decisionmaker which is usually the PC or
441. t to exceed 10 nose low 3 Visually maintain runway clearance and alignment on takeoff and transition to the flight instruments before entering IMC At approximately 40 KIAS KCAS the P will check the turn and slip indicator to ensure that the aircraft is in trim 4 Maintain the heading course required by the departure procedure or ATC instructions When the desired climb airspeed is reached adjust cyclic to maintain airspeed and adjust the thrust control to maintain the desired climb rate b Froma HVR 1 The P will align the aircraft with the desired takeoff heading at the appropriate HVR height The P will check the attitude indicator for the appropriate attitude 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 97 Chapter 4 2 The P will initiate the takeoff by increasing the thrust control smoothly and steadily while maintaining a level attitude until instrument takeoff PWR is reached 3 When the altimeter and VSI show a positive R C the P will continue as in a takeoff from the ground Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require HVR OGE PWR Evaluate each situation for PWR required versus PWR AVAIL Note As the aircraft enters IMC the P should monitor the flight instruments and be prepared to accept a transfer of controls Note When the crew is operating under IMC the NCM will take a position on the P side of the aircraft for obstacle clearance and airspace surveillance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS
442. t to exceed 20 degres nose high until forward speed is sufficiently slowed or stopped 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 83 Chapter 4 2 The P will smoothly lower the thrust control until the forward landing gear contacts the ground The P will then neutralize the flight controls and apply brakes as necessary to stop forward movement Note During the landing roll out sequence the primary aerodynamic braking force is provided by the aft rotor system Applying aft cyclic will lessen the effectiveness of this rotor due to differential collective pitch and possibly increase the roll out distance Therefore it is recommended not to apply more aft cyclic than is necessary to maintain ground contact with the aft landing gear Note To abort this maneuver prior to decelerating below ETL or below the final obstacles apply forward cyclic to allow the aircraft to become airborne and accelerate Consideration of PWR AVAIL must be made when conducting SE operations If it becomes necessary to abort below ETL or going below final obstacles and SE power is not AVAIL the PI will have to use their best judgment to bring the aircraft to a HVR and decelerate if sufficient obstacle clearance exists NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Altitude apparent ground speed and rate of closure are difficult to estimate when making an approach to an area of limited contrast at night The P will determine the need for artificial lighting and rate of descent at
443. t wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at takeoff record the TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height OGE Compare to SE contingency TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVAIL item 10 to determine if sufficient PWR is AVAIL to HVR SE OGE Item 36 PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE SE with a LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR with a SE at the desired wheel height IGE normally conducted at a 40 foot wheel height HVR Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff record the predicted TQ required to HVR at an IGE height that will place the load approximately 10 feet AGL for external sling load s or IGE for internal loads Compare to SE contingency TQ AVAIL contingency TQ AVAIL item 10 to determine if sufficient PWR is AVAIL to HVR SE at the desired wheel height If the PWR required exceeds the MAX SE TQ AVAIL enter UA Item 37 PREDICTED HVR TQ OGE SE with a LOAD This is the amount of PWR TQ required to HVR at the desired wheel height OGE Conducted at an 80 foot wheel height HVR Item 38 GO NO GO TQ no LOAD Using the HVR chart and the forecast conditions at the time of takeoff enter the chart at the MAX TQ AVAIL 10 minute limit obtained in item 9 Move vertically to the OGE line and horizontally to the desired HVR altitude Then move vertically down to determine the GO NO GO value The GO NO GO TQ value calculated at the desired HVR altitude is proportional to the MAX TQ AVAIL 10 min
444. tacts the ground The P will maintain heading with the pedals and adjust cyclic 4 74 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks as necessary to maintain the position of the aircraft The P will continue to lower the thrust control until the aft landing gear contacts the ground 2 When all landing gear is on the ground the P will smoothly lower the thrust control to ground detent The P will then neutralize the controls while checking the stability of the aircraft 3 The P will perform the takeoff from the upslope in the reverse sequence b Downslope landings 1 With the aircraft heading downslope the P will lower the thrust control until the aft landing gear contacts the ground The P will adjust pitch attitude to maintain a stabilized position on the slope by coordinating thrust control reduction with aft cyclic movement This may result in a slightly higher pitch attitude when the LCTs program to ground detent The P will maintain heading with the pedals 2 The P will smoothly and continuously lower the thrust control until the forward landing gear contacts the ground If the aircraft slides down the slope the P will return to a HVR and reposition 3 When all landing gear are on the ground the P will smoothly lower the thrust control to ground detent The P will then neutralize the controls while checking the stability of the aircraft 4 The P will perform the takeoff from the downslope in the reverse sequence
445. tally to the planned PA Then move down vertically to the GWT section calculated in item 10 Move vertically until the appropriate IGE HVR height line is intersected Then move right horizontally to the GWT chart bottom right chart Now enter the upper chart at the planned from the top The intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 21 Chapter 4 represents the MAX GWT to HVR SE IGE To calculate OGE value repeat steps above moving vertically to the OGE HVR height line Note When calculating a MAX GWT to HVR IGE or OGE SE item 18 19 20 and 21 that requires using the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT DUAL ENG scale double the COLD TEMP TQ ADJUSTMENT and subtract this value from the TQ required prior to entering the bottom left portion of the HVR chart Item 20 21 MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE with a LOAD SE This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at an IGE OGE HVR with load s using the SE contingency TQ AVAIL chart Using the HVR chart and MAX SE contingency TQ AVAIL item 10 record the MAX allowable GWT to HVR for SE operation IGE OGE for forecast conditions To calculate IGE use the same procedure as item 18 except move vertically to the IGE HVR height line To calculate OGE repeat steps above moving vertically to the OGE HVR height line Item 22 23 MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE no LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine
446. te entries to be made in the trainees IATF TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 12 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1004 Plan a Visual Flight Rules Flight CONDITIONS Prior to VFR flight in a CH 47D F helicopter given access to Wx information NOTAMs flight planning aids necessary charts forms publications and weight and balance information Note For all updated NOTAMs log on the primary web site https www notams jcs mil dinsQueryWeb or alternate web site http www faa gov air_traffic publications notices STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine if the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission 2 Determine if the flight can be performed under VFR IAW AR 95 1 applicable FARs host nation regulations local regulations and SOPs 3 Determine the departure en route and destination procedures IAW AR 95 1 applicable FARs host nation regulations local regulations and SOPs 4 Select route s and altitudes that avoid hazardous Wx conditions Do not exceed aircraft or equipment limitations and if appropriate select altitude conforming to VFR cruising altitudes IAW DOD FLIP 5 For cross country flights determine the distance 1 nautical mile NM ground speed 5 knot
447. tenance tasks 4000 series numbers Note Additional tasks designated by the commander as mission essential are not included in this ATM The commander will develop conditions standards and descriptions for those additional tasks and assign a 3000 series number b Task title The task title identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity Titles may be the same in several ATMs but tasks may be written differently for the specific aircraft c Conditions This specifies the common conditions under which the task will be performed Conditions include common conditions listed below and may include task specific conditions Conditions describe important aspects of the performance environment All conditions must be met before task iterations can be credited References to CH 47 helicopters apply to both CH 47D and CH 47F series helicopters Reference will be made to a particular helicopter within a design series when necessary Reference to the CH 47 FS or CH 47F TFPS in the conditions does not apply to NCMs 1 Common conditions are a Ina mission aircraft with mission equipment and crew items required by AR 95 1 AR 95 2 FARs DA Pam 738 751 DOD FLIPs the commander s ATP TM 1 1520 240 23 TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 23 TM 1 1520 271 10 chapters 5 8 and 9 and local and unit SOPs b Under VMC or IMC c Day night and NVD employment d In any terrain or climate e CBRNE including MOPP 4 equipment employment f
448. that a preflight of the ERFS is conducted before flight c The P will ensure that all main tanks are on and all AUX pumps are OFF when ERFS transfer to the main tanks is desired d The P will monitor the main fuel indicators and ensure that fuel management procedures are conducted 4 168 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks e The NCM will ensure that the system is operational before flight monitor the fuel management panel inflight and ensure that ERFS tank s and associated equipment are inspected for proper operation and that no leaks are evident f The NCM will manage the tank fuel transfer sequence as directed by the PC inform the crew when the low level warning lights illuminate close the dump valve when empty and inform the crew of any unusual or EMERG situations 2 Procedures a Each crewmember will complete all required inspections pertaining to his or her section of TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 TM 1 1560 312 10 and the unit SOP b NCMs will ensure that no fuel leaks are evident during servicing preflight and inflight operation of the ERFS If leaks are evident stop servicing immediately and refer to the appropriate maintenance manuals c After the ERFS tank system is serviced a fuel sample will be taken from the sample area of each tank If contamination is found conduct contamination inspection procedures AW TM 1 1560 312 10 FM 3 04 111 and FM 10 67 1 Ensure that a fuel sample has been taken
449. the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at a desired IGE OGE wheel height using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart Using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at departure record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 14 and 15 Item 24 25 Item 24 25 MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE with a LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at an IGE OGE HVR or external sling load s height of 10 feet using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart Using the MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN chart and forecasted conditions at departure record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 16 and 17 Item 26 27 MAX GWT to HVR CONT IGE OGE no LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at a desired IGE OGE wheel height using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart Using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart and forecasted conditions at departure record the MAX GWT to HVR IGE OGE Refer to item 14 and 15 Item 28 29 MAX GWT to HVR CONT IGE OGE with a LOAD DUAL ENG This information is used to determine the MAX GWT the aircraft can lift based on the forecasted conditions at an IGE OGE HVR or external sling load s height of 10 feet using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart Using the MAX GWT to HVR CONT chart and forecasted conditions at departure record the MAX GWT
450. the area of operations Use standard terms and phraseology for all INTERCOMMs b Procedures for two way radio failure Attempt to identify and correct the malfunctioning radio and announce the results If two way radio failure is confirmed comply with procedure outlined in the flight information handbook FIH or host country regulations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references AIM DOD FLIP and DOT FAA Order 7110 65 P CG 4 50 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1033 7 Perform Digital Communication Procedures CONDITIONS In a CH 47F helicopter or with desktop trainer and the requirement to establish joint variable message format high frequency HF digital communications STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Construct a preset communications NET using all the NET parameters required for the mission 2 Modify an existing preset communications NET with the required corrected data 3 Transmit and or receive digital communication messages files and other data through the communication COMM page DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The ability to perform digital improve data modem IDM communications is contingent on the aircrew establishing digital NETs Both voice and digital traffic can be sent and
451. the commander for the crewmember to allow them to regain proficiency in tasks that were evaluated as unsatisfactory 3 5 ADDITIONAL EVALUATIONS a CBRNE evaluation This evaluation is conducted IAW TC 3 04 11 b Gunnery evaluation This evaluation is conducted IAW FM 3 04 140 DA Pam 350 38 or the applicable weapons system manual and the unit SOP c No notice post mishap flight evaluations and medical flight evaluations These evaluations will be conducted IAW AR 95 1 3 8 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 4 1 Chapter 4 Crewmember Tasks This chapter describes the tasks maneuvers and procedures that are essential for maintaining crewmember skills It defines the task title number conditions and standards by which performance is measured A description of crew actions along with training and evaluation requirements is also provided It does not contain all the maneuvers that can be performed in the aircraft TASK CONTENTS a Task number Each ATM task is identified by a 10 digit systems approach to training number The first three digits of each task are 011 U S Army Aviation School and 960 EAATS NGB the second three digits are 240 or 271 CH 47D or CH 47F cargo helicopter For convenience only the last four digits are listed in this TC for task ID and series The last four digits are as follows e Base tasks 1000 series numbers e Mission tasks 2000 series numbers e Additional tasks 3000 series numbers Main
452. the majority of the flight to a point where an approach is initiated to an intermediate or final destination Procedures a Use of the PPC is mandatory to organize performance planning data required for the mission b Determine and have available aircraft performance data required to complete the mission DA Form 5701 47 R figure 4 1 page 4 20 may be used to aid with organizing performance planning data required for the mission c Arrival data is not required to be completed when manually computing the PPC if environmental data at destination or intermediate stops has not significantly changed d When significant changes in the mission s environmental conditions occur re compute all affected values e Anytime the environmental conditions change significantly the crew will perform additional HVR PWR checks and re compute all PPC values A significant change is defined as 1 000 feet PA and or 10 degrees Celsius or an increase of 1 000 pounds GWT from the departure data Note Use mission forecast conditions to obtain the most accurate performance data Note If engine air particle separators EAPS are installed apply the appropriate offset to TQ and fuel flow values Note The appropriate operator s manual chapters 5 7 and 9 contains examples for using the performance data chart s When an example is cited in this description refer to the appropriate example in chapters 5 7 or 9 Note If any computed val
453. the other crewmember committing the error When required crewmembers must effectively implement the two challenge rule with minimal compromise to flight safety This means that crewmembers must continually cross monitor the actions of other crewmembers and remain capable of detecting their errors Such redundancy is particularly important when crews are tired or overly focused on critical task elements and thus more prone to make errors Crewmembers must discuss conditions and situations that can compromise SA These include but are not limited to stress boredom fatigue and anger 6 3 AIRCREW COORDINATION OBJECTIVES Aircrew coordination principles and objectives originate from and are fundamentally supported by a set of individual professional skills Each crewmember is responsible for attaining the leadership skills of effective communication resource management decisionmaking SA team building and conflict resolution When crewmembers are actively using these skills and practicing aircrew coordination principles results can be seen and measured to determine if the objectives of the aircrew coordination program are being met The goals of the program have been defined by the following aircrew coordination objectives a Establish and maintain team relationships Establish a positive working relationship that allows the crew to communicate openly freely and effectively in order to operate in a concerted manner where a climate of professiona
454. the steps listed in paragraph ii 2 Fuel low caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications FUEL LOW and FUEL PRESS cautions 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications No 1 or No 2 GEN OFF caution 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications or place either GEN CONTR switch to OFF You may simulate the appearance of a single GEN failure without a bus tie by turning off the associated AFCS DAFCS MAIN FUEL PUMP switches and by pulling the REV CURR cut out CB CH 47D C 10 No 1 PDP or D 7 No 2 PDP CH 47F B 9 No 1 PDP or B 11 No 2 PDP 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications mm No 1 and No 2 GEN OFF cautions nn oo PP qq 1 Conditions This may only be performed in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indications 3 FS TFPS Initiate at IOS of the FS TFPS or verbally describe the indications No 1 or No 2 RECT OFF cautions 1 Conditions This may be performed in the CH 47D F or in the FS TFPS 2 CH 47D F Verbally describe the indi
455. the valves and lights for proper operation 8 Flight control travel and HYD check The NCM will check the HYD gauges on the maintenance panel and notify the MP when a PRESS has dropped or returned to normal During the control interlock check the NCM will tell the MP the PRESS at which the flight control HYD systems change over 9 Pitot anti ice system check The NCM will check all pitot tubes pilot and co pilot yaw port heat for proper operation 10 Bleed band closure check The NCM will take a position on the ENG work platform to observe the ENG bleed band The NCM must continue to communicate with the MP and should turn his or her head away from the ENG when keying the INTERCOMM The NCM will observe the opening and closing of the bleed band and will give the MP the appropriate response 11 Mechanical rig check When called for by the MP the NCM will reconnect the electrical connectors on the DASH actuator The NCM will announce when he or she is reconnecting the electrical connectors and when they are connected and flight control closet soundproofing is reinstalled TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references CH 47D F MTF TM 1 1520 240 23 series and TM 1 1520 271 23 series 4 114 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1202 Perform Au
456. tion When taxiing is complete and before performing a takeoff to a HVR set the cyclic trim switch to automatic AUTO NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS The landing light should be used for unaided ground taxi and the searchlight with installed infrared IR band pass light filter when wearing NVG The use of proper scanning techniques will assist in detecting obstacles that must be avoided SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS If ground reference is lost because of blowing snow sand dust lower the thrust control neutralize the flight controls and apply wheel brakes until visual reference is re established Note Use caution when taxiing near other maneuvering aircraft because of limited visual references and relative motion illusion Note Use caution when taxiing on ice and snow covered surfaces where braking action is poor Note Due to decreased visual references and a possibility of relative motion illusions limit taxi speed to a rate appropriate for the conditions Note At night use of the landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation in blowing snow sand dust TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 53 Chapter 4 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 21 60 4 54 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1038 Perform Hovering Flight
457. tion of classified and unclassified TTP used to defeat enemy surface to air fire SAFIRE and aircraft threats A complete discussion of EVM requires aircrews to consult critical additional classified information When specific strengths and weaknesses of U S aircraft and survivability equipment are tied to a specific threat weapon system the information is classified SECRET NOFORN 2 Consult with local TACOPS officer for latest area of operations threat systems If the enemy cannot be avoided through tactical flight procedures then EVMs are used to avoid or minimize exposure in the enemy s weapon engagement zone WEZ The WEZ is defined by the four dimensions of the weapon s range R MAX minimum range MAX altitude minimum altitude and the weapons time of flight TOF Traditionally Army helicopters employ tactical flight mission planning tactical flight procedures and standoff to avoid the enemy WEZ by staying outside R MAX Where the enemy locations are unpredictable other aspects of the WEZ must be exploited to improve aircraft survivability Once engaged the crew s primary goal should be to limit enemy weapon effectiveness and exit the WEZ as quickly as possible by applying the appropriate EVM and suppress the system if able Aircrews should anticipate the possibility of multiple weapons systems arrayed with interlocking fields of fire when conducting EVM Aircrews must also be aware of the difference between cover and concealment during
458. to the water do not exit until rotor blades have stopped Secure a handhold within the cockpit to maintain orientation employ underwater breathing device if equipped and wait for cockpit and cabin area to fill with water Once aircraft is full of water use the cargo cockpit doors If they are jammed use the EMERG release If the EMERG release does not work break out the windows with the crash axe boot or other suitable object and swim clear of the aircraft Do not activate life preserver until clear of aircraft and on surface 4 92 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 93 Chapter 4 TASK 1166 Perform Instrument Maneuvers CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter under IMC or simulated IMC with navigation checks complete reference to instruments only and given appropriate navigational publications STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications O E al st Tune and identify appropriate NAVAIDs as required Determine intercept and maintain the desired course 5 degrees Identify station passage as required Maintain the desired DME arc 1 NM For direct routing ensure flight route meets minimum en route altitude requirements
459. tor s manual CL and the unit SOP Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level When the refueling is completed ensure that all caps are secured and remove the ground connection if the aircraft will not remain parked Make the appropriate entries on DA Form 2408 12 b Hot refueling 1 The P and NCM will assist the P in positioning the aircraft Ensure that the proper separation is maintained between the fuel source the aircraft and the refueling equipment Before refueling the aircraft the PC will verify that personnel not involved with the refueling operation are a safe distance away 2 The crewmember outside will ensure that the aircraft is grounded refuel the aircraft IAW FM 10 67 1 appropriate operator s manual CL and the unit SOP and assist with the refueling operation Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level When the refueling is completed ensure that all caps are secured and remove the ground connection 3 The crewmember outside will inform the PC when the refueling is completed Assist passengers in boarding the aircraft and in securing their seat belts Assist the P and P in clearing the aircraft during the departure from the refueling area Make the appropriate entries on DA Form 2408 12 2 Procedures All refueling operations cold hot will be IAW FM 3 04 113 and unit SOP NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Supplement aircraft lighting at the refueling station by using an explo
460. tronic countermeasures 5 Operate AN APX 100 or AN APX 118 transponder system identification friend or foe IFF system DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will ensure that assigned radio frequencies are briefed during the crew briefing The PC will indicate whether the P or P will establish and maintain primary communications b The P will announce mission information not monitored by the P and deviations from directives c The P will manage and announce radio s frequencies and copy and decode pertinent information The P will announce information not monitored by the P 2 Procedures a Electronic communications should not be used in a tactical environment except when necessary If electronic communication is required the best method is to operate in the secure voice mode To eliminate confusion and reduce transmission time the crew must use approved communication words phrases and codes Plan what to say before keying the transmitter b Transmit information clearly concisely and slowly enough to be understood by the receiving station Ideally keep transmissions under 10 seconds Do not identify a unit or an individual by name during non secure radio transmissions Follow the procedures listed below 1 Authentication Use proper SOI procedures to authenticate all inflight mission changes and artillery advisories when entering or departing a radio NET when challenged or when requesting authentication 2 Meaconing inte
461. ture flight director flight engineer flight engineer instructor flight information handbook flight information publication field manual foreign object damage field of view feet per minute flight plan fast rope insertion and extraction fast rope master flight simulator global positioning system general maintenance test flight gross weight holding area high altitude Army aviation training site high fidelity health indicator test Headquarters Department of the Army horizontal situation display horizontal situation display hover horizontal situation indicator heads up display initial approach fix indicated airspeed individual aircrew training folder in accordance with internal communications system improve data modem instrument examiner interactive electronic technical manual intermediate approach fix identification friend or foe TC 3 04 34 Glossary 3 Glossary IFH IFR IGE IMC IMC IMI ILS INTERCOMM INU IOS IP IPAC IR ITO JP KCAS KIAS KTAS KTS LASER LCT LSE LMTF MAHF MAP MCPC MDA ME MEF METL METT TC MFD MIJI MO MOC MOI MOPP IV MOS MP MPC Glossary 4 instrument flying handbook instrument flight rules in ground effect inadvertent instrument meteorological conditions instrument meteorological conditions interactive multimedia instruction instrument landing system intercommunication inertial navigation unit instructor operator station instruct
462. ual ENG stoppage inflight or during taxi 5 PWR transfer unit switches ON or No 1 or No 2 HYD CONTR switches out of the BOTH position during taxiing or flight 6 Both ECLs out of the flight position during taxiing or flight 7 Bus tie relay disabled or gang bar placed down 8 APU operations during taxiing or flight 9 Jettison of external sling load s 10 EMERG descent 11 ECL out of flight position with other ENG FADEC switch in REV 12 ENG shutdown with APU inoperative 13 Dual GEN failure 14 Dual RECT failure 15 AFCS DAFCS OFF External sling Load s Hook up 16 AFCS DAFCS OFF Combat Maneuvering Flight 17 AFCS DAFCS OFF Fast Rope Insertion and Extraction Operations 18 AFCS DAFCS OFF Rappelling Operations 19 AFCS DAFCS OFF Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration Operations 20 AFCS DAFCS OFF Rescue Hoist Winch Operations 21 AFCS DAFCS OFF Caving Ladder Operations 22 AFCS DAFCS OFF Shipboard Operations 23 Dual FADEC PRI and or REV failure Dual PRI failure both ENGs operating in REV may be performed in the aircraft by DES trained SP IP or ME at USAACE EAATS or other DA approved training sites and by DES trained instructors DES trained instructors may train other instructors who then may perform this task 24 EGI land EGI 2 failure Additional EPs In addition to the EPs listed in paragraph C 2 SPs IPs may also demonstrate 1 Cargo hook
463. ue exceeds operating limitations enter UA unable Additionally enter N A not applicable when it does not apply TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks CH 47 PERFORMANCE PLANNING CARD For use of this form see TC 3 04 34 the proponent agency is TRADOC DEPARTURE DATA OPERATING WT 1 T O FUEL WT 2 LOAD 3 PRESSURE ALT 4 FAT 5 TAKEOFF GWT 6 1 7 FUEL MANAGEMENT TIME 8 ary PPH BURNOUT RSV DUAL ENGINE SINGLE ENGINE NO LOAD WITH LOAD NO LOAD WITH LOAD MAX TQ AVAIL 10 MIN S E MAX TORQUE AVAIL 30 MIN MAX GWT TO HVR 10 MIN SE IGE OGE 14 5 6 aD ag Peo en MAX GWT TO HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE 24 25 a MAX GWT TO HOVER CONT IGE OGE o GO NO GO TQ 38 lam 0 MAX MSN PROFILE GWT VALIDATION 40 4196 42 43 Vee a A ae ARSPEES Umit UA I CS LWT A 1 G7 BRAG FACTOR G8 1 9 PRESSURE ALT 50 FAR GID WORRLENGME SINGLE ENGINE Wo A wio KOLOD WITH TOAD T O o o MAX GWT S E SESC ARRIVAL DATA mem GD I GD PRESSURE ALT 83 FAT 89 MAX TQ AVAIL 30 MIN MAX GWT TO HVR 10 MIN SE IGE OGE MAX GWT TO HVR 30 MIN IGE OGE MAX GWT TO HOVER CONT IGE OGE ae PREDICTED HVR TQ IGE OGE DA FORM 5701 47 R APR 2013 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE APD LF v1 00 Figure 4 1 DA Form 5701 47 R 3 Supplemental instructions a Departure data Item 1 OPERATING WT The operating WT consists of the basic aircraft WT crew s ba
464. uipment 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 155 Chapter 4 4 Break chemlights for night operations 5 Open aircraft doors if required Actions at 1 minute warning 1 Issue the 1 minute time warning and STAND BY 2 Position ropers in stick formation Actions at flare 1 Identify the target area 2 Deploy bundles equipment safeties and clear ropes 3 Deploy FRIES ropes FRM and AFRM 4 Check ropes to ensure that 15 feet of rope is on the surface FRM Actions for descent 1 FRM AFRM or safety positions the number 1 man at the rope The FRM may exit first or last 2 FRM issues the command GO AFRM echoes GO command and the ropers exit the aircraft 3 Safety informs the PC ROPERS OUT 4 AFRM or safety controls the ropers rate of exit 5 AFRM exits last 6 Aircrew or safeties observe the last roper Safety tells the PC ALL ROPERS AWAY after the last roper is on the surface and signals 7 PC issues command JETTISON or RECOVER ROPES 8 Aircrew or safeties jettison or recover ropes and issue ROPES CLEAR report to the PC 4 156 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 TASK 2056 Crewmember Tasks Perform Rappelling Operations WARNING Ensure that the rappel master is secured to a 5 000 pound or 10 000 pound tie down ring or static line Also ensure that all ropers are on the ground before a
465. um At 100 KTS ground speed a helicopter can displace over 300 meters in 6 seconds Once bombs depart the fighter the helicopter should fly perpendicular to the bomb s line of fall and proceed at MAX speed and minimum altitude This will place the helicopter at the edge of the fragment envelope where fragment density will be at a minimum IR RAD missile evasive maneuvers Refer to classified Army aviation TTP Helicopters Due to their limited performance differential and inability to accelerate out of enemy weapons range once engaged it is impractical for helicopters to break contact from one another Consequently the success of helicopter evasive maneuvers will likely depend on seeing the enemy aircraft first and avoiding its WEZ The most effective means of avoiding a helicopter WEZ is to achieve rotor blade masking by operating above the enemy helicopter 1 Maintain MAX maneuver energy and do not decelerate below bucket speed approximately MAX END MAX R C airspeed 2 Maintain the enemy helicopter in sight until it is destroyed if able and appropriate 3 Vector other friendly helicopters onto the enemy 4 Deny or limit enemy shooting opportunities by exiting the enemy weapon system WEZ and then climb above the enemy helicopter and force rotor blade masking 5 All organic weapons system should be considered based on their individual characteristics and effectiveness against mobile thin skinned targets Note Frien
466. uming flight before reaching fully dark adaptation SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Apply thrust and cyclic control as required to ascend vertically As the aircraft leaves the ground maintain heading with the pedals and a level attitude with the cyclic As the aircraft clears the snow sand dust cloud and clears the barriers accelerate to climb airspeed and trim the aircraft Note Brakes set or released may be determined by the type of surface hard or soft during the reconnaissance Note In some cases applying pitch with the thrust control to blow away loose snow sand dust from around the aircraft is beneficial before performing this maneuver 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 61 Chapter 4 Note The P should be prepared to transition to instruments or FD cues and execute an ITO if ground reference is lost WARNING At night use of the landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS Prior to departure confirm the takeoff plan Perform a HVR PWR check if required Reposition the aircraft if desired to afford a shallower departure angle and minimize PWR requirements During departure adjust the cyclic and the thrust control as required to establish a constant departure angle to clear obstacles All crewmembers must be focused primarily outside for obstacle avoidance MOUNTAIN PINNACLE RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS Analyze winds obstacles and densit
467. ur iterations of the required tasks c Base tasks Table 2 6 table 2 7 and table 2 8 pages 2 10 to 2 13 list the RCM and NCM base task requirements d Mission tasks Table 2 5 page 2 8 lists the RCM and NCM mission tasks The commander will select mission and additional tasks and iterations that support the units METL and individual proficiency The commander will determine the evaluation requirements for all mission tasks and modes of flight and annotate the air crewmember s CTL accordingly e MP tasks Refer to chapter 5 f Evaluation guidelines Aviators designated to fly from both pilot seats are evaluated in each seat during APART evaluations however not all tasks must be evaluated from each crew station Sustainment training for TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Training NCMs is required in each designated crew station NCMs are required to be evaluated from the cabin door position and the left ramp position in the aircraft during the APART but are not required to be evaluated in all tasks from each position 1 Other positions may be evaluated at the discretion of the evaluator APART and annual evaluation tasks are designated by an S I and or NG in the EVAL column of table 2 6 table 2 7 and table 2 8 During the APART instrument evaluation one approach must be performed coupled and one approach un coupled for CH 47F RCMs 2 The tasks selected under the N column do not need to be evaluated
468. ute limit at OGE That is if the GO NO GO TQ is exceeded at the desired HVR altitude then MAX TQ AVAIL 10 minute limit will be exceeded if OGE maneuvers are attempted OGE maneuvers should not be attempted if GO NO GO TQ is exceeded Item 39 GO NO GO TQ with a LOAD Refer to item 38 for definition Item 40 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT for MISSION PROFILE no LOAD The MAX allowable GWT for the mission profile is based on either the MAX GWT of the aircraft structural limit or the highest altitude and associated TEMP PWR limit during the entire mission Determine this value by comparing MAX GWT to HVR 30 MIN items 22 and 98 and MAX GWT CONT PWR item 56 for cruise Select the lowest GWT value that will be the limiting factor for the entire mission and add expendables that will be used prior to the reaching the highest altitude TEMP if applicable Expendables include items such as fuel consumed or cargo drop off Record this value as the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT for MISSION PROFILE 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 4 23 Chapter 4 Example If the maximum allowable GWT for the mission profile is limited to 40 000 pounds at the destination item 81 and the aircraft will consume 2 000 pounds of fuel en route then the maximum allowable GWT for takeoff would be 42 000 pounds Note If manually computing the performance planning data items 40 thru 43 must be completed after all other data is computed Item 41 VALIDATION FACTOR no LOAD Validation factor is a T
469. valuating crewmember response to an ineffective crewmember In the aircraft the trainer evaluator will ensure safe landing areas are available for ENG failure training and that aircraft limits are not exceeded Note When the CH 47D F crew consists of one NCM and two RCMs the NCM must be an RL 1 FE TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks 2 Procedures This section explains the portions of a task accomplished by an individual or crew f Other considerations This section defines considerations for task accomplishment under various flight modes for example night or NVG and environmental conditions such as snow sand dust and mountain pinnacle ridgeline operations Crewmembers must consider additional aspects to a task when performing it in different environmental conditions The inclusion of environmental considerations in a task does not relieve the commander of the requirement for developing an environmental training program AW TC 3 04 11 Specific requirements for different aircraft or mission equipment for example bucket or ERFS may also be addressed as a consideration Training considerations establish specific actions and standards used in the training environment 1 Night and NVG Wires and other hazards are much more difficult to detect and must be accurately marked and plotted on maps Use proper scanning techniques to detect traffic and obstacles and to avoid spatial disorientation The P should make all internal checks
470. valuation An un commanded out of trim condition may occur when the AFCS DAFCS system SEL switch is cycled from BOTH to No 1 or No 2 Do not initially correct the out of trim condition if it one occurs so that the required input to the directional pedals to place the aircraft back in trim may be noted measured If no changes in aircraft trim are noted a measurement is not required If the out of trim conditions has a rapid onset or is deemed excessive direct the RCM to make immediate inputs to the directional pedals to place the aircraft back in trim b F During the FD evaluation ground speed GSPD checks note current GSPD and current winds to preclude commanding the aircraft to a GSPD that will result in airspeeds outside the operator s manual limitations During the TQ limiting check physically MAN the thrust control to prevent the aircraft from over torquing Ensure all FD cues are validated prior to performing the go around check c Navigation communication miscellaneous instrument readings and instrument readings Need to be completed for GMTFs but only the applicable portion needs to be completed for LMTFs d Verify all required steps are completed Crew stations The MP will be in the left seat for the 60 KIAS KCAS and 140 KIAS KCAS speed sweep checks to ensure if the lateral stick position directional pedal separation measurement is required or if the longitudinal indicator has not been verified previously TRA
471. ven crew weights aircraft configuration mission cargo passenger data the applicable operator s manual and a completed or blank DD Form 365 4 STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Verify that GWT and CG remain within aircraft limits for the duration of the flight IAW the appropriate operator s manual 2 Identify all mission or flight limitations imposed by WT or CG 3 Ensure DD Form 365 4 has been completed within the preceding 90 days DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will brief crewmembers on any limitations b Crewmembers will continually monitor aircraft loading during the mission such as fuel transfers external sling load s and cargo load s to ensure CG remains within limits 2 Procedures a Using the completed DD Forms 365 4 verifies that aircraft GWT and CG will remain within the allowable limits for the entire flight Note all GWT and or loading task maneuver restrictions aircraft limitations If there is no completed DD Form 365 4 that meets the requirements of AR 95 1 prepare a DD Form 365 4 IAW the appropriate operator s manual and TM 55 1500 342 23 or complete a new DD Form 365 4 b Verify the aircraft CG in relation to CG limits at predetermined times during the flight when an aircraft s configuration requires special attention for example when it is a critical requirement to keep a certain amount of fuel in a particular tank Conduct CG checks fo
472. wmembers and the hook up crew are familiar with the hand and arm signals shown in FM 4 20 197 appendix A Note AFCS DAFCS OFF external sling load s hook ups are not authorized except in an actual EMERG NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS 1 2 For unaided night flight one landing searchlight will be unfiltered white light When NVG are used hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and crew coordination If possible use an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles 3 The rate of descent and rate of closure should be slightly slower to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes 4 The NCM calling the load s should wear NVG during external sling load s operations The NCM will notify the PC any time he or she must flip up the NVG White lighting such as flashlight or searchlight may be used as necessary to view the hooks or load s TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l 2 Training will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 95 27 FM 4 20 197 FM 4 20 198 FM 4 20 198 FM 21 60 and TM 10 1670 295 23 amp P 4 82 TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks TASK 1064 Perform a Roll On Landing CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter and g
473. ws exercise caution when performing flight duties when the wet bulb globe temperature TEMP is above 75 degrees Fahrenheit a RCM tasks When required crewmembers will receive CBRNE training in the task s listed below The commander may select other tasks based on the unit mission Crewmembers will perform at least one iteration of the tasks listed below annually while wearing the CBRNE mask at a minimum Task 1028 applies to RCMs only Performance tasks listed below may be conducted in any mode as specified by the commander EP 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 13 Chapter 2 training may be conducted if the IP is not wearing a protective mask IAW this ATM EP training should be performed in the FS TFPS or a static aircraft CBRNE requirements will be specified in the unit SOP 1 Task 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks 2 Task 1028 Perform Hover Power Check 3 Task 1040 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff 4 Task 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach 5 Task 1408 Perform Terrain Flight 6 Task 1411 Perform Terrain Flight Deceleration b NCM tasks NCMs will receive CBRNE training in the following base tasks The commander may select other tasks based on the unit mission 1 Task 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks 2 Task 1042 Perform Cruise Check Procedures c CBRNE training Commanders may authorize
474. xiliary Power Unit Operations CONDITIONS In a CH 47D F helicopter with an operational APU and a qualified and current APU operator Note This task only applies to NCMs STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 2 3 4 5 2 Preflight all systems to be operated during APU operations Operate APU systems and equipment IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL Shutdown systems equipment and APU IAW the appropriate operator s manual CL Perform or describe appropriate EPs for APU fire IAW appropriate operator s manual Enter appropriate information if required on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 408 13 1 DESCRIPTION I Crew actions a The NCM will coordinate with and brief any additional ground support personnel before APU start Perform preflight inspection of the APU The NCM will ensure that the rotor blade tie downs are removed if PTU operation is required The NCM will brief all necessary personnel on procedures to be followed in an EMERG The NCM will direct assistance from any additional ground support personnel to aid in maintaining the clearance of APU exhaust areas during the APU start sequence and any subsequent ground checks b Additional ground support personnel should assist the NCM as directed Procedures a Before starting APU 1 Brief the additional ground support personnel as necessary Review aircraft logbook for any faults that w
475. y departing the missile engagement zone or WEZ prior to weapons impact Regardless of the type of SACLOS missile the weakest part of the guidance system is the enemy gunner Older ATGMs glide during most of their flight resulting in low energy and poor missile maneuverability This combined with relatively high latency within the guidance systems means the missile can be readily out flown by the targeted aircraft With high speed high G SACLOS antiaircraft systems the missiles themselves are more difficult to be out flown by a helicopter due to its maneuverability speed and decreased reaction time by the aircrew d Radar guided weapons Refer to classified Army aviation TTP e Heat seeking IR missiles Refer to classified Army aviation TTP f Fixed wing Fighter aircraft are characterized by their high performance with high attack speeds Their ability to move vertically in excess of 40 000 FPM means that fighter aircraft can easily come and go from the area without detection by the attack helicopter crew Fighters can work independently or in a minimum of two aircraft section If one is detected expect another enemy aircraft nearby When operating in an area of possible enemy fighter activity perform the following actions 1 Be predictable to friendly fighters by being on the air tasking order and squawk the appropriate transponder codes modes to avoid fratricide 2 Be unpredictable to enemy fighters by using night and or adverse Wx to
476. y altitude Perform a HVR PWR check if required Determine the best takeoff direction and path for conditions After clearing obstacles accelerate the aircraft to the desired airspeed Note Where drop offs are located along the takeoff path the aircraft may be maneuvered downslope to gain airspeed MUD MUSKEG TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS Perform one of the following takeoff techniques 1 Dry muskeg tundra areas A vertical takeoff may be best in drier areas where the aircraft has not sunk into the muskeg tundra or where obstacles prohibit motion Smoothly increase the thrust control until the crew confirms that the wheels skis are free Adjust flight controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff 2 Wet areas In wet areas where the aircraft is likely to have sunk or is stuck in the mud muskeg tundra the following technique may be best With the cyclic in the neutral position smoothly increase the thrust control As HVR PWR is approached adjust the cyclic as necessary to ascend vertically to break the suction of the wheels skis When free adjust the flight controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff Note Before performing operations in a mud muskeg tundra environment it is important to understand dynamic rollover and differential airspeed hold DASH actuator characteristics TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFPS 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 FS TFP
477. y decrease the rate of decent and forward speed until termination of the maneuver Surrounding terrain or vegetation may decrease contrast and cause degraded depth perception during the approach Before descending below obstacles determine the need for artificial lighting 3 4 Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Using the white light may impair night vision for several MINs Therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS 1 Termination to a point OGE a This termination requires OGE PWR and may be used for some snow sand dust landings b Make the approach to an OGE HVR over the intended landing point c Slowly lower the thrust control and allow the aircraft to descend The rate of descent will be determined by the rate in which the snow sand dust is blown from the intended landing point d Remain above the snow sand dust cloud until it dissipates and visual references can be seen for touchdown After ground contact lower the thrust control to the ground detent position and neutralize the flight controls Termination to the surface with forward speed a This termination may be made to an improved landing surface or suitable area with minimal ground references b Once the appropri
478. y to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FRIES AWR TC 21 24 and USSOCOM regulation 350 6 Table 4 9 Example of a fast rope operations checklist Fast rope operations checklist 1 Pre roping actions Receive a briefing from the officer in charge or the AMC Coordinate and brief all participants Rig aircraft and conduct a joint inspection Brief roper safety s assistant fast rope masters AFRMs and fast rope master FRM Rig and inspect ropers NIJA AJOJN Conduct a static rehearsal Aircraft loading 1 Position equipment and personnel 2 Ensure that all personnel have straps or seat belts Actions inflight 1 Monitor the command NET 2 Monitor the aircrew NET 3 Monitor the flight route Actions at 10 minute warning applies to long infiltrations 1 Issue the 10 minute time warning and GET READY 2 Check equipment and belay system hook up 3 Check fast rope hook up 4 Secure fast rope bar in position 5 Ensure the fast rope is back coiled and markers are attached Actions at 6 minute warning 1 Issue the 6 minute warning 2 Remove personnel restraints or seat belts 3 Position personnel and eq
479. ying hour requirements NVG NVG RL 1 RCMs will have a minimum requirement of 9 hours NVG in their primary aircraft RCM will complete the requirements in the aircraft while occupying a crew station with access to the flight controls The commander will determine NCM semi annual flying hour requirements for NVG The requirement will be tailored to the individual NCM based on proficiency and experience NCMs will complete the requirements while performing crew duties c Annual flight simulator FS transportable flight proficiency simulator TFPS device flying hour requirements All aviators within 200 statute miles SMs of a compatible synthetic flight training system SFTS device will complete the following number of hours in the SFTS The commander will determine FS requirements for RCMs outside of 200 SM RCMs may apply 12 hours of CH 47D FS or in the CH 47F TFPS time toward their semi annual flying hour requirement Time flown in non compatible FS TFPS will not be credited towards the minimum annual flying hour or FS TFPS requirements AR 95 1 paragraph 4 11d The only compatible FS TFPS are the CH 47D 2B31 and CH 47F TFPS 2B47F ARNG RCMs refer to NGR 95 1 1 CH 47D requirements a FAC 1 18 hours annually b FAC 2 12 hours annually I FAC 3 10 hours semi annually regardless of distance from a CH 47D FS 5 April 2013 TC 3 04 34 2 7 Chapter 2 2 5 2 8 2 CH 47F requirements a FAC 1 24 hours annually b FAC 2 18 hours a
480. ze the CAAS CDU using the initialization page and embedded GPS inertial navigation system EGI page IAW the CL 3 Enter and store data on the data page as necessary to effectively complete assigned mission Transfer data from the data transfer unit DTU to the CAAS CDU and save data from the CAAS to the DTU as necessary 4 Enter and engage FLPN to include search patterns of FLPN page of the CAAS CDU The P should also be able to modify existing FLPNs inflight to accomplish mission changes en route 5 Use the equipment status EQP STAT page of the CAAS CDU to determine system status and determine mission accomplishment relative to operational condition of displayed equipment 6 Select and set up the avionics using the CNI pages of the CDU 7 Use the navigation radio s NAV RADIOJ S control page of the CDU to select and tune the proper navigation aid 8 Fix positions and record positions as waypoints using the MARK button on the CDU b Address EP associated with MFD CAAS and CDU failures NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Ensure MFD power switch is set to appropriate mode for current conditions NVG or NORM and brightness contrast are at an acceptable level for day night or NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS 2 Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or CH 47 TFPS REFERENCES Appropriate common references
481. zone NCM Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for paradrop operations IAW TM 1 1520 240 10 TM 1 1520 271 10 FM 3 05 211 FM 3 21 220 and the unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 4 166 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with paradrop operations EMERG and communication procedures The PC will ensure that the aircraft is rigged b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver c The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles and traffic d The P will ensure that the jumpmaster or FE retrieves the static lines as soon as the last parachutist has cleared the aircraft e The NCM will ensure that the aircraft is prepared for paradrop operations The NCM or the jumpmaster will acknowledge all communications from the P and P The NCM will inform the P or P when all parachutists have exited the aircraft and when the deployment bags have been recovered Procedures a Maintain altitude airspeed and ground track as determined during pre mission planning and jumpmaster s instructions TC 3 04 34 5 April 2013 Crewmember Tasks b Perform inflight procedures AW FM 3 05 211 FM 3 21 220 and unit SOP c The FE CE will 1 Remove the ramp extensions and ensure that the ramp and cabin floor are clean and dry 2 Install the static line anchor cable and retriever if needed

- AskTOP.net

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents